This is a modern-English version of The Art of Bookbinding: A practical treatise, with plates and diagrams, originally written by Zaehnsdorf, Joseph William. It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.

THE ART OF BOOK­BIND­ING. A PRAC­TI­CAL TREA­TISE. BY JO­SEPH W. ZAEHNS­DORF.

TECHNOLOGICAL HANDBOOKS.
ART OF BOOKBINDING.
TECHNOLOGICAL HANDBOOKS.

1. DYEING AND TISSUE-PRINTING. By William Crookes, F.R.S., V.P.C.S. 5s.

1. DYEING AND TISSUE-PRINTING. By William Crookes, F.R.S., V.P.C.S. 5s.

2. GLASS MANUFACTURE. INTRODUCTORY ESSAY, by H. J. Powell, B.A. (Whitefriars Glass Works); CROWN AND SHEET GLASS, by Henry Chance, M.A. (Chance Bros., Birmingham); PLATE GLASS, by H. G. Harris, Assoc. Memb. Inst. C.E. 3s. 6d.

2. GLASS MANUFACTURE. INTRODUCTORY ESSAY, by H. J. Powell, B.A. (Whitefriars Glass Works); Crown AND SHEET GLASS, by Henry Chance, M.A. (Chance Bros., Birmingham); PLATE GLASS, by H. G. Harris, Assoc. Memb. Inst. C.E. 3s. 6d.

3. COTTON SPINNING; Its Devel­op­ment, Prin­ci­ples, and Prac­tice. By R. Mars­den, Ed­i­tor of the “Tex­tile Mer­cury.” With an Ap­pen­dix on Steam En­gines and Boil­ers. 3rd edition, revised, 6s. 6d.

3. COTTON SPINNING; Its Development, Principles, and Practice. By R. Marsden, Editor of the “Textile Mercury.” With an Appendix on Steam Engines and Boilers. 3rd edition, revised, 6s. 6d.

4. COAL-TAR COLOURS, The Chemistry of. With special reference to their application to Dyeing, &c. By Dr. R. Benedikt. Trans­lated from the German by E. Knecht, Ph.D. 2nd edition, en­larged, 6s. 6d.

4. COAL-TAR COLORS, The Chemistry of. With special reference to their application in Dyeing, etc. By Dr. R. Benedikt. Translated from the German by E. Knecht, Ph.D. 2nd edition, expanded, 6s. 6d.

5. WOOLLEN AND WORSTED CLOTH MAN­U­FAC­TURE. By Professor Roberts Beau­mont. 2nd edition, revised. 7s. 6d.

5. WOOLLEN AND WORSTED CLOTH MANUFACTURE. By Professor Roberts Beaumont. 2nd edition, revised. 7s. 6d.

6. PRINTING. By C. T. Jacobi, Manager of the Chis­wick Press. 5s.

6. PRINTING. By C. T. Jacobi, Manager of the Chiswick Press. 5s.

7. BOOKBINDING. By J. W. Zaehns­dorf.

7. BOOKBINDING. By J. W. Zaehns­dorf.

9. COTTON WEAVING. By R. Mars­den. In pre­par­a­tion.

9. COTTON WEAVING. By R. Mars­den. Coming Soon.

FLORENTINE.
Small folio.
TECHNOLOGICAL HANDBOOKS.
THE ART
OF
BOOKBINDING.
A PRACTICAL TREATISE.
BY
JOSEPH W. ZAEHNSDORF.
WITH PLATES AND DIAAGRAMS.
SECOND EDITION, REVISED AND ENLARGED.
LONDON: GEORGE BELL AND SONS,
YORK STREET, COVENT GARDEN.
1890.
CHIS­WICK PRESS:—C. WHIT­TING­HAM AND CO., TOOKS COURT, CHAN­CERY LANE.
DEDICATED TO
HUGH OWEN, ESQ., F.S.A.,
AS A SLIGHT ACK­NOW­LEDG­MENT OF HIS COUN­SEL AND FRIEND­SHIP, AND IN AD­MIR­A­TION OF HIS KNOW­LEDGE OF
BOOKBINDING.

PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION.

The first edition of this book was written for the use of amateurs, but I found that amongst the members of the trade my little volume had a large sale, and in a short time the edition became exhausted. Repeated applications for the book have induced me to issue this second edition. I have adhered to the arrangement of the first, but a great deal of fresh matter has been added, which I trust will be found useful. Should any of my fellow-workmen find anything new to them I shall be satisfied, knowing that I have done my duty in spreading such knowledge as may contribute towards the advancement of the beautiful art of bookbinding.

The first edition of this book was written for amateurs, but I noticed that it sold well among professionals in the trade, and soon the edition ran out. Continued requests for the book have led me to release this second edition. I've kept the same format as the first, but I've added a lot of new content that I hope will be helpful. If any of my fellow workers discover something new, I’ll be satisfied, knowing that I’ve done my part in sharing knowledge that can help advance the beautiful art of bookbinding.

I have to record my obligations to those gentlemen who have assisted me by courteously describing the various machines of their invention with which the book is illustrated. The object, however, of illustrating this work with engravings of machines is simply to recognize the fact that books are bound by machinery. To a mechanical worker must be left the task of describing the processes used in this method.

I need to acknowledge the gentlemen who helped me by kindly explaining the different machines they invented that are illustrated in this book. However, the purpose of including engravings of these machines is simply to highlight that books are produced using machinery. It's up to a mechanical worker to explain the processes involved in this method.

  • LIST OF PLATES.

  • FLORENTINEFrontispiece
  • Grolier
  • GASCON
  • Renaissance
  • ANTIQUE WITH GOLD LINE
  • DEROME
  • Grolier
  • MAIOLI

CONTENTS.

PART I.—FORWARDING.

PART I.—SHIPPING.

PAGE
CHAPTER I. Folding: Re­fold­ing — Ma­chines — Gath­er­ing 3–8
CHAPTER II. Beating and Rolling: Machines 9–12
CHAPTER 3. Collating: Interleaving 13–19
CHAPTER IV. Marking up and Sawing in 20–23
CHAPTER V. Sewing: Flexible — Ordinary 23–32
CHAPTER VI. Forwarding: End Papers — Cobb Paper — Surface Paper — Marbled Paper — Printed and other Fancy Paper — Coloured Paste Paper 33–36
CHAPTER VII. Pasting up 36–37
CHAPTER 8. Putting on the End Papers 38–41
CHAPTER 9. Trimming 41–44
Chapter X. Gluing up 45–46
CHAPTER 11. Rounding 46–48
CHAPTER 12. Backing 48–51
CHAPTER 13. Mill-boards 51–57
CHAPTER 14. Drawing-in and Pressing 57–59
C XV. Cutting 59–66
CHAPTER 16. Colouring the Edges: Sprinkled Edges — Colours for Sprinkling — Plain Colouring — Marbled Edges — Spot Marble — Comb or Nonpareil Marble — Spanish Marble — Edges — Sizing 67–77
CHAPTER 17. Gilt Edges: The Gold Cushion — Gold Knife — Burnishers — Glaire Water or Size — Scrapers — The Gold Leaf — Gilt on Red — Tooled Edges — Painted Edges 78–83
CHAPTER 18. Head-Banding 83–86
CHAPTER 19. Preparing for Covering: lining up 87–90
CHAPTER XX. Covering: Russia — Calf — Vellum or Parch­ment — Roan — Cloth — Vel­vet — Silk and Satin — Half-bound Work 90–97
CHAPTER 21. Pasting Down: Joints — Calf, Russia, etc. 97–100
CHAPTER 22. Calf Colouring: Black — Brown — Yellow — Sprinkles — Marbles — Tree-marbles — Dabs 100–108

PART II. — FINISHING.

Part II - Finishing.

CHAPTER 23. Finishing: Tools and Materials required for Finishing — Polishing Irons — Gold-rag — India-rubber — Gold-cushion — Gold Leaf — Sponges — Glaire — Cotton Wool — Varnish — Finishing — Morocco — Gold Work — Inlaid Work — Porous — Full Gilt Back — Run-up — Mitred Back — Pressing — Graining — Finishing with Dry Preparation — Velvet — Silk — Vellum — Blocking
111–153

GENERAL INFORMATION.

GENERAL INFO.

CHAPTER 24. Washing and Cleaning: Requisites — Manipulation — Dust — Water Stains — Damp Stains — Mud — Fox-marks — Finger-marks, commonly called “Thumb-marks” — Blood Stains — Ink Stains (writing) — Ink Stains (Marking Ink, Silver) — Fat Stains — Ink — Reviving Old Writings — To Restore Writing effaced by Chlorine — To Restore MSS. faded by time — To Preserve Drawings or Manuscripts — To fix Drawings or Pencil Marks — To render Paper Waterproof — To render Paper Incombustible — Deciphering Burnt Documents — Insects — Glue — Rice Glue or Paste — Paste — Photographs — Albumen — To Prevent Tools, Machines, etc., from Rusting — To Clean Silver Mountings — To Clean Sponges
157–172
Glossary 173
INDEX 181

INTRODUCTION.

Bookbinding carries us back to the time when leaden tablets with inscribed hieroglyphics were fastened together with rings, which formed what to us would be the binding of the volumes. We might go even still further back, when tiles of baked clay with cuneiform characters were incased one within the other, so that if the cover of one were broken or otherwise damaged there still remained another, and yet another covering; by which care history has been handed down from generation to generation. The binding in the former would consist of the rings which bound the leaden tablets together, and in the latter, the simple covering formed the binding which preserved the contents.

Bookbinding takes us back to the time when heavy tablets with carved hieroglyphics were held together with rings, creating what we would recognize as the binding of books. We could go even further back to when baked clay tiles with cuneiform writing were nested inside one another, so that if one cover broke or was damaged, there was still another layer to protect the contents; this careful method has allowed history to be passed down through generations. In the first case, the binding consisted of the rings that held the heavy tablets together, and in the second, the simple covering formed the binding that preserved the content.

We must pass on from these, and make another pause, when vellum strips were attached together in one continuous length with a roller at each end. The reader unrolled the one, and rolled the other as he perused the work. Books, prized either for their rarity, sacred character, or costliness, would be kept in a round box or case, so that the appearance of a library in Ancient Jerusalem would seem to us as if it were a collection of canisters. The next step was the fastening of separate leaves together, thus making a back, and covering the whole as a protection in a most simple form; the only object being to keep the several leaves in connected sequence. I believe the most ancient form of books formed of separate leaves, will be found in the sacred books of Ceylon which were formed of palm leaves, written on with a metal style, and the binding was merely a silken string tied through one end so loosely as to admit of each leaf being laid down flat when turned over. When the mode of preserving MS. on animal membrane or vellum in separate leaves came into use, the binding was at first only a simple piece of leather wrapped round the book and tied with a thong. These books were not kept on their edges, but were laid down flat on the shelves, and had small cedar tablets hanging from them upon which their titles were inscribed.

We need to move on from this and take another pause, when strips of vellum were connected in one continuous length with a roller at each end. The reader would unroll one side and roll the other as they read the work. Books, valued for their rarity, sacred nature, or expense, were kept in a round box or case, making a library in Ancient Jerusalem look to us like a collection of canisters. The next step was binding individual leaves together to create a spine and covering the whole thing for protection in a very simple way; the main goal was to keep the leaves in order. I believe the oldest form of books made of separate leaves can be found in the sacred books of Ceylon, which were made from palm leaves, written on with a metal stylus, and bound with a loose silken string tied through one end, allowing each leaf to lay flat when turned over. When the method of preserving manuscripts on animal skin or vellum in separate leaves was introduced, the binding was initially just a simple piece of leather wrapped around the book and tied with a thong. These books weren’t stored upright but were laid flat on the shelves, with small cedar tablets hanging from them that had their titles written on.

The ordinary books for general use were only fastened strongly at the back, with wooden boards for the sides, and simply a piece of leather up the back.

The regular books meant for everyday use were just secured tightly at the back, with wooden boards on the sides, and just a strip of leather along the spine.

In the sixth century, bookbinding had already taken its place as an “Art,” for we have the “Byzantine coatings,” as they are called. They are of metal, gold, silver or copper gilt, and sometimes they are enriched with precious stones. The monks, during this century, took advantage of the immense thickness of the wooden boards and frequently hollowed them out to secrete their relics in the cavities. Bookbinding was then confined entirely to the monks who were the literati of the period. Then the art was neglected for some centuries, owing to the plunder and pillage that overran Europe, and books were destroyed to get at the jewels that were supposed to be hidden in the different parts of the covering, so that few now remain to show how bookbinding was then accomplished and to what extent.

In the sixth century, bookbinding had already established itself as an "Art," known for its "Byzantine coatings." These coverings were made of metal, often gold, silver, or copper gilt, and were sometimes adorned with precious stones. During this time, monks took advantage of the thick wooden boards, often hollowing them out to hide their relics inside the cavities. Bookbinding was entirely the domain of the monks, who were the scholars of the era. However, the art fell into neglect for several centuries due to the plunder and destruction that swept through Europe, resulting in many books being damaged or destroyed in search of jewels believed to be hidden within their covers. As a result, few examples remain to show us how bookbinding was practiced and to what extent it had developed.

We must now pass on to the middle ages, when samples of binding were brought from the East by the crusaders, and these may well be prized by their owners for their delicacy of finish. The monks, who still held the Art of Bookbinding in their hands, improved upon these Eastern specimens. Each one devoted himself to a different branch: one planed the oaken boards to a proper size, another stretched and coloured the leather; and the work was thus divided into branches, as it is now. The task was one of great difficulty, seeing how rude were the implements then in use.

We now need to move on to the Middle Ages, when samples of bookbinding were brought from the East by the crusaders, and these were highly valued by their owners for their fine craftsmanship. The monks, who still practiced the art of bookbinding, improved on these Eastern examples. Each monk focused on a different aspect: one shaped the oak boards to the right size, another stretched and dyed the leather; and the work was divided into specialties, just like it is today. The task was quite challenging, considering the primitive tools they had at the time.

Monastic. Venetian.

The art of printing gave new life to our trade, and, during the fifteenth century bookbinding made great progress on account of the greater facility and cheapness with which books were produced. The printer was then his own binder; but as books increased in number, bookbinding became a separate art-trade of itself. This was a step decidedly in the right direction. The art improved so much, that in the sixteenth century some of the finest samples of bookbinding were executed. Morocco having been introduced, and fine delicate tools cut, the art was encouraged by great families, who, liking the Venetian patterns, had their books bound in that style. The annexed woodcut will give a fair idea of a Venetian tool. During this period the French had bookbinding almost entirely in their hands, and Mons. Grolier, who loved the art, had his books bound under his own supervision in the most costly manner. His designs consisted of bold gold lines arranged geometrically with great accuracy, crossing one another and intermixed with small leaves or sprays. These were in outlines shaded or filled up with closely worked cross lines. Not, however, satisfied with these simple traceries, he embellished them still more by staining or painting them black, green, red, and even with silver, so that they formed bands interlacing each other in a most graceful manner. Opposite is a centre block of Grolier. It will be seen how these lines entwine, and how the small tools are shaded with lines. If the reader has had the good fortune to see one of these specimens, has he not wondered at the taste displayed? To the French must certainly be given the honour of bringing the art to such a perfection. Francis I. and the succeeding monarchs, with the French nobility, placed the art on such a high eminence, that even now we are compelled to look to these great masterpieces as models of style. Not only was the exterior elaborate in ornament, but the edges were gilded and tooled; and even painted. We must wonder at the excellence of the materials and the careful workmanship which has preserved the bindings, even to the colour of the leather, in perfect condition to the present day.

The art of printing revitalized our trade, and during the fifteenth century, bookbinding advanced significantly due to the easier and cheaper production of books. The printer was also the binder back then, but as the number of books increased, bookbinding evolved into its own distinct craft. This was a move definitely in the right direction. The quality improved so much that in the sixteenth century, we saw some of the finest bookbinding examples. With the introduction of Morocco leather and the creation of fine, delicate tools, the craft was supported by prominent families who, impressed by Venetian designs, had their books bound in that style. The attached woodcut gives a good representation of a Venetian tool. At this time, the French were predominantly in control of bookbinding, and Mons. Grolier, who appreciated the art, had his books bound under his close supervision in the most extravagant way. His designs featured bold gold lines arranged geometrically with precise accuracy, interweaving and combined with small leaves or sprays. These were outlined and shaded or filled with closely worked crosshatching. However, not content with these simple patterns, he enhanced them further by staining or painting them black, green, red, and even silver, so they formed bands that intertwined in a very elegant way. Opposite is a center block of Grolier. You can see how these lines twist together and how the small tools are shaded with lines. If the reader has been fortunate enough to see one of these pieces, hasn’t he marveled at the taste exhibited? The French definitely deserve credit for bringing the art to such perfection. Francis I and the subsequent kings, along with the French nobility, elevated the art to such high standards that even today we look at these masterpieces as style benchmarks. The exterior was not just ornate, but the edges were gilded, tooled, and even painted. We should be amazed at the quality of the materials and the meticulous craftsmanship that has kept the bindings, including the leather’s color, in pristine condition to this day.

GROLIER.
Royal folio
Grolier.

There is little doubt that the first examples of the style now known as “Grolier” were produced in Venice, under the eye of Grolier himself, and according to his own designs; and that workmen in France, soon rivalled and excelled the early attempts. The work of Maioli may be distinctly traced by the bold simplicity and purity of his designs; and more especially by the broader gold lines which margin the coloured bands of geometric and arabesque ornamentation.

There’s no doubt that the first examples of the style now called “Grolier” were created in Venice, under Grolier's supervision and according to his designs. Soon after, craftsmen in France began to match and even surpass these early efforts. Maioli’s work can be clearly identified by the bold simplicity and purity of his designs, particularly through the wider gold lines that outline the colored bands of geometric and arabesque decoration.

All books, it must be understood, were not bound in so costly a manner, for we find pigskin, vellum and calf in use. The latter was especially preferred on account of its peculiar softness, smooth surface, and great aptitude for receiving impressions of dumb or blind tooling. It was only towards the latter part of the sixteenth century that the English binders began to employ delicate or fine tooling.

All books, it should be noted, were not bound in such an expensive way, as we see materials like pigskin, vellum, and calf being used. The latter was particularly favored because of its unique softness, smooth surface, and excellent ability to hold the impressions from blind or decorative tooling. It wasn't until the later part of the sixteenth century that English binders started using delicate or fine tooling.

During the seventeenth century the names of Du Sueil and Le Gascon were known for the delicacy and extreme minuteness of their finishing. Not disdaining the bindings of the Italian school, they took from them new ideas; for whilst the Grolier bindings were bold, the Du Sueil and Le Gascon more resembled fine lace work of intricate design, with harmonizing flowers and other objects, from which we may obtain a great variety of artistic character. During this period embroidered velvet was much in use. Then a change took place and a style was adopted which by some people would be preferred to the gorgeous bindings of the sixteenth century. The sides were finished quite plainly with only a line round the edge of the boards (and in some instances not even that) with a coat of arms or some badge in the centre.

During the seventeenth century, the names Du Sueil and Le Gascon were recognized for the finesse and incredible detail of their finishing work. They appreciated the bindings of the Italian style, drawing inspiration from them. While Grolier bindings were bold, the Du Sueil and Le Gascon styles resembled fine lacework with intricate designs, featuring harmonizing flowers and other motifs that allowed for a wide variety of artistic expressions. During this time, embroidered velvet was very popular. Then, a shift occurred, and a style emerged that some people preferred over the ornate bindings of the sixteenth century. The sides were finished quite simply, often just with a line around the edges of the boards (and in some cases not even that), with a coat of arms or some badge in the center.

Towards the end of the seventeenth century bookbinding began to improve, particularly with regard to forwarding. The joints were true and square, and the back was made to open more freely. In the eighteenth century the names of Derome, Roger Payne, and others are prominent as masters of the craft, and the Harleian style was introduced.

Towards the end of the 17th century, bookbinding started to improve, especially in terms of construction. The joints were precise and square, and the spine was designed to open more easily. In the 18th century, names like Derome, Roger Payne, and others stand out as masters of the craft, and the Harleian style was introduced.

The plate facing may be fairly estimated as a good specimen of Derome. Notice the extreme simplicity and yet the symmetry of the design; its characteristic feature being the boldness of the corners and the gradual diminishing of the scroll work as it nears the centre of the panel. Morocco and calf were the leathers used for this binding.

The plate facing can be regarded as a great example of Derome. Check out the extreme simplicity and symmetry of the design; its standout feature is the bold corners and the way the scroll work gradually shrinks as it gets closer to the center of the panel. Morocco and calf were the types of leather used for this binding.

GASCON.
8vo
T. Way, Photo-lith.

Hand coloured calf was at this period at its height, and the Cambridge calf may be named as a pattern of one of the various styles, and one that is approved of by many at the present day—the calf was sprinkled all over, save a square panel left uncoloured in the centre of the boards.

Hand-colored calf was at its peak during this time, and the Cambridge calf can be cited as an example of one of the many styles that is still favored by many today—the calf was spattered all over, except for a square panel left uncolored in the center of the boards.

Harleian.

The Harleian style took its name from Harley, Earl of Oxford. It was red morocco with a broad tooled border and centre panels. We have the names of various masters who pushed the art forward to very great excellence during this century. Baumgarten and Benedict, two Germans of considerable note in London; Mackinly, from whose house also fine work was sent out, and by whom good workmen were educated whose specimens almost equal the work of their master. There were two other Germans, Kalthoeber and Staggemeier, each having his own peculiar style. Kalthoeber is credited with having first introduced painting on the edges. This I must dispute, as it was done in the sixteenth century. To him, however, must certainly be given the credit of having discovered the secret, if ever lost, and renewing it on his best work. We must now pass on to Roger Payne, that unfortunate and erring man but clever workman, who lived during the latter part of the eighteenth century. His taste may be seen from the woodcut. He generally used small tools, and by combining them formed a variety of beautiful designs. He cut most of these tools himself, either because he could not find a tool cutter of sufficient skill, or that he found it difficult to pay the cost. We are told by anecdote, that he drank much and lived recklessly; but notwithstanding all his irregular habits, his name ought to be respected for the work he executed. His backs were firm, and his forwarding excellent; and he introduced a class of finishing that was always in accordance with the character or subject of the book. His only fault was the peculiar coloured paper with which he made his end papers.

The Harleian style is named after Harley, the Earl of Oxford. It featured red morocco leather with a wide tooled border and central panels. We know of several masters who advanced the art significantly during this century. Baumgarten and Benedict, two notable Germans in London; Mackinly, whose shop also produced excellent work and trained skilled workers whose creations almost matched their master’s work. There were two other Germans, Kalthoeber and Staggemeier, each with their own unique style. Kalthoeber is said to have introduced painting on the edges first. I must challenge this claim since it was already done in the sixteenth century. However, he certainly deserves credit for rediscovering the technique, if it was ever lost, and applying it in his best work. We now need to move on to Roger Payne, an unfortunate and errant man but a talented craftsman, who lived during the late eighteenth century. His taste can be seen in the woodcut. He generally used small tools and combined them to create a variety of beautiful designs. He made most of these tools himself, either because he couldn't find a skilled tool cutter or found it hard to afford the cost. Anecdotes tell us that he drank heavily and lived carelessly; nonetheless, despite his irregular habits, his name should be respected for the work he accomplished. His backs were sturdy, and his forwarding was excellent; he introduced a style of finishing that always matched the character or subject of the book. His only flaw was the unusual colored paper he used for his end papers.

Roger Payne.

Coloured or fancy calf has now taken the place of the hand-coloured. Coloured cloth has come so much into use, that this branch of the trade alone monopolizes nearly three-fourths of the workmen and females employed in bookbinding. Many other substitutes for leather have been introduced, and a number of imitations of morocco and calf are in the market; this, with the use of machinery, has made so great a revolution in the trade, that it is now divided into two distinct branches—cloth work and extra work.

Coloured or decorative calf has now replaced hand-coloured. Coloured cloth is so widely used that this part of the industry employs nearly three-quarters of the workers and women in bookbinding. Many alternatives to leather have been introduced, and there are several imitations of morocco and calf available; this, along with the use of machines, has transformed the industry so much that it is now split into two distinct areas—cloth work and specialty work.

I have endeavoured in the foregoing remarks to raise the emulation of my fellow craftsmen by naming the most famous artists of past days; men whose works are most worthy of study and imitation. I have refrained from any notice or criticism of the work of my contemporaries; but I may venture to assure the lover of good bookbinding that as good and sound work, and as careful finish, may be obtained in a first-rate house in London as in any city in the world.

I have tried in the previous comments to inspire my fellow craftsmen by mentioning the most renowned artists from the past; people whose work is truly worth studying and emulating. I haven't commented on or critiqued the work of my contemporaries; however, I can confidently assure those who appreciate fine bookbinding that you can find equally good and solid work, and careful finishing, in a top-notch shop in London as in any city around the globe.

In the succeeding chapters, I will endeavour in as plain and simple a way as I can to give instructions to the unskilled workman how to bind a book.

In the following chapters, I will try my best to explain in a clear and straightforward way how the unskilled worker can bind a book.

PART I. Forwarding.

|3|

THE ART OF BOOKBINDING. Chapter 1. Folding.

We commence with folding. It is generally the first thing the binder has to do with a book. The sheets are either supplied by the publisher or printer (mostly the printer); should the amateur wish to have his books in sheets, he may generally get them by asking his bookseller for them. It is necessary that they be carefully folded, for unless they are perfectly even, it is impossible that the margins (the blank space round the print) can be uniform when the book is cut. Where the margin is small, as in very small prayer books, a very great risk of cutting into the print is incurred; besides, it is rather annoying to see a book which has the folio or paging on one leaf nearly at the top, and on the next, the print touching the bottom; to remedy such an evil, the printer having done his duty by placing his margins quite true, it remains with the binder to perfect and bring the sheet into proper form by folding. The best bound book may be spoilt by having the sheets badly folded, and the binder is perfectly justified in rejecting any sheets that may be badly printed, that is, not in register. |4|

We start with folding. It's usually the first thing a binder does with a book. The sheets come from either the publisher or the printer (most often the printer); if someone wants their books in sheets, they can usually request them from their bookseller. It's essential that they are folded carefully, because if they aren't perfectly even, the margins (the blank space around the print) won't be uniform when the book is cut. When the margin is small, like in very small prayer books, there's a significant risk of cutting into the print; plus, it's frustrating to see a book where the folio or page number on one page is almost at the top, and on the next page, the print is touching the bottom. To fix this issue, after the printer has done their job by placing the margins accurately, it's up to the binder to perfect and shape the sheet through folding. Even the best-bound book can be ruined by poorly folded sheets, and the binder is completely justified in rejecting any badly printed sheets, meaning those that aren't properly aligned. |4|

The sheets are laid upon a table with the signatures (the letters or numbers that are at the foot of the first page of each sheet when folded) facing downwards on the left hand side. A folding-stick is held in the right hand, and the sheet is brought over from right to left, the folios being carefully placed together; if the paper is held up to the light, and is not too thick, it can be easily seen through. Holding the two together and laying them on the table the folder is drawn across the sheet, creasing the centre; then, holding the sheet down with the folder on the line to be creased, the top part is brought over and downwards till the folios or the bottom of the letterpress or print is again even. The folder is then drawn across, and so by bringing each folio together the sheet is completed. The process is extremely simple. The octavo sheet is generally folded into 4 folds, thus giving 8 leaves or 16 pages; a quarto, into 2, giving 4 leaves or 8 pages, and the sheets properly folded, will have their signatures outside at the foot of the first page. If the signature is not on the outside, one may be certain that the sheet has been wrongly folded.

The sheets are flat on a table with the signatures (the letters or numbers at the bottom of the first page of each sheet when folded) facing down on the left side. A folding stick is held in the right hand, and the sheet is pulled from right to left, carefully aligning the folios. If you hold the paper up to the light and it’s not too thick, you can easily see through it. Holding the two sheets together and placing them on the table, the folder is drawn across the sheet to crease the center. Then, with the sheet held down using the folder along the crease line, the top part is folded down until the folios or the bottom of the text are aligned again. The folder is then drawn across again, and by bringing each folio together, the sheet is finished. The process is very straightforward. The octavo sheet is typically folded into 4 folds, which creates 8 leaves or 16 pages; a quarto is folded into 2, resulting in 4 leaves or 8 pages, and the properly folded sheets will have their signatures outside at the bottom of the first page. If the signature isn’t on the outside, you can be sure that the sheet has been folded incorrectly.

I say generally; at one time the water or wire mark on the paper and the number of folds gave the size of the book.

I say generally; at one point, the water or wire mark on the paper and the number of folds determined the size of the book.

There are numerous other sizes, but it is not necessary to give them all; the process of folding is in nearly all cases the same; here are however, a few of the sizes given in inches.

There are many other sizes, but it's not necessary to list them all; the folding process is basically the same in almost every case. However, here are a few of the sizes provided in inches.

Foolscap 8vo. 6 5/8 × 4 1/8
Demy 12mo. 7 3/8 × 4 3/8
Crown 8vo. 7 1/2 ×  5
Post 8vo. 8   ×  5
Demy 8vo. 9   × 5 1/2
Medium 8vo. 9 5/8 × 5 ¾
Small Royal 8vo. 10   × 6 1/4
Large Royal 8vo. 10.5 × 6 3/4
Imperial 8vo. 11   × 7 1/2
Demy 4to. 11   ×  9
Medium 4to. 11 3/4 × 9 5/8
Royal 4to. 12 1/2 × 10
Imperial 4to. 15   × 11
Crown Folio. 15   × 10
Demy Folio 18   × 11

As a final caution, the first and last sheets must be carefully examined; very often the sheet has to be cut up or divided, and the leaf or leaves placed in various positions in the book.

As a final caution, the first and last sheets must be carefully examined; very often the sheet needs to be cut up or divided, and the leaf or leaves placed in different positions in the book.

It is also advisable to cut the head of the sheets, using the folding-stick, cutting just beyond the back or middle fold; this prevents the sheet running into a side crease when pressing or rolling. Should such a crease occur the leaf or sheet must be damped by placing it between wet paper and subjecting it to pressure; no other method is likely to erase the break.

It’s also a good idea to trim the top of the sheets with the folding stick, cutting just past the back or middle fold; this stops the sheet from getting a side crease when pressing or rolling. If a crease does happen, the leaf or sheet should be dampened by placing it between wet paper and applying pressure; no other method is likely to remove the crease.

Refolding.—With regard to books that have been issued in numbers, they must be pulled to pieces or divided. The parts being arranged in consecutive order, so that not so much difficulty will be felt in collating the sheets, the outside wrapper is torn away, and each sheet pulled singly from its neighbour, care being taken to see if any thread used in sewing is in the centre of the sheet at the back; if so, it must be cut with a knife or it will tear the paper. As the sheets are pulled they must be laid on the left hand side, each sheet being placed face downwards; should they be placed face upwards the first sheet will be the last and the whole will require rearranging. All advertisements may be placed away from the sheets into a pile; these will be found very handy for lining boards, pasting on, or as waste. The title and contents will generally be found in the last part; place them in their proper places. The sheets must now be refolded, if improperly folded in the first instance. |6| Turn the whole pile (or book now) over, and again go through each sheet; alter by refolding any sheet that may require it. Very often the sheets are already cut, and in this case the section must be dissected and each leaf refolded and reinserted in proper sequence, and placed carefully head-line to head-line. Great care must be exercised, as the previous creasings render the paper liable to be torn in the process.

Refolding.—For books that have been printed in multiple copies, they need to be taken apart or separated. The parts should be arranged in order so that collating the sheets becomes easier. First, the outer wrapper is removed, and each sheet is pulled away from the one next to it, making sure to check if any thread used for stitching is in the center of the back of the sheet; if it is, it needs to be cut with a knife to avoid tearing the paper. As the sheets are pulled, they should be laid on the left side with each sheet face down; if they are placed face up, the first sheet will be at the end, and everything will need to be rearranged. All advertisements can be set aside in a pile; they can be useful for lining boards, gluing, or as scrap. The title and contents are usually found at the end; make sure to place them correctly. Now, the sheets should be refolded if they were not folded right to begin with. |6| Turn the entire pile (or book) over and go through each sheet again; refold any sheet that needs it. Often, the sheets are already cut, and in that case, the section must be taken apart, and each page refolded and put back in the correct order, carefully aligning head to head. Extreme care is necessary, as the previous creases can make the paper more likely to tear during this process.

Knocking-down Iron screwed into Press.

Books that have been bound and cut would be rendered often worse by refolding, and as a general rule they are left alone. Bound books are pulled to pieces in the same manner, always taking care that the thread is cut or loose before tearing the sheet away; should trouble arise through the glue, etc., not coming away easily, the back may be damped with a sponge lightly charged with water, or perhaps a better method is to place the book or books in a press, screw up tightly, and soak the backs with thin paste, leaving them soaking for an hour or two; they will want repasting two or three times during the period; the whole of the paper, glue, and leather can then be easily scraped away with a blunt knife; a handful of shavings rubbed over the back will make it quite clean, and no difficulty will be met with if the sections are taken apart while damp. The sections must, as pulled, be placed evenly one on |7| the other, as the paper at back retains sufficient glue to cause them to stick together if laid across one another; the whole must then be left to dry. When dry the groove should be knocked down on a flat surface, and for this the knocking-down iron screwed up in the lying press is perhaps the best thing to use. The groove is the projecting part of the book close to the back, caused by the backing, and is the groove for the back edge of the mill-board to work in by a hinge; this hinge is technically called the “joint.”

Books that have been bound and trimmed can often end up in worse condition if they're refolded, so as a general rule, they are left as is. Bound books can be taken apart in a similar way, making sure to cut or loosen the thread before tearing the sheet away. If issues arise because the glue, etc., does not come off easily, the spine can be dampened with a sponge lightly soaked in water. A potentially better method is to place the book or books in a press, tight enough to screw down, and soak the spines with thin paste, leaving them soaking for an hour or two. They’ll need to be repasted two or three times during this time. The entire paper, glue, and leather can then be easily scraped off with a blunt knife. Rubbing a handful of shavings over the spine will clean it up nicely, and there won’t be any issues taking the sections apart while they are damp. The pulled sections should be stacked evenly on top of each other, as the paper on the spine retains enough glue to cause them to stick if laid across each other. The whole assembly should then be left to dry. Once dry, the groove should be flattened on a flat surface, and using the knocking-down iron secured in the lying press is probably the best option. The groove is the raised part of the book near the spine, created by the backing, and it serves as the groove for the back edge of the mill-board to pivot in a hinge; this hinge is technically referred to as the “joint.”

Martini’s Folding Machine.

Machines.—There are many folding machines made by the various machinists; the working of them, however, is in nearly all cases identical. The machine is generally |8| fed by a girl, who places the sheet to points, the arm lifting up at given periods to allow placing the sheet. Another arm carrying a long thin blade descends, taking the sheet through a slot in the table, where it is passed between rollers; another set of rollers at right angles creases it again. The rollers are arranged for two, three, or more creasings or folds. The sheets are delivered at the side into a box, from which they are taken from time to time. The cut is one of Martini’s, and is probably the most advanced.

Machines.—There are many folding machines made by various manufacturers; their operation, however, is nearly identical in most cases. The machine is typically operated by a girl, who aligns the sheet to specific points, with an arm lifting at intervals to allow for placement. Another arm, equipped with a long thin blade, descends to take the sheet through a slot in the table, where it goes between rollers; a different set of rollers at right angles folds it again. The rollers can accommodate two, three, or more folds. The sheets are delivered to the side into a box, from which they are collected periodically. The cut is one of Martini’s, and is likely the most advanced.

Gathering.—A gathering machine has been patented which is of a simple but ingenious contrivance for the quick gathering of sheets. The usual way to gather, is by laying piles of sheets upon a long table, and for the gatherer to take from each pile a sheet in succession. By the new method a round table is made to revolve by machinery, and upon it are placed the piles of sheets. As the table revolves the gatherer takes a sheet from each pile as it passes him. It will at once be seen that not only is space saved, but that a number of gatherers may be placed at the table; and that there is no possibility of the gatherers shirking their work, as the machine is made to register the revolutions. By comparing the number of sheets with the revolutions of the table, the amount of work done can be checked.

Gathering.—A gathering machine has been patented that is a simple but clever design for quickly collecting sheets. The traditional method involves stacking piles of sheets on a long table, with the gatherer taking a sheet from each pile one after the other. The new method uses a round table that rotates with machinery, onto which the piles of sheets are placed. As the table turns, the gatherer grabs a sheet from each pile as it comes by. It’s clear that this saves space and allows multiple gatherers to work at the table. Plus, the design prevents gatherers from slacking off since the machine tracks the revolutions. By comparing the number of sheets gathered with the table's revolutions, the total amount of work can be monitored.

CHAPTER II. BEATING AND ROLLING.

Beating Hammer.

The object of beating or rolling is to make the book as solid as possible. For beating, a stone or iron slab, used as a bed, and a heavy hammer, are necessary. The stone or iron must be perfectly smooth, and should be bedded with great solidity. I have in use an iron bed about two feet square, fitted into a strongly-made box, filled with sand, with a wooden cover to the iron when not in use. The hammer should be somewhat bell-shaped, and weigh about ten pounds, with a short handle, made to fit the hand. The face of the hammer and stone (it is called a beating-stone whether it be stone or iron), must be kept perfectly clean, and it is advisable always to have a piece of paper at the top and bottom of the sections when beating, or the repeated concussion will glaze them.

The purpose of beating or rolling is to make the book as solid as possible. For beating, you need a flat stone or iron slab as a base and a heavy hammer. The stone or iron must be completely smooth and should be secured very firmly. I use an iron base that's about two feet square, placed inside a sturdy box filled with sand, with a wooden cover for the iron when it’s not in use. The hammer should have a somewhat bell-shaped head and weigh around ten pounds, with a short handle designed to fit comfortably in your hand. Both the face of the hammer and the stone (referred to as a beating-stone whether it’s made of stone or iron) must be kept perfectly clean. It’s also a good idea to place a piece of paper at the top and bottom of the sections when beating, as repeated impacts can cause them to become glazed.

The book should be divided into lots or sections of about half an inch thick, that will be about fifteen to twenty sheets, according to the thickness of paper. A section is now to be held on the stone between the fingers and thumb of the left hand; then the hammer, grasped firmly in the right hand, is raised, and brought down with rather more than its own weight on the sheets, which must be continually moved round, turned over and changed about, in order that they may be equally beaten all over. |10| By passing the section between the finger and thumb, it can be felt at once, if it has been beaten properly and evenly. Great care must be taken that in each blow of the hammer it shall have the face fairly on the body of the section, for if the hammer is so used that the greatest portion of the weight should fall outside the edge of the sheets the concussion will break away the paper as if cut with a knife. It is perhaps better for a beginner to practise on some waste paper before attempting to beat a book; and he should always rest when the wrist becomes tired. When each section has been beaten, supposing a book has been divided into four sections, the whole four should be beaten again, but together.

The book should be divided into lots or sections that are about half an inch thick, which will be about fifteen to twenty sheets, depending on the paper thickness. A section is now to be held on the stone between the fingers and thumb of the left hand; then the hammer, held tightly in the right hand, is lifted and brought down with a little more than its own weight on the sheets, which must be continuously moved around, flipped over, and repositioned to ensure they get beaten evenly all over. |10| By passing the section between the fingers and thumb, you can immediately tell if it has been beaten properly and evenly. It’s important to make sure that with each hammer blow, the face of the hammer hits the body of the section correctly, because if the hammer is used in a way that most of its weight lands outside the edge of the sheets, it will damage the paper as if it were cut with a knife. It might be better for a beginner to practice on some scrap paper before trying to beat a book; and they should always take breaks when their wrist gets tired. Once each section has been beaten, assuming a book has been divided into four sections, all four should be beaten together afterward.

I do not profess a preference to beating over rolling because I have placed it first. The rolling machine is one of the greatest improvements in the trade, but all books should not be rolled, and a bookbinder, I mean a practical bookbinder, not one who has been nearly the whole of his lifetime upon a cutting machine, or at a blocking press, and who calls himself one, but a competent bookbinder, should know how and when to use the beating hammer and when the rolling machine.

I don’t claim to prefer beating over rolling just because I mentioned it first. The rolling machine is one of the biggest advances in the industry, but not all books should be rolled. A bookbinder—I'm talking about a skilled bookbinder, not someone who has spent most of their life on a cutting machine or at a blocking press and calls themselves one—should understand how and when to use the beating hammer and when to use the rolling machine.

There are some books, old ones for instance, that should on no account be rolled. The clumsy presses used in printing at an early date gave such an amount of pressure on the type that the paper round their margins has sometimes two or three times the thickness of the printed portion. At the present time each sheet after having been printed is pressed, and thus the leaf is made flat or nearly so, and for such work the rolling machine is certainly better than the hammer.

There are some books, especially old ones, that should never be rolled. The heavy presses used in early printing applied so much pressure that the paper around the edges is often two or three times thicker than the printed part. Nowadays, each sheet is pressed after printing, which flattens it out, and for this type of work, the rolling machine is definitely better than the hammer.

To roll a book, it is divided into sections as in beating, only not so many sheets are taken—from six upwards, according to the quality of the work to be executed. The sheets are then placed between tins, and the whole passed |11| between the rollers, which are regulated by a screw, according to the thickness of sections and power required. The workman, technically called “Roller,” has to be very careful in passing his books through, that his hand be not drawn in as well, for accidents have from time to time occurred through the inattention of the Roller himself, or of the individual who has the pleasure of applying his strength to turning the handle.

To roll a book, it's divided into sections like in beating, but not as many sheets are taken—from six or more, depending on the quality of the work. The sheets are then placed between metal plates, and the whole thing is passed |11| through the rollers, which are adjusted by a screw based on the thickness of the sections and the force needed. The worker, known as the “Roller,” must be very careful when feeding the books through, so that his hand doesn't get pulled in as well, because accidents have occasionally happened due to the Roller’s distraction or the person operating the handle.

Rolling Machine.

I never pass or hear a rolling machine revolving very rapidly without having vividly brought to my mind a very serious accident that happened to my father. He was feeling for a flaw on one of the rollers, and whilst his hands |12| were at the edge of the rollers the man turned the handle, drawing the whole hand between the heavy cylinders. The accident cost him many months in the hospital, and he never regained complete use of his right hand.

I can’t hear or see a rolling machine spinning fast without remembering a serious accident that happened to my dad. He was checking for a flaw on one of the rollers, and while his hands were at the edge of the rollers, someone turned the handle, pulling his entire hand between the heavy cylinders. The accident kept him in the hospital for many months, and he never fully regained use of his right hand.

Great care must be used not to pass too many sheets through the machine at one time; the same applies to the regulating screw. The amount of damage that can be done to the paper by too heavy a pressure is astonishing, as the paper becomes quite brittle, and may perhaps even be cut as with a knife.

Great care must be taken not to feed too many sheets through the machine at once; the same goes for the regulating screw. The amount of damage that can be caused to the paper by excessive pressure is surprising, as the paper becomes very brittle, and might even be cut like with a knife.

Another caution respecting new work. Recently printed books, if submitted to heavy pressure, either by the beating hammer or machine, are very likely to “set off,” that is, the ink from one side of the page will be imprinted to its opposite neighbour; indeed, under very heavy pressure, some ink, perhaps many years old, will “set off;” this is due in a great measure to the ink not being properly prepared.

Another warning about new work. Recently printed books, if exposed to heavy pressure, whether from a hammer or a machine, are very likely to "transfer," meaning the ink from one side of the page will be imprinted on the opposite side; in fact, under very heavy pressure, some ink, even if it's many years old, can also "transfer;" this largely happens because the ink wasn't prepared correctly.

Machines.—Of the many rolling machines in the market the principle is in all the same. A powerful frame, carrying two heavy rollers or cylinders, which are set in motion, revolving in the same direction, by means of steam or by hand. In many, extra power is supplied by the use of extra cog-wheels; the power is, however, gained at an expense of speed. The pressure is regulated by screws at the top.

Machines.—Of the many rolling machines available today, they all work on the same basic principle. A sturdy frame supports two heavy rollers or cylinders, which are set in motion to revolve in the same direction, powered by steam or manually. In many machines, additional power is provided through extra cog-wheels; however, this added power comes at the cost of speed. The pressure is adjusted using screws located at the top.

CHAPTER III. COLLECTING.

To collate, is to ensure that each sheet or leaf is in its proper sequence. Putting the sheets together and placing plates or maps requires great attention. The sheets must run in proper order by the signatures: letters are mostly used, but numbers are sometimes substituted. When letters are used, the alphabet is repeated as often as necessary, doubling the letter as often as a new alphabet is used, as B, C, with the first alphabet,1 and AA, BB, CC or Aa, Bb, Cc, with the second repetition, and three letters with the third, generally leaving out J, V, W. Plates must be trimmed or cut to the proper size before being placed in the book, and maps that are to be folded must be put on guards. By mounting a map on a guard the size of the page, it may be kept open on the table beside the book, which may be opened at any part without concealing the map: by this method the map will remain convenient for constant reference. This is technically called “throwing out” a map.

To collate means making sure each sheet or page is in the right order. Arranging the sheets and adding plates or maps requires a lot of focus. The sheets should follow the correct order based on signatures: usually letters are used, but sometimes numbers are substituted. When letters are used, the alphabet is repeated as often as needed, doubling the letter whenever a new alphabet starts, such as B, C, with the first alphabet,1 and AA, BB, CC or Aa, Bb, Cc, with the second repetition, and three letters for the third, generally skipping J, V, W. Plates need to be trimmed or cut to the right size before they’re added to the book, and maps that need to be folded must be attached to guards. By mounting a map on a guard the same size as the page, it can stay open next to the book, which can be opened at any part without hiding the map. This way, the map stays easy to reference. This is technically referred to as “throwing out” a map.

[1] The text of a book always commences with B, the title and preliminary matter being reckoned as A.

To collate a book, it is to be held in the right hand, at the right top corner, then, with a turn of the wrist, the back must be brought to the front. Fan the sections out, then with the left hand the sheets must be brought back to an angle, which will cause them when released to spring forward, so that the letter on the right bottom |14| corner of each sheet is seen, and then released, and the next brought into view. When a work is completed in more than one volume, the number of the volume is indicated at the left hand bottom corner of each sheet. I need hardly mention that the title should come first, then the dedication (if one), preface, contents, then the text, and finally the index. The number on the pages will, however, always direct the binder as to the placing of the sheets. The book should always be beaten or rolled before placing plates or maps, especially coloured ones.

To gather a book, hold it in your right hand by the top right corner. Then, with a flick of your wrist, bring the back to the front. Spread the pages out, then with your left hand, angle the sheets so that when you let go, they spring forward, showing the number in the bottom right corner of each page, and then reveal the next one. When a work has multiple volumes, the volume number is placed in the bottom left corner of each sheet. I should point out that the title should come first, followed by the dedication (if there is one), the preface, the table of contents, then the main text, and finally the index. The page numbers will always guide the binder on where to position the sheets. The book should be pressed or rolled before adding plates or maps, especially colored ones.

Presuming that we have a book with half a dozen plates, the first thing after ascertaining that the letter-press is perfect, is to see that all the plates are there, by looking to the “List of Plates,” printed generally after the contents. The plates should then be squared or cut truly, using a sharp knife and straight edge. When the plates are printed on paper larger than the book, they must be cut down to the proper size, leaving a somewhat less margin at the back than there will be at the foredge when the book is cut. Some plates have to face to the left, |15| some to the right, the frontispiece for instance; but as a general rule, plates should be placed on the right hand, so that on opening the book they all face upwards. When plates consist of subjects that are at a right angle with the text, such as views and landscapes, the inscription should always be placed to the right hand, whether the plate face to the right or to the left page. If the plates are on thick paper they should be guarded, either by adding a piece of paper of the same thickness or by cutting a piece from the plate and then joining the two again together with a piece of linen, so that the plate moves on the linen hinge: the space between the guard and plate should be more than equal to the thickness of the paper. If the plate is almost a cardboard, it is better and stronger if linen be placed both back and front. Should the book consist of plates only, sections may be made by placing two plates and two guards together, and sewing through the centre between the guards, leaving of course a space between the two guards, which will form the back.

Assuming we have a book with about six illustrations, the first step after confirming that the text is printed correctly is to check that all the illustrations are included by referring to the “List of Plates,” which is usually printed after the table of contents. The illustrations should then be properly squared or trimmed using a sharp knife and a straight edge. If the illustrations are printed on paper larger than the book, they need to be cut down to the right size, leaving a slightly smaller margin at the back than at the front when the book is trimmed. Some illustrations need to face left, like the frontispiece; however, as a general rule, illustrations should be placed on the right side so that they all face up when the book is opened. For illustrations that show scenes at a right angle to the text, such as views and landscapes, the caption should always be on the right side, regardless of whether the illustration faces the right or left page. If the illustrations are on thick paper, they should be guarded, either by adding a piece of paper of the same thickness or by cutting a piece from the illustration and then rejoining the two with a strip of linen, allowing the illustration to move on the linen hinge. The space between the guard and the illustration should be greater than the thickness of the paper. If the illustration is almost like cardboard, it’s better and stronger to place linen on both the front and back. If the book consists solely of illustrations, sections can be created by placing two illustrations and two guards together and sewing through the center between the guards, ensuring a space between the two guards, which will form the spine.

With regard to maps that have to be mounted, it is better to mount them on the finest linen, as it takes up the least room in the thickness of the book. The linen should be cut a little larger than the map itself, with a further piece left, on which to mount the extra piece of paper, so that the map may be thrown out as before described. The map should first be trimmed at its back, then pasted with rather thin paste; the linen should then be laid carefully on, and gently rubbed down and turned over, so that the map comes uppermost; the pasted guard should then be placed a little away from the map, and the whole well rubbed down, and finally laid out flat to dry. To do this work, the paste must be clean, free from all lumps, and used very evenly and not too thickly, or when dry every mark of the brush will be visible. When the map is dry it should be trimmed all round and folded to its proper |16| size, viz.—a trifle smaller than the book will be when cut. If it is left larger the folds will naturally be cut away, and the only remedy will be a new map, which means a new copy of the work. For all folded maps or plates a corresponding thickness must be placed in the backs where the maps go, or the foredge will be thicker than the back. Pieces of paper called guards, are folded from 1 ⁄ 4 inch to 1 inch in width, according to the size of the book, and placed in the back, and sewn through as a section. Great care must be taken that these guards are not folded too large, so as to overlap the folds of the map, if they do so, the object of their being placed there to make the thickness of the back and foredge equal will be defeated.

When it comes to mounting maps, it's best to use the finest linen since it takes up the least space in the book's thickness. The linen should be cut slightly larger than the map itself, with an additional piece left over to mount the extra bit of paper, allowing the map to be removed as previously described. First, trim the back of the map, then apply some thin paste to it. Carefully lay the linen on top, gently rubbing it down and flipping it over so the map is on top. Place the pasted guard slightly away from the map, then rub everything down well, and finally lay it flat to dry. Make sure the paste is clean, free of lumps, and applied evenly and not too thickly, or the marks from the brush will show up when it's dry. Once the map is dry, trim it all around and fold it to the correct size, which should be a bit smaller than the book will be when it's cut. If it’s left larger, the folds will likely be cut off, and the only solution would be to get a new map, meaning a new copy of the work. For all folded maps or plates, corresponding thickness must be added to the spine where the maps are placed, or the front edge will be thicker than the back. Papers called guards should be folded from ¼ inch to 1 inch in width, depending on the book's size, and placed in the spine, sewn in like a section. Great care must be taken to ensure the guards aren't folded too large, as that would overlap the folds of the map and defeat their purpose of making the thickness of the spine and front edge equal.

Shewing Book with Map thrown out.

In a great measure, the whole beauty of the inside work rests in properly collating the book, in guarding maps, and in placing the plates. When pasting in any single leaves or plates, a piece of waste paper should always be placed on the leaf or plate the required distance from the edge to be pasted, so that the leaf is pasted straight. It takes no longer to lay the plate down upon the edge of a board with a paper on the plate, than it does to hold the plate in the left hand, and apply the paste with the right hand middle finger; by the former method a proper amount of paste is deposited evenly on the plate and it is pasted in a straight line; by the latter method, it is pasted in some |17| places thickly, and in some places none at all. I have often seen books with the plates fastened to the book nearly half way up to its foredge, and thus spoilt, only through the slovenly way of pasting. After having placed the plates, the collater should go through them again when dry, to see if they adhere properly, and break or fold them over up to the pasting, with a folding stick, so that they will lie flat when the book is open. I must again call attention to coloured plates. They should be looked to during the whole of binding, especially after pressing. The amount of gum that is put on the surface, which is very easily seen by the gloss, causes them to stick to the letter-press: should they so stick, do not try to tear them apart, but warm a polishing iron and pass it over the plate and letter-press, placing a piece of paper between the iron and the book to avoid dirt. The heat and moisture will soften the gum, and the surfaces can then be very easily separated. By rubbing a little powdered French chalk over the coloured plates before sticking them in, these ill effects will be avoided.

In large part, the overall beauty of the interior work relies on properly assembling the book, keeping track of maps, and placing the plates. When pasting in any single leaves or plates, always place a piece of scrap paper on the leaf or plate at the correct distance from the edge to be pasted, so that the leaf is affixed straight. It takes no longer to lay the plate down on the edge of a board with a piece of paper on the plate than it does to hold the plate in your left hand while applying paste with your right middle finger; by the first method, the right amount of paste is evenly spread on the plate, ensuring it is pasted in a straight line; by the latter method, it ends up pasted thickly in some spots and not at all in others. I've often seen books with plates attached nearly halfway up to the foredge, ruining them due to careless pasting. After placing the plates, the collater should check them again when they're dry to ensure they stick properly, using a folding stick to break or fold them over to the pasting point, so they lie flat when the book is open. I want to emphasize colored plates. They need to be monitored throughout the binding process, especially after pressing. The amount of glue on the surface, which can be easily seen by its gloss, can cause them to stick to the letter-press. If they do stick, don’t try to pull them apart; instead, warm a polishing iron and run it over the plate and letter-press, placing a piece of paper between the iron and the book to prevent dirt. The heat and moisture will soften the glue, making it easy to separate the surfaces. Rubbing a little powdered French chalk on the colored plates before pasting them in will help avoid these issues.

It sometimes happens that the whole of a book is composed of single leaves, as the “Art Journal.” Such a book should be collated properly, and the plates placed to their respective places, squared and broken over, by placing a straight edge or runner about half an inch from its back edge, and running a folder under the plate, thus lifting it to the edge of the runner. The whole book should then be pressed for a few hours, taken out, and the back glued up; the back having been previously roughed with the side edge of the saw. To glue such a back, the book is placed in the lying press between boards, with the back projecting about an eighth of an inch, the saw is then drawn over it, with its side edge, so that the paper is as it were rasped. The back is then sawn in properly, as explained in the next chapter, and the whole back is glued. When dry, the |18| book is separated into divisions or sections of four, six, or eight leaves, according to the thickness of the paper, and each section is then overcast or over sewn along its whole length, the thread being fastened at the head and tail (or top and bottom); thus each section is made independent of its neighbour. The sections should then be gently struck along the back edge with a hammer against a knocking-down iron, so as to imbed the thread into the paper, or the back will be too thick. The thread should not be struck so hard as to cut the paper, or break the thread, but very gently. Two or three sections may be taken at a time.

It sometimes happens that an entire book is made up of individual leaves, like the “Art Journal.” Such a book should be properly collated, and the plates should be placed in their respective positions, squared and broken over by placing a straight edge or runner about half an inch from its back edge and running a folder under the plate, lifting it to the edge of the runner. The entire book should then be pressed for a few hours, removed, and the back glued up; the back having been previously roughened with the side edge of the saw. To glue such a back, the book is placed in the lying press between boards, with the back sticking out about an eighth of an inch. The saw is then drawn over it with its side edge, so that the paper is effectively rasped. The back is then properly sawn in, as explained in the next chapter, and the whole back is glued. Once dry, the |18| book is divided into sections of four, six, or eight leaves, depending on the thickness of the paper, and each section is overcast or sewn along its entire length, with the thread secured at the top and bottom; this means each section is independent of its neighbor. The sections should then be gently tapped along the back edge with a hammer against a knocking-down iron, so the thread embeds itself in the paper, or the back will be too thick. The thread should not be struck too hard to cut the paper or break the thread, but done very gently. Two or three sections may be done at a time.

After having placed the plates, the book should be put into the press (standing or otherwise) for a few hours. A standing press is used in all good bookbinding shops.

After placing the plates, the book should be put into the press (standing or otherwise) for a few hours. A standing press is used in all good bookbinding shops.

The Paris houses have a curious way of pressing their books. The books are placed in the standing press; the top and bottom boards are very thick, having a groove cut in them in which a strong thin rope is placed. The press is screwed down tightly, when, after some few minutes has elapsed, the cord or rope is drawn together and fastened. The pressure of the screw is released, the whole taken out en bloc, and allowed to remain for some hours, during which time a number of other batches are passed through the same press.

The Paris printing houses have an interesting method for pressing their books. The books are placed in a standing press; the top and bottom boards are quite thick, with a groove cut into them that holds a strong thin rope. The press is screwed down tightly, and after a few minutes, the rope is pulled together and secured. The pressure from the screw is released, the entire batch is taken out as one piece, and it's left to rest for several hours, during which time other batches go through the same press.

When taken out of the press the book is ready for “marking up” if for flexible sewing, or for being sawn in if for ordinary work.

When it’s taken out of the press, the book is ready for “marking up” if it’s for flexible sewing, or for being cut if it’s for regular work.

Interleaving.—It is sometimes required to place a piece of writing paper between each leaf of letter-press, either for notes or for a translation: in such a case, the book must be properly beaten or rolled, and each leaf cut up with a hand-knife, both head and foredge; the writing paper having been chosen, must be folded to the size of the book and pressed. A single leaf of writing paper is now to be fastened in the centre of each section, and a folded leaf |19| placed to every folded letter-press leaf, by inserting the one within the other, a folded writing paper being left outside every other section, and all being put level with the head; the whole book should then be well pressed.

Interleaving.—Sometimes, it's necessary to insert a piece of writing paper between each page of letterpress, either for notes or translations. In this case, the book needs to be properly pressed or rolled, and each page should be cut using a knife, both at the top and foredge. After choosing the writing paper, it must be folded to match the book's size and pressed. Now, a single piece of writing paper should be attached in the center of each section, and a folded piece should be placed with every folded letterpress page by inserting one inside the other, leaving a piece of folded writing paper outside every other section, all aligned with the top edge. Finally, the entire book should be well-pressed.

Boomer Press.

If by any chance there should be one sheet in duplicate and another missing, by returning the one to the publisher of the book the missing sheet is generally replaced; this, of course, has reference only to books of a recent date.

If there happens to be one duplicate sheet and another missing, you can usually get the missing sheet replaced by returning the duplicate to the publisher of the book; this, of course, only applies to books that were published recently.

There is a new press of American invention that has come under my notice. It will be seen that it acts on an entirely new principle, having two horizontal screws instead of one perpendicular. The power is first applied by hand and finally by a lever and ratchet-wheel in the centre. A pressure guage is affixed to each press, so that the actual power exerted may be ascertained as the operation proceeds. The press can be had from Messrs. Ladd and Co., 116, Queen Victoria Street, E.C.; and they claim that it gives a pressure equal to the hydraulic press, without any of the hydraulic complications.

There's a new American invention I've come across. It works on a completely different principle, using two horizontal screws instead of one vertical one. The power is initially applied by hand and then by a lever and ratchet wheel in the center. Each press is equipped with a pressure gauge, allowing users to determine the actual pressure being applied as the operation continues. You can get the press from Messrs. Ladd and Co., 116 Queen Victoria Street, E.C.; they assert that it provides a pressure equivalent to a hydraulic press, but without any of the hydraulic complexities.

CHAPTER IV. MARKING UP AND SAWING IN.

A. Saw marks for catch-up stitch.

The books having been in the press a sufficient time, say for a night, they are taken out, and run through again (collated) to make sure that they are all correct. A book is then taken and knocked straight both head and back and put in the lying press between boards, projecting from them about 1 ⁄ 8 inch; some binders prefer cutting boards, I prefer pressing boards, and I should advise the use of them, as the whole can be knocked up together. They should be held between the fingers of each hand, and the back and head knocked alternately on the cheek of the press. The boards are then drawn back the required distance from the back of the book: the book and boards must now be held tightly with the left hand, and the whole carefully lowered into the press; the right hand regulating the screws, which should then be screwed up tightly. The book is now quite straight, and firmly fixed in the press, and we have to decide if it is to be sewn flexibly or not. If for flexible binding the book is not to be sawn in, but marked; the difference being, that with the latter the cord is outside the sheets; with the former the cord is imbedded in the back, in the cut or groove made by the saw. We will take the flexible first, and suppose that the book before us is an ordinary 8vo. volume, and that it is to be cut all round.

The books have been in the press long enough, say overnight, so they're taken out and checked again to ensure everything is correct. A book is then straightened at both the top and the back, and placed in the lying press between boards, sticking out about 1 ⁄ 8 inch; some binders prefer cutting boards, but I prefer pressing boards, and I'd recommend using them, as everything can be aligned together. They should be held between the fingers of each hand, and the back and top tapped alternately on the cheek of the press. The boards are then pulled back the required distance from the back of the book: the book and boards must now be securely held with the left hand while carefully lowering the whole thing into the press; the right hand adjusts the screws, which should then be tightened. The book is now perfectly straight and firmly in the press, and we need to decide if it will be sewn flexibly or not. For flexible binding, the book is not to be sawed in, but marked; the difference being that with the latter the cord is outside the sheets; with the former the cord is embedded in the back, in the cut or groove made by the saw. Let’s start with the flexible option and assume the book in front of us is a standard 8vo. volume that will be cut all around.

The back should be divided into six equal portions, leaving the bottom, or tail, half an inch longer than the rest, simply because of a curious optical illusion, by which, |21| if the spaces were all equal in width, the bottom one would appear to be the smallest, although accurately of the same width as the rest. This curious effect may be tested on any framed or mounted print. A square is now to be laid upon the back exactly to the marks, and marked pretty black with a lead pencil; the head and tail must now be sawn in to imbed the chain of the kettle stitch, at a distance sufficient to prevent the thread being divided by accident in cutting. In flexible work great accuracy is absolutely necessary throughout the whole of the work, especially in the marking up, as the form of the bands will be visible when covered. It will be easily seen if the book has been knocked up straight by laying the square at the head when the book is in the press, and if it is not straight, it must be taken out and corrected. If the book is very small, as for instance a small prayer book, it is usually marked up for five bands, but only sewed on three; the other two being fastened on as false bands when the book is ready for covering. There would be no gain in strength by sewing a small book on five bands.

The back should be divided into six equal sections, leaving the bottom, or tail, half an inch longer than the rest, simply because of a curious optical illusion. If the spaces are all the same width, the bottom one would look the smallest, even though it's actually the same width as the others. You can test this interesting effect on any framed or mounted print. A square should now be placed on the back exactly to the marks, and outlined clearly with a pencil; the head and tail must now be sawn in to embed the chain of the kettle stitch, far enough to avoid accidentally cutting the thread. In flexible work, great accuracy is essential throughout the entire process, especially in the marking, as the shape of the bands will show when covered. You can easily tell if the book is aligned straight by placing the square at the head while the book is in the press, and if it’s not straight, it must be taken out and adjusted. If the book is very small, like a small prayer book, it’s usually marked up for five bands but only sewn on three, with the other two attached as false bands when the book is ready for covering. There wouldn't be any benefit in strength by sewing a small book on five bands.

When the book is to be “sawn in,” it is marked up as for flexible work, but the back is sawn, both for the bands and kettle stitch, with a tennon saw. In choosing the saw, it should be one with the teeth not spread out too much; and it is advisable to have two of different widths. Care must be taken that the saw does not enter too deeply, and one |22| must, in all cases, be guided in the depth by the thickness of the cord to be used. The size of the book should determine the thickness of the cord, as the larger the book, the stronger and thicker must be the cord. Suitable cord is to be purchased at all the bookbinder’s material shops, and it is known by the size of the book, such as 12mo., 8vo., 4to. cord.

When the book is ready to be “sawn in,” it's marked up for flexible work, but the spine is sawn, both for the bands and kettle stitch, using a tenon saw. When choosing the saw, select one with teeth that are not too widely spaced; it's also a good idea to have two different widths. You need to be careful not to cut too deeply, and you must always be guided by the thickness of the cord you plan to use. The size of the book should determine the thickness of the cord because the larger the book, the stronger and thicker the cord needs to be. You can buy suitable cord at any bookbinding supply store, and it's categorized by the size of the book, like 12mo., 8vo., 4to. cord.

Sawing-in Machine.

I think nothing looks worse than a book with great holes in the back, sometimes to be seen when the book is opened, which are due to the inattention of the workmen. Besides, it causes great inconvenience to the forwarder if the cords are loose, and the only thing he can do in such a case is to cram a lot of glue into the grooves to keep the cord in its place. If, on the other hand, the saw cuts are |23| not deep enough, the cord will stand out from the back, and be distinctly seen when the book is finished, if not remedied by extra strips of leather or paper between the bands when lining up. It is better to use double thin cord instead of one thick one for large books, because the two cords will lie and imbed themselves in the back, whereas one large one will not, unless very deep and wide saw cuts be made. Large folios should be sawn on six or seven bands, but five for an 8vo. is the right number, from which all other sizes can be regulated.

I think nothing looks worse than a book with big gaps in the back, sometimes visible when the book is opened, which result from the carelessness of the workers. Also, it creates a lot of hassle for the forwarder if the cords are loose, and the only thing they can do in that case is to shove a bunch of glue into the grooves to hold the cord in place. On the other hand, if the saw cuts aren’t deep enough, the cord will stick out from the back and be clearly visible when the book is finished, unless fixed with extra strips of leather or paper between the bands during lining up. It’s better to use two thin cords instead of one thick one for large books, because the two cords will settle into the back, while one large one won’t, unless very deep and wide saw cuts are made. Large folios should be cut on six or seven bands, but five for an 8vo. is the correct number, from which all other sizes can be adjusted.

Saw benches have been introduced by various firms. They can be driven either by steam or foot. It will be seen that the saws are circular, and can be shifted on the spindle to suit the various sized books. As the books themselves are slid along the table on the saws, the advantage is very great in a large shop where much work of one size is done at a time.

Saw benches have been introduced by various companies. They can be powered either by steam or manually. You'll notice that the saws are circular and can be adjusted on the spindle to accommodate different sizes of books. Since the books are moved along the table on the saws, this offers a significant advantage in a large shop where a lot of work of the same size is done at once.

CHAPTER V. Sewing.

Flexible Work.—The “sewing press” consists of a bed, two screws, and a beam or cross bar, round which are fastened five or more cords, called lay cords. Five pieces of cord cut from the ball, in length, about four times the thickness of the book, are fastened to the lay cords by slip knots; the other ends being fastened to small pieces of metal called keys, by twisting the ends round twice and then a half hitch. The keys are then passed through the slot in the bed of the “press,” and the beam screwed up rather tightly; but loose enough to allow the lay cords to move freely |24| backwards or forwards. Having the book on the bed of the press with the back towards the sewer, a few sheets (better than only one) are laid against the cords, and they are arranged exactly to the marks made on the back of the sections. When quite true and perpendicular, they should be made tight by screwing the beam up. It will be better if the cords are a little to the right of the press, so that the sewer may get her or his left arm to rest better on the press.

Remote Work.—The “sewing press” consists of a bed, two screws, and a beam or cross bar, around which are secured five or more cords, called lay cords. Five pieces of cord cut from the ball, each about four times the thickness of the book, are attached to the lay cords using slip knots; the other ends are secured to small metal pieces called keys, by twisting the ends around twice and making a half hitch. The keys are then inserted through the slot in the bed of the “press,” and the beam is tightened up, but loose enough to allow the lay cords to move freely |24| backwards or forwards. With the book on the bed of the press and the back facing the sewer, a few sheets (preferably more than one) are placed against the cords, aligning them exactly with the marks made on the back of the sections. Once everything is straight and perpendicular, they should be tightened by screwing the beam up. It’s better if the cords are positioned slightly to the right of the press, so that the sewer can rest their left arm more comfortably on the press.

Sewing Press.

If when the press is tightened one of the cords is loose, as will sometimes happen, a pencil, folding-stick or other object slipped under the lay cord on the top of the beam will tighten the band sufficiently. The foreign sewing presses have screws with a hook at the end to hold the bands, the screws running in a slot in the beam: in practice they are very convenient.

If one of the cords is loose when the press is tightened, which can happen occasionally, you can use a pencil, a folding stick, or another object placed under the lay cord on top of the beam to tighten the band enough. The foreign sewing presses have screws with a hook at the end to hold the bands, and the screws move along a slot in the beam; in practice, they are very handy.

Ordinary sewing. 2 sheets on 2 bands.
Ordinary sewing. 2 sheets on 3 bands.
Ordinary sewing. 2 sheets on 5 bands.
The thick lines shewing the direction of the thread.

The first and last sections are overcast usually with cotton or very fine thread. The first sheet is now to be laid against the bands, and the needle introduced through the kettle stitch hole on the right of the book, which is the |25| head. The left hand being within the centre of the sheet, the needle is taken with it, and thrust out on the left of the mark made for the first band; the needle being taken with the right hand, is again introduced on the right of the same band, thus making a complete circle round it. This is repeated with each band in succession, and the needle brought out of the kettle stitch hole on the left or tail of the sheet. A new sheet is now placed on the top, and treated in a similar way, by introducing the needle at the left end or tail; and when taken out at the right end or top, the thread must be fastened by a knot to the end, hanging from the first sheet, which is left long enough for the purpose. A third sheet having been sewn in like manner,2 the needle must be brought out at the kettle stitch, thrust between the two sheets first sewn, and drawn round the thread, thus fastening each sheet to its neighbour by a kind of chain stitch. I believe the term “kettle stitch” is only a corruption of “catch-up stitch,” as it catches each section as sewn in succession. This class of work must be done very neatly and evenly, but it is easily done with a little practice and patience. This is the strongest sewing executed at the present day, but it is very seldom done, as it takes three or four times as long as the ordinary sewing. The thread must be drawn tightly each time it is passed round the band, and at the end properly fastened off at the kettle stitch, or the sections will work loose in course of time. Old books were always sewn in this manner, and when two or double bands were used, the thread was twisted twice round one on sewing one section, and twice round the other on sewing the next, or once round each cord. In some cases even the “head-band” was worked at |27| the same time, by fastening other pieces of leather for the head and tail, and making it the catch-up stitch as well. When the head-band was worked in sewing, the book was, of course, not afterwards cut at the edges. When this was done, wooden boards were used instead of mill boards, and twisted leather instead of cord, and when the book was covered, a groove was made between each double band. This way is still imitated by sticking a second band or cord alongside the one made in sewing, before the book is covered. The cord for flexible work is called a “flexible cord,” and is twisted tighter and is stronger than any other. In all kinds of sewing I advise the use of Hayes’ Royal Irish thread, not because there is no other of good manufacture, but because I have tried several kinds, and Hayes’ has proved to be the best. The thickness of the cord must always be in proportion to the size and thickness of the book, and the thickness of the thread must depend on the sheets, whether they be half sheets or whole sheets. If too thick a thread is used, the swelling (the rising caused in the back by the thread) will be too much, and it will be impossible to make a proper rounding or get a right size “groove” in backing. If the sections are thick or few, a thick thread must be used to give the thickness necessary to produce a good groove.

The first and last sections are usually covered with cotton or very fine thread. The first sheet is placed against the bands, and the needle is inserted through the kettle stitch hole on the right of the book, which is the head. With the left hand being in the center of the sheet, the needle is held and pushed out on the left of the mark made for the first band; then, using the right hand, the needle is reinserted on the right of the same band, creating a complete circle around it. This process is repeated with each band, and the needle is pulled out of the kettle stitch hole on the left or tail of the sheet. A new sheet is then placed on top and handled in the same way, inserting the needle at the left end or tail; when it comes out at the right end or top, the thread is secured with a knot to the end hanging from the first sheet, which is left long enough for that purpose. After the third sheet is sewn in a similar manner, the needle should come out at the kettle stitch, pushed between the two previously sewn sheets, and wrapped around the thread, thus attaching each sheet to its neighbor with a kind of chain stitch. I believe the term "kettle stitch" is just a variation of "catch-up stitch," as it links each section sewn in order. This type of work needs to be done neatly and evenly, but with a bit of practice and patience, it’s manageable. This is the strongest type of sewing done today, but it's rarely used because it takes three or four times longer than regular sewing. The thread must be pulled tightly each time it is wrapped around the band, and properly secured at the kettle stitch, or the sections will come loose over time. Old books were always sewn this way, and when using two or double bands, the thread was twisted twice around one band while sewing one section, and twice around the other when sewing the next, or once around each cord. In some cases, even the "head-band" was worked at the same time by attaching other pieces of leather for the head and tail, making it the catch-up stitch as well. When the head-band was sewn in, the book wasn’t cut at the edges afterwards. When it was cut, wooden boards were used instead of mill boards, and twisted leather was used instead of cord; when covering the book, a groove was created between each double band. This method is still imitated by placing a second band or cord alongside the one made during sewing, before the book is covered. The cord for flexible work is referred to as a “flexible cord,” and it is twisted tighter and stronger than others. For all types of sewing, I recommend using Hayes’ Royal Irish thread, not because it's the only good one, but because I've tested various kinds, and Hayes’ has proven to be the best. The thickness of the cord must always match the size and thickness of the book, and the thickness of the thread should depend on the sheets, whether they are half sheets or full sheets. If too thick a thread is used, the swelling in the back will be excessive, making it impossible to create a proper rounding or groove in the backing. If the sections are thick or few, a thicker thread must be used to provide the necessary thickness for a good groove.

[2] As each thread is terminated, another must be joined thereto, so that one length of thread is, as it were, used for a book. The knots must be made very neatly, and the ends cut off, or they will be visible in the sheet by their bulk.
Flexible sewing.

If the book is of moderate thickness, the sections may be knocked down by occasionally tapping them with a piece |28| of wood loaded at one end with lead, or a thick folding-stick may be used as a substitute. I must again call particular attention to the kettle stitch. The thread must not be drawn too tight in making the chain, or the thread will break in backing; but still a proper tension must be kept or the sheets will wear loose. The last sheet should be fastened with a double knot round the kettle stitch two or three sections down, and that section must be sewn all along. The next style of sewing, and most generally used throughout the trade, is the ordinary method.

If the book is of moderate thickness, you can assemble the sections by occasionally tapping them with a piece of wood weighted at one end with lead, or you can use a thick folding stick as an alternative. I need to emphasize the kettle stitch again. The thread shouldn’t be pulled too tight while making the chain, or it will break when backing; however, you need to maintain the right tension, or the sheets will come loose. The last sheet should be secured with a double knot around the kettle stitch two or three sections down, and that section must be sewn all the way through. The next sewing method, which is most commonly used in the trade, is the regular technique.

Ordinary Sewing is somewhat different, inasmuch as the thread is not twisted round the cord, as in flexible work, when the cord is outside the section. In this method the cord fits into the saw cuts. The thread is simply passed over the cord, not round it, otherwise the principle of sewing is the same, that is, the thread is passed right along the section, out of the holes made, and into them again; the kettle stitch being made in the same way. This style of work has one advantage over flexible work, because the back of the book can be better gilt. In flexible work, the leather is attached with paste to the back, and is flexed, and bent, each time the book is opened, and there is great risk of the gold splitting away or being detached from the leather in wear. Books sewn in the ordinary method are made with a hollow or loose back, and when the book is opened, the crease in the back is independent of the leather covering; the lining of the back only is creased, and the leather keeps its perfect form, by reason of the lining giving it a spring outwards. Morocco is generally used for flexible work; calf, being without a grain, is not suitable, as it would show all the creases in the back made by the opening. This class of sewing is excellent for books that do not require so much strength, such as library bindings,3 but for a dictionary or the like, where constant |29| reference or daily use is required, I should sew a book flexibly. Some binders sew their books in the ordinary way, and paste the leather directly to the back, and thus pass it for flexible work; but I do not think any respectable house would do so. A book that has been sewed flexibly will not have any saw cut in the back, so that on examination, by opening it wide, it will at once be seen if it is a real flexible binding or not.

Ordinary Sewing is a bit different because the thread isn’t wrapped around the cord like in flexible work, where the cord is on the outside of the section. In this method, the cord fits into the saw cuts. The thread is simply laid over the cord instead of wrapping around it. Other than that, the principle of sewing remains the same: the thread goes all the way along the section, coming out of the holes made and going back in again; the kettle stitch is made the same way. This method has one advantage over flexible work since it allows for better gilding on the back of the book. In flexible work, the leather is glued to the back and flexed and bent each time the book is opened, which risks the gold splitting or detaching from the leather over time. Books sewn using the ordinary method have a hollow or loose back, and when the book is opened, the crease in the back is separate from the leather covering; only the lining of the back gets creased, allowing the leather to maintain its shape because the lining provides spring. Morocco is typically used for flexible work; calf isn't suitable since it has no grain and would show all the creases in the back from opening. This type of sewing is great for books that don't need extra strength, like library bindings, but for something like a dictionary that requires frequent reference or daily use, I would choose flexible sewing. Some binders sew their books in the ordinary way and glue the leather directly to the back, passing it off as flexible work; however, I don't believe any reputable shop would do that. A book that has been sewn flexibly won’t show any saw cuts on the back, so if you open it wide, you can easily tell if it’s a genuine flexible binding or not.

[3] This is not to be confounded with public library bindings.

Intelligence must, however, be used; a book that has already been cased (or bound and sewn on cords) must of necessity have the saw cuts or holes, and such a book would show the cuts.

Intelligence has to be used, though; a book that's already been cased (or bound and sewn on cords) will naturally have saw cuts or holes, and that book would show the cuts.

There is another mode called “flexible not to show.” The book is marked up in the usual way as for flexible, and is also slightly scratched on the band marks with the saw; but not deep enough to go through the sections. A thin cord is then taken doubled for each band, and the book is sewn the ordinary flexible way; the cord is knocked into the back in forwarding, and the leather may be stuck on a hollow back with bands, or it may be fastened to the back itself without bands.4

There’s another method called “flexible not to show.” The book is marked up in the usual way like flexible, and it also has some light scratches on the band marks from the saw; but they’re not deep enough to go through the sections. A thin cord is then taken, folded for each band, and the book is sewn in the regular flexible way; the cord is pushed into the back during finishing, and the leather can be attached to a hollow back with bands, or it can be secured directly to the back without bands.4

[4] See chapter on Lining up.

However simple it may appear in description to sew a book, it requires great judgment to keep down the swelling of the book to the proper amount necessary to form a good backing groove and no more. In order to do this, the sheets must from time to time be gently tapped down with a piece of wood or a heavy folding-stick, and great care must be observed to avoid drawing the fastening of the kettle stitch too tight, or the head and tail of the book will be thinner than the middle; this fault once committed has no remedy.

However simple it might seem to describe sewing a book, it takes a lot of skill to control the thickness of the book just right to create a good backing groove and nothing more. To achieve this, the sheets need to be gently tapped down with a piece of wood or a heavy folding stick from time to time, and it’s important to be careful not to pull the kettle stitch too tight. If you do that, the top and bottom of the book will end up thinner than the middle; once that mistake is made, there’s no fixing it.

If the sections are very thin, or in half sheets, they may, if the book is very thick, be sewn “two sheets on.” The needle is passed from the kettle stitch to the first band of |30| the first sheet and out, then another sheet is placed on the top, and the needle inserted at the first band and brought out at band No. 2, the needle is again inserted in the first sheet and in at the second band and out at No. 3, thus treating the two sections as one; in this way it is obvious that only half as much thread will be in the back. With regard to books that have had the heads cut, it will be necessary to open each sheet carefully up to the back before it is placed on the press, otherwise the centre may not be caught, and two or more leaves will be detached after the book is bound.

If the sections are really thin, or in half sheets, they might, if the book is very thick, be sewn “two sheets on.” The needle goes from the kettle stitch to the first band of |30| of the first sheet and out, then another sheet is placed on top, and the needle is inserted at the first band and brought out at band No. 2. The needle is again inserted in the first sheet and in at the second band and out at No. 3, treating the two sections as one; this way, it's clear that only half as much thread will be in the back. For books with cut heads, it's necessary to carefully open each sheet all the way to the back before placing it on the press; otherwise, the center may not be secured, and two or more leaves will separate after the book is bound.

The first and last sections of every book should be overcast for strength. With regard to books that are composed of single leaves, they are treated of in Chapter III. They are to be overcast, and each section treated as a section of an ordinary book, the only difference being, that a strong lining of paper should be given to the back before covering, so that it cannot “throw up.”

The first and last sections of every book should be reinforced for durability. As for books made of single leaves, they are discussed in Chapter III. These should also be reinforced, and each section handled like a section of a regular book, with the only difference being that a sturdy lining of paper should be applied to the spine before covering, so that it won't “throw up.”

When a book is sewn, it is taken from the sewing press by slackening the screws which tighten the beam, so that the cord may be easily detached from the keys and lay cords. The cord may be left at its full length until the end papers are about to be put on, when it must be reduced to about three inches.

When a book is sewn, it’s removed from the sewing press by loosening the screws that secure the beam, allowing the cord to be easily removed from the keys and lay cords. The cord can stay at its full length until it’s time to attach the end papers, at which point it should be trimmed to about three inches.

Brehmer’s patent wire book and pamphlet sewing machine is an introduction well adapted to the use of the stationer, where thick and hand-made paper will bear such a method. It will not, in my opinion, ever be found eligible for library or standard books. Its high price will debar it from the trade generally; but it is to be feared that a sufficient number of really good books may be sewn with it to cause embarrassment to the first-rate binder, who will be baffled in making good work of books which may have been damaged by the invention of sewing books with wire. |31|

Brehmer’s patent wire book and pamphlet sewing machine is a useful tool for stationers, especially when working with thick and handmade paper. However, I believe it will never be suitable for library or standard books. Its high price will make it inaccessible for most in the trade; yet, I worry that enough quality books might be sewn with it, causing issues for top-notch binders who could struggle to produce quality work on books that may have been harmed by this wire sewing method. |31|

Smythe’s Sewing Machine.

The novelty of this machine is, that the book is sewn with wire instead of thread. The machine is fed with wire from spools by small steel rollers, which at each revolution supply exactly the length of wire required to form little staples with two legs. Of these staples, the machine makes at every revolution as many as are required |32| for each sheet of the book that is being sewn—generally two or three, or more, as necessary. These wires or staples are forced through the sections from the inside of the folds; and as the tapes are stretched, and held by clasps exactly opposite to each staple-forming and inserting apparatus, the legs of each staple penetrate the tapes, and project through them to a sufficient distance to allow of their being bent inwards towards each other, and pressed firmly against the tapes. With pamphlets, copy-books, catalogues, &c., no tape is used, the staples themselves being sufficient. About two thousand pamphlets or sheets can be sewn in one hour.

The cool thing about this machine is that it uses wire instead of thread to sew books. The machine pulls wire from spools using small steel rollers, which provide just the right length of wire needed to create small staples with two legs at each turn. The machine produces as many staples as needed for each sheet of the book being sewn—usually two or three, or more if required. These wires or staples are pushed through the sections from the inside of the folds, and as the tapes are stretched and held by clamps right opposite where the staples are formed and inserted, the legs of each staple go through the tapes and stick out enough to be bent inward and pressed firmly against the tapes. For pamphlets, notebooks, catalogs, etc., no tape is used since the staples alone do the job. About two thousand pamphlets or sheets can be sewn in an hour.

Another machine, and I believe the latest, is the “Smythe.” The sewer sits in front of the machine and places the sheets, one at a time, on radial arms which project from a vertical rod. These arms rotate, rise, and adjust the sheets, so as to bring them in their proper position under the curved needles. As each arm rises, small holes are pierced, by means of punches in the sheets, from the inside, to facilitate the entrance and egress of the needles. The loopers then receive a lateral movement to tighten the stitch, and this movement is made adjustable, in order that books may be sewn tight or loose, as required. About 20,000 sheets can be sewn in a day, and no previous sawing is required. Thread is used with this machine.

Another machine, and I believe it's the latest, is the “Smythe.” The sewer sits in front of the machine and places the sheets, one at a time, on radial arms that extend from a vertical rod. These arms rotate, rise, and adjust the sheets to get them into the right position under the curved needles. As each arm rises, small holes are punched in the sheets from the inside to help the needles go in and out. The loopers then move sideways to tighten the stitch, and this movement can be adjusted so that books can be sewn tightly or loosely, as needed. About 20,000 sheets can be sewn in a day, and no previous sawing is necessary. Thread is used with this machine.

CHAPTER VI. FORWARDING.

End Papers.—The end papers should always be made, that is, the coloured paper pasted to a white one; the style of binding must decide what kind of ends are to be used. I give a slight idea of the kinds of papers used and the method of making them.

End Papers.—The end papers should always be created, meaning the colored paper glued to a white one; the type of binding will determine what kind of ends are used. I provide a brief overview of the types of papers used and how to make them.

Cobb Paper is a paper used generally for half-calf bindings, with a sprinkled edge, or as a change, half-calf, gilt top. The paper is stained various shades and colours in the making, and I think derives its name from a binder who first used it. Being liked by the trade, they have distinguished the paper by calling it “Cobb paper,” which name it has kept.

Cobb Paper is a type of paper typically used for half-calf bindings, featuring a sprinkled edge, or alternatively, half-calf with a gilt top. The paper is dyed in various shades and colors during production, and I believe it gets its name from a binder who first utilized it. Since it became popular in the industry, people have recognized it by calling it “Cobb paper,” a name that has persisted.

Surface Paper.—This is a paper, one side of which is prepared with a layer of colour, laid on with a brush very evenly. Some kinds are left dull and others are glazed. The darker colours of this paper are generally chosen for Bibles or books of a religious character, and the lighter colours for the cloth or case work. There are many other shades which may be put into extra bindings with very good effect, and will exercise the taste of the workman. For example, a good cream, when of fine colour and good quality, will look very well in a morocco book with either cloth or morocco joints.

Surface Paper.—This type of paper has one side coated with a layer of color applied very smoothly with a brush. Some varieties have a matte finish, while others are glossy. The darker colors are typically used for Bibles or religious texts, while the lighter colors are preferred for cloth or casing work. There are many other shades that can enhance special bindings effectively, allowing for the worker's creativity. For instance, a nice cream color, when it's of high quality and rich hue, looks great in a morocco book with either cloth or morocco joints.

Marbled Paper.—This paper has the colour disposed upon it in imitation of marble; hence its name. It is produced by sprinkling properly prepared colours upon the surface of a size, made either of a vegetable emulsion, |34| or of a solution of resinous gum. It is necessary, in either preparing an original design or in matching an example, to remember that the veins are the first splashes of colour thrown on the size, and assume that form in consequence of being driven back by the successive colours employed.

Marbled Paper.—This type of paper has colors applied to it to look like marble, which is how it got its name. It’s made by sprinkling specially prepared colors onto a surface treated with either a plant-based emulsion or a solution of resinous gum. When creating an original design or trying to match an example, it's important to remember that the veins are the first splashes of color applied to the surface, and they take that shape because they are pushed back by the layers of colors that are added afterward.

We have it on the authority of Mr. Woolnough,5 that the old Dutch paper was wrapped round toys in order to evade the duty imposed upon it. After being carefully smoothed out, it was sold to bookbinders at a very high price, who used it upon their extra bindings, and if the paper was not large enough they were compelled to join it. After a time the manufacture was introduced into England, but either the colours are not prepared the same way, or the paper itself may not be so suitable, the colours are not brought out with such vigour and beauty, nor do they stand so well, as on the old Dutch paper. Some secret of the art has been lost, and it baffles our ablest marblers of the present day to reproduce many of the beautiful examples that may be seen in some of the old books.

We have it from Mr. Woolnough that the old Dutch paper was wrapped around toys to avoid the tax imposed on it. After being carefully smoothed out, it was sold to bookbinders at a very high price, who used it for their special bindings, and if the paper wasn't large enough, they had to join pieces together. Eventually, the manufacturing process was introduced in England, but either the colors are not prepared the same way, or the paper itself may not be suitable; the colors don't come out with the same vibrancy and beauty, nor do they hold up as well as on the old Dutch paper. Some secret of the craft has been lost, and it frustrates our best marblers today to replicate many of the beautiful examples found in some old books.

[5] “The Whole Art of Marbling as applied to Paper.” C. W. Woolnough. Bell and Sons, 1881.

For further remarks on marbled paper and marbling see chapter on colouring edges.

For more notes on marbled paper and marbling, see the chapter on coloring edges.

Printed and other Fancy Paper may be bought at fancy stationers; the variety is so great that description is impossible, but good taste and judgment should always be used by studying the style and colour of binding. Of late years a few firms have paid some attention to this branch, and have placed in the market some very pretty patterns in various tints.

Printed and other Fancy Paper can be found at specialty stationery stores; the selection is so vast that it's hard to describe, but it's important to use good taste and judgment by considering the style and color of the binding. In recent years, some companies have started to focus on this area and have released some really attractive designs in different shades.

The foreign binders are very fond of papers printed in bronze, and some are certainly of a most elaborate and gorgeous description. Many houses have their own favourite pattern and style. All papers having bronze on |35| them should be carefully selected and the cheaper kinds eschewed, the bronze in a short time going black.

The foreign binders really like papers printed in bronze, and some are definitely very elaborate and beautiful. Many places have their own favorite patterns and styles. All papers with bronze on them should be chosen carefully, avoiding the cheaper kinds since the bronze will turn black after a short time.

Coloured Paste Paper.—This kind the binder can easily make for himself. Some colour should be mixed with paste and a little soap, until it is a little thicker than cream. It should then be spread upon two sheets of paper with a paste brush. The sheets must then be laid together with their coloured surfaces facing each other, and when separated they will have a curious wavy pattern on them. The paper should then be hung up to dry on a string stretched across the room, and when dry glazed with a hot iron. A great deal of it is used in Germany for covering books. Green, reds, and blues have a very good effect.

Colored Paste Paper.—This kind can easily be made by the binder. Some color should be mixed with paste and a little soap until it’s a bit thicker than cream. It should then be spread on two sheets of paper using a paste brush. The sheets must be laid together with their colored surfaces facing each other, and when separated, they will have a unique wavy pattern on them. The paper should then be hung up to dry on a string stretched across the room, and once dry, glazed with a hot iron. A lot of it is used in Germany for covering books. Greens, reds, and blues create a very good effect.

There are many other kinds of paper that may be used, but the above five different varieties will give a very good idea and serve as points to work from. The many bookbinders’ material dealers send out pattern books, and in them some hundreds of patterns are to be found.

There are many other types of paper that can be used, but the five different kinds mentioned above provide a great starting point. Numerous suppliers of bookbinding materials distribute pattern books, which contain hundreds of patterns.

Before leaving the subject of ends, it may be as well to mention that morocco, calf, russia, silk, etc., are often used on whole bound work; these must, however, be placed in the book when has been covered.

Before finishing the topic of bindings, it’s worth noting that materials like morocco, calf, russia leather, silk, etc., are often used for fully bound books; however, these must be inserted into the book after it has been covered.

After having decided upon what kind of paper is to be used, two pieces are cut and folded to the size of the book, leaving them a trifle larger, especially if the book has been already cut. Two pieces of white paper must be prepared in the same way. Having them ready, a white paper is laid down, folded, on a pasting board (any old mill-board kept for this purpose), and pasted with moderately thin paste very evenly; the two fancy papers are laid on the top quite even with the back or folded edge; the top fancy paper is now to be pasted, and the other white laid on that: they must now be taken from the board, and after a squeeze in the press between pressing boards, taken out, and hung up separately to dry. This will cause one half of the white |36| to adhere to one half of the marble or fancy paper. When they are dry, they should be refolded in the old folds and pressed for about a quarter of an hour. When there are more than one pair of ends to make, they need not be made one pair at a time, but ten or fifteen pairs may be done at once, by commencing with the one white, then two fancy, two white, and so on, until a sufficient number have been made, always pressing them to ensure the surfaces adhering properly; then hang them up to dry. When dry press again, to make them quite flat. As this is the first time I speak about pasting, a few hints or remarks on the proper way will not be out of place here. Always draw the brush well over the paper and away from the centre, towards the edges of the paper. Do not have too much paste in the brush, but just enough to make it slide well. Be careful that the whole surface is pasted; remove all hairs or lumps from the paper, or they will mark the book. Finally, never attempt to take up the brush from the paper before it is well drawn over the edge of the paper, or the paper will stick to the brush and turn over, with the risk of the under side being pasted. While the ends are pressing we will proceed with further forwarding our book.

After deciding on the type of paper to use, cut two pieces and fold them to the size of the book, making them slightly larger, especially if the book has already been cut. Prepare two pieces of white paper in the same way. Once you have them ready, lay one piece of white paper down, folded, on a pasting board (any old mill-board kept for this purpose), and apply moderately thin paste evenly. The two pieces of fancy paper should be placed on top, aligning them with the back or folded edge; paste the top fancy paper, then lay the other piece of white paper on top of that. Carefully remove them from the board and squeeze them in the press between pressing boards, then take them out and hang them up separately to dry. This process will cause one half of the white paper to stick to one half of the marble or fancy paper. Once dry, they should be refolded along the original folds and pressed for about fifteen minutes. If you need to make more than one pair of ends, you don’t have to do them one at a time; you can make ten or fifteen pairs at once, starting with one white piece, then two fancy, two white, and so on, until you have enough made, always pressing them to ensure the surfaces stick properly; then hang them up to dry. Once dry, press them again to flatten them completely. Since this is the first time I’m talking about pasting, a few tips on how to do it properly will be helpful. Always draw the brush over the paper from the center toward the edges. Don’t load too much paste onto the brush; just enough so it glides smoothly. Make sure the entire surface is pasted; remove any hairs or lumps from the paper, or they will leave marks on the book. Finally, never lift the brush from the paper before it has been drawn over the edge, or the paper will stick to the brush and flip over, risking getting the underside pasted. While the ends are pressing, we will continue with the process of putting our book together.

CHAPTER VII. PASTING UP.

The first and last sheet of every book must be pasted up or down,—it is called by both terms; and if the book has too much swelling, it must be tapped down gently with a hammer. Hold the book tightly at the foredge with the left hand, knuckles down; rest the back on the press, and hit |37| the back with the hammer to the required thickness. If the book is not held tightly, a portion of the back will slip in and the hollow will always be visible; so I advise that the back be knocked flat on the “lying press” and placed in it without boards, so that the back projects. Screw the press up tightly, so that the sheets cannot slip. A knocking-down iron should then be placed against the book on its left side, and the back hammered against it; the “slips” or cords must be pulled tight, each one being pulled with the right hand, the left holding the slips tightly against the book so that they cannot be pulled through. Should it happen that a slip is pulled out, nothing remains but to re-sew the book, unless it is a thin one, when it may possibly be re-inserted with a large needle. But this will not do the book any good.

The first and last sheet of every book must be glued either at the top or bottom — it's known by both terms; and if the book is too thick, it should be gently tapped down with a hammer. Hold the book firmly at the edges with your left hand, knuckles down; rest the back on the press, and hit the back with the hammer to achieve the required thickness. If the book isn't held tightly, a part of the back may slip in, leaving the hollow always visible; so I recommend knocking the back flat on the “lying press” and placing it in without boards, allowing the back to project. Screw the press down tightly so the sheets can't move. Then, place a knocking-down iron against the left side of the book and hammer the back against it; the “slips” or cords must be pulled tight, each one pulled with the right hand, while the left hand holds the slips firmly against the book to prevent them from being pulled through. If a slip gets pulled out, your only option is to re-sew the book, unless it's a thin one, in which case it might be re-inserted with a large needle. But this won't be beneficial for the book.

The slips being pulled tight, the first and last section should be pasted to those next them. To do this, lay the book on the edge of the press and throw the top section back; lay a piece of waste paper upon the next section about 1 ⁄ 8 or 1 ⁄ 4 inch from the back, according to the size of the book, and paste the space between the back and the waste paper, using generally the second finger of the right hand, holding the paper down with the left. When pasted, the waste paper is removed, and the back of the section put evenly with the back of the book, which is now turned over carefully that it may not shift; the other end is treated in the same manner. A weight should then be put on the top, or if more than a single book, one should lie on the top of the other, back and foredge alternately, each book to be half an inch within the foredge of the book next to it, with a few pressing boards on the top one. When dry the end papers are to be pasted on.

The slips being pulled tight, the first and last section should be glued to the ones next to them. To do this, lay the book on the edge of the press and flip the top section back; place a piece of scrap paper on the next section about 1 ⁄ 8 or 1 ⁄ 4 inch from the back, depending on the size of the book, and glue the space between the back and the scrap paper, generally using the second finger of your right hand, while holding the paper down with your left. Once glued, remove the scrap paper and align the back of the section with the back of the book, which you should then carefully turn over to avoid shifting; treat the other end the same way. Next, place a weight on top, or if you have more than one book, stack them on top of each other, alternating the back and foredge, with each book half an inch inside the foredge of the book next to it, and place a few pressing boards on the top book. Once dry, paste on the endpapers.

CHAPTER VIII. Putting on the end papers.

Two single leaves of white paper, somewhat thicker than the paper used for making the ends, are to be cut, one for each side of the book. The end papers are to be laid down on a board, or on a piece of paper on the press to keep them clean, with the pasted or made side uppermost, the single leaves on the top. They should then be fanned out evenly to a proper width, about a quarter of an inch for an 8vo., a piece of waste paper put on the top, and their edges pasted. The slips or cords thrown back, the white fly is put on the book, a little away from the back, and the made ends on the top even with the back, and again left to dry with the weight of a few boards on the top.

Two single sheets of white paper, a bit thicker than the paper used for the ends, should be cut, one for each side of the book. The end papers need to be placed on a board or a piece of paper on the press to keep them clean, with the pasted or made side facing up, and the single sheets on top. They should then be fanned out evenly to an appropriate width, about a quarter of an inch for an 8vo, with a piece of waste paper placed on top, and their edges glued. The slips or cords are set aside, the white fly is placed on the book a little away from the back, and the made ends should be lined up evenly with the back, then left to dry under the weight of a few boards on top.

If, however, the book or books are very heavy or large, they should have “joints” of either bookbinders’ cloth or of leather of the same colour as the leather with which the book is to be covered. Morocco is mostly used for the leather joints. If the joints are to be of cloth, it may be added either when the ends are being put on, or when the book is ready for pasting down. If the cloth joint is to be put on now, the cloth is cut from 1 to 3 inches, according to the size of book, and folded quite evenly, the side of the cloth which has to go on the book being left the width intended to be glued; that is, a width of 1 inch should be folded 3 ⁄ 4 one side, leaving 1 ⁄ 4 the other, the latter to be put on the book. The smallest fold is now glued, the white fly put on, and the fancy paper on the top; the difference being, that the paper instead of being made double or folded is single, or instead of taking a paper double the |39| size of the book and folding it, it is cut to the size of the book and pasted all over. It will be better if the marble paper be pasted and the white put on and well rubbed down, and then the whole laid between mill-boards to dry. A piece of waste or brown paper should be slightly fastened at the back over the whole, (turning the cloth down on the book) to keep it clean and prevent it from getting damaged.

If the book or books are really heavy or big, they should have “joints” made from bookbinder's cloth or leather that matches the color of the book cover. Morocco leather is mainly used for the joints. If the joints are going to be cloth, they can be added when the ends are being attached or when the book is ready for pasting. If the cloth joint is applied now, cut the cloth to be 1 to 3 inches long, depending on the book size, and fold it evenly, leaving the side that will be glued the width you want; for example, fold 1 inch on one side, leaving 1/4 inch on the other side for attaching to the book. The smallest fold is glued, then the white fly is added, followed by the decorative paper on top. The difference is that instead of using double paper, a single sheet is cut to the book size and glued all over. It’s better if the marble paper is glued down, the white paper is added, and everything is pressed down well, then the whole thing should be placed between mill-boards to dry. A piece of waste or brown paper should be slightly secured at the back over everything (with the cloth turned down on the book) to keep it clean and protect it from damage.

The strongest manner is to overcast the ends and cloth joint to the first and last section of the book, as it is then almost impossible either for the cloth or ends to pull away from the book.

The best way is to cover the ends and the cloth joint to the first and last part of the book, as this makes it nearly impossible for either the cloth or the ends to come loose from the book.

If, however, the cloth joint is to be put on after the book is covered, the flys and ends are only edged on with paste to the book just sufficient to hold them while it is being bound; and when the book is to be pasted down, the ends are lifted from the book by placing a thin folding-stick between the ends and book and running it along, when they will come away quite easily. The cloth is then cut and folded as before and fastened on, and the ends and flys properly pasted in the back.

If the cloth joint is going to be applied after the book is covered, the flys and ends are only lightly pasted to the book just enough to hold them in place while binding. When it's time to paste the book down, you lift the ends off the book by sliding a thin folding stick between the ends and the book, running it along until they come off easily. The cloth is then cut and folded like before and secured, with the ends and flys properly pasted at the back.

Morocco joints are usually put in after the book is covered, but I prefer that if joints of any kind are to go in the book they should be put in at the same time as the ends. Take great care that the ends are quite dry after being made before attaching them, or the dampness will affect the beginning and end of the book and cause the first few leaves to wrinkle.

Morocco joints are typically added after the book is covered, but I prefer to have any kind of joints installed at the same time as the ends. Make sure the ends are completely dry before attaching them; otherwise, any moisture can affect the beginning and end of the book, causing the first few pages to wrinkle.

When the ends are quite dry the slips should be unravelled and scraped, a bodkin being used for the unravelling, and the back of a knife for the scraping. The object of this is, that they may with greater ease be passed through the holes in the mill-board, and the bulk of the cord be more evenly distributed and beaten down, so as not to be seen after the book has been covered. |41|

When the ends are completely dry, the slips should be unraveled and scraped, using a bodkin for unraveling and the back of a knife for scraping. The goal is to make it easier to pass them through the holes in the millboard, and to ensure that the bulk of the cord is more evenly distributed and pressed down, so that it won't be visible after the book is covered. |41|

Method of sewing Ends on to Book that can­not tear away.
First and last sheet are not over­cast­ed when treat­ed in this man­ner.

Many houses cut away the slip entirely, in order that the work may look better. This should never be done; with large and heavy books it is better to allow the bulk of the cord to be seen rather than sacrifice strength. To a certain extent this may be avoided by cutting a small portion of the mill-board away to allow the cord to lodge in.

Many houses completely remove the slip to improve the appearance of the work. This should never happen; with large and heavy books, it’s better to show some of the bulk of the cord instead of sacrificing strength. To some extent, this can be avoided by trimming a small section of the mill-board to let the cord sit in.

There is another way of putting on the end papers, that is, to sew the ends on with the book when sewing. The paper is folded at the back with a small fold, the sheet placed in the fold, and the whole sewn through. It is at once apparent that under no circumstances can there be any strain on the ends, and that there is hardly any possibility of the ends breaking away from the sheets.

There’s another method for attaching the end papers, which is to sew them on with the book while sewing. The paper is folded at the back with a small crease, the sheet is placed in the fold, and everything is sewn together. It's clear that under no circumstances can there be any strain on the ends, and there's very little chance of the ends coming loose from the sheets.

For books subjected to very hard wear (school books, public library books, etc.) this method of placing the ends is by far the best. See opposite page.

For books that experience a lot of wear and tear (like school books, public library books, etc.), this method of positioning the ends is definitely the best. See opposite page.

CHAPTER IX. Trimming.

Is the book to have a gilt top? marbled or gilt edges? or is it to be left uncut? These questions must be settled before anything further is done. If the book is to be uncut or have a gilt top, the rough edges should be taken away with a very sharp knife or shears: this process is called “trimming.”

Is the book going to have a gold leaf top? Marbled or gold edges? Or is it going to be left uncut? These decisions need to be made before moving forward. If the book is going to be uncut or have a gold leaf top, the rough edges should be removed with a very sharp knife or scissors: this process is known as “trimming.”

The book having been knocked up straight, is laid on a piece of wood planed smooth and kept for this purpose, called a “trimming board.” It is then compassed from the back, a straight edge laid to the compass holes, and the foredge cut with a very sharp knife. If the knife is not |42| sharp the paper will yield to the slight pressure required and will not be cut. It is therefore absolutely necessary that a good edge be given to the blade, and, if possible, to keep a special knife for the purpose. Such knives, called trimming knives, are sold, the probable cost being about two shillings. They have a very broad blade.

The book, having been properly set up, is placed on a smooth piece of wood designed for this task, known as a “trimming board.” It’s then measured from the back, a straight edge is lined up with the compass holes, and the foredge is trimmed with a very sharp knife. If the knife isn’t sharp, the paper will bend under the slight pressure needed and won’t be cut. Therefore, it’s essential to ensure the blade has a good edge, and if possible, to have a specific knife just for this. These knives, called trimming knives, are available for purchase, likely costing around two shillings. They feature a very wide blade.

The object of trimming is to make the edges true; the amount taken off must be only the rough and dirty edges, the book being thus left as large as possible.

The purpose of trimming is to make the edges even; the amount removed should only be the rough and dirty edges, leaving the book as large as possible.

The French put their books in the press between boards and rasp the edges, but this method has not only the disadvantage of showing all the marks of the rasp, but also of leaving a roughness which catches and retains the dust in proportion to the soft or hard qualities of the paper.

The French put their books in the press between boards and sand the edges, but this method not only has the drawback of revealing all the marks from the sander, but also leaves a roughness that traps and holds onto dust depending on the softness or hardness of the paper.

Cardboard Machine used for trimming.

Another method is to put the book into the cutting press, and cut the overplus off with a plough, having a circular knife, called a “round plough.” This is used when a number of books are being done together. I prefer to use the straight edge and knife for the foredge and tail, and to cut the top when the book is in boards.

Another method is to place the book in the cutting press and trim the excess using a plow with a circular knife, known as a “round plow.” This is used when multiple books are being processed together. I prefer to use a straightedge and knife for the foredge and tail, and to trim the top when the book is in boards.

It is, however, not necessary to go to the expense of a round plough, it is only advisable to have one when “plough trimming” is of daily occurrence; an ordinary plough knife, ground to a circular edge, will answer in most cases.

It’s not necessary to spend money on a round plough; it’s only recommended if “plough trimming” happens every day. A regular plough knife, sharpened to a circular edge, will work in most situations.

Another excellent plan is to set the gauge of the |43| mill-board machine, or a card-cutting machine, and to cut or trim each section, foredge and tail, by the machine knife. In a large number of books this plan is to be recommended; the whole is cut more even and in less time; trimming by this method must, however, be done before sewing. This method is also adopted by some French houses.

Another great idea is to set the gauge of the |43| mill-board machine, or a card-cutting machine, and to cut or trim each section, foredge and tail, using the machine knife. In a lot of books, this approach is recommended; the entire process gets a more consistent cut and takes less time; however, trimming this way must be done before sewing. This method is also used by some French companies.

Before leaving the subject of trimming, I will insert a few lines from that well-known paper the “Athenæum,” as to how a book should be trimmed; and so much do I agree with its writer, that I have the quotation, in large type, hung up in my shop as a constant caution and instruction to the workmen:—

Before moving on from the topic of trimming, I want to include a few lines from the well-known publication "Athenæum" about how a book should be trimmed. I agree with the author so much that I've hung the quotation in large letters in my shop as a constant reminder and guide for the workers:—

(No. 2138, Oct. 17th, 1868.)

“Mr. EDITOR,—If you think that the ‘Athenæum’ is read or seen by any members of that class of ruthless binders, who delight in destroying the appearance of every pamphlet and book that comes into their hands, by trimming or ploughing its edges to the quick (and almost always crookedly), I beg you to insert this appeal to the monsters I have named, to desist from their barbarous practices, to learn to reverence the margin of a book, and never to take from it a hair’s breadth more than is absolutely needful. The brutality with which the fair margins of one’s loved volumes are treated by these mangling wretches with their awful plough knives is shocking to behold. The curses of book lovers are daily heaped on their backs, but they go on running-a-muck, heedless of remonstrance, remorseless, ever sacrificing fresh victims. Had we a paternal government, one might hope for due punishment of some of these offenders: one at least might be ploughed up the back, another up the front, as an example and a terror to the trade; but as this wholesome correction cannot unhappily be administered, will you give expression to the indignation of one amongst a million sufferers for years from these |44| trimmers’ savageries, and let them know what feelings their reckless cruelty awakens in many breasts? One of the largest houses in London has just sent me home fifty copies of an essay, intended as a present for a friend. They have been trimmed, and been ruined. Would that I could have the trimming of their trimmer’s hair and ears; also his nose! I don’t think his best friend would know him when I had done with him.

“Mr. EDITOR,—If you think that the ‘Athenæum’ is read or noticed by those ruthless binders who take pleasure in ruining every pamphlet and book they touch by cropping or shaving its edges down to the quick (and almost always unevenly), I urge you to publish this appeal to those monsters to stop their barbaric practices. They need to learn to respect the margins of a book and never remove more than the absolute minimum necessary. The way these butchers treat the pristine margins of cherished volumes is shocking. Book lovers curse them daily, yet they keep up their mindless destruction, showing no remorse and always seeking new victims. If we had a caring government, we might hope for some punishment for these offenders: one could be plowed up the back, another from the front, as a warning to the trade; but since this necessary correction sadly can't be administered, will you express the outrage of one among millions who have suffered for years from these trimmers’ atrocities and let them know what feelings their reckless cruelty stirs in many? One of the largest publishers in London just sent me fifty copies of an essay intended as a gift for a friend. They have been trimmed and ruined. If only I could be in charge of trimming their trimmer's hair and ears; and also his nose! I don't think his best friend would recognize him after I was done.”

“But, Sir, we live in a philanthropic age, and are bound to forgive our enemies and try to reform the worst criminals. I therefore propose a practical measure to win these book trimmers from their enormities; namely, that fifty at least of your readers, who care for book margins, should subscribe a guinea each for a challenge cup, to be competed for yearly, and held by that firm which, on producing copies of all books and pamphlets trimmed by it during the year, shall be adjudged to have disfigured them least. I ask you, Sir, if you will receive subscriptions for this challenge cup? If you will, I shall be glad to send you mine.

"But, Sir, we live in a charitable time and are expected to forgive our enemies and try to reform even the worst offenders. So, I suggest a practical idea to win these book trimmers over to better practices; specifically, that at least fifty of your readers, who value the margins of books, should each contribute a guinea for a challenge cup. This cup would be awarded annually to the firm that, by presenting copies of all the books and pamphlets it has trimmed during the year, is deemed to have disfigured them the least. I ask you, Sir, if you would accept subscriptions for this challenge cup? If you do, I’ll be happy to send you mine."

“M. A.

“M. A.

“P.S.—Any one who will cut out this letter, and get it pasted up in any binder’s or printer’s trimming room, will confer a favour on the writer.”

“P.S.—Anyone who cuts out this letter and gets it posted in any binder’s or printer’s trimming room will do the writer a favor.”

A very good trimming machine has been invented by Messrs. Richmond and Co., of Kirby Street, Hatton Garden. The bed rises and falls, with the books upon it, instead of the knife descending upon the work, as in the cutting machines; and the gauges are so arranged, that the foredge of one pile of books, and the tails of another, can be cut at one operation, and it is guaranteed by the makers that the knife will leave a clean and perfectly trimmed edge.

A really great trimming machine has been created by Messrs. Richmond and Co., located on Kirby Street in Hatton Garden. The bed moves up and down with the books on it, instead of the knife coming down onto the work like in traditional cutting machines. The guides are set up so that the front edge of one stack of books and the spines of another can be trimmed in one go, and the manufacturers promise that the knife will leave a clean and perfectly trimmed edge.

CHAPTER X. GLUEING UP.

The book must now be glued up; that is, glue must be applied to the back to hold the sections together, and make the back firm during the rounding and backing. Knock the book perfectly true at its back and head, and put it into the lying press between two pieces of old mill-board; expose the back and let it project from the boards a little, the object being to hold the book firm and to keep the slips close to the sides, so that no glue shall get on them; then with glue, not too thick, but hot, glue the back, rubbing it in with the brush, and take the overplus off again with the brush. In some shops, a handful of shavings is used to rub the glue in, and to take the refuse away, but I consider this to be a bad plan, as a great quantity of glue is wasted.

The book needs to be glued now; that is, glue must be applied to the spine to hold the sections together and to strengthen the spine during rounding and backing. Align the book perfectly at the spine and head, and place it in the lying press between two pieces of old board. Expose the spine, letting it stick out a bit from the boards; the goal is to keep the book secure and the slips close to the edges so that no glue gets on them. Then, using glue that isn't too thick but hot, apply it to the spine, rubbing it in with the brush, and remove any excess with the brush. In some shops, a handful of shavings is used to rub the glue in and to clean up the excess, but I think this is a bad idea because it wastes a lot of glue.

The Germans rub the glue into the back with the back of a hammer, and take away the overplus with the brush; this is certainly better than using shavings. The back must not be allowed to get too dry before it is rounded, or it will have to be damped with a sponge, to give to the glue the elasticity required, but it should not be wet, this being worse than letting it get too dry. The book should be left for about an hour, or till it no longer feels tacky to the touch, but still retains its flexibility. A flexible bound book should first be rounded, a backing board being used to bring the sheets round instead of a hammer, then the back glued, and a piece of tape tied round the book to prevent its going back flat. |46|

The Germans apply glue to the spine using the back of a hammer and remove the excess with a brush; this is definitely better than using shavings. The spine shouldn't be allowed to dry out too much before it's rounded, or else it will need to be dampened with a sponge to give the glue the necessary flexibility, but it shouldn't be too wet, as that’s worse than letting it dry out. The book should sit for about an hour, or until it no longer feels sticky to the touch, but still has some flexibility. A flexibly bound book should first be rounded, using a backing board to help shape the pages instead of a hammer, then glue the spine, and tie a piece of tape around the book to keep it from flattening out. |46|

But all books are not glued up in the press; some workmen knock up a number of books, and, allowing them to project a little over their press, glue the lot up at once; others again, by holding the book in the left hand and drawing the brush up and down the back. These last methods are, however, only practised in cloth shops, where books are bound or cased at very low prices. The proper way, as I have explained, is to put the book in the lying press. The book is then laid on its side to dry, and if more than one, they should be laid alternately back and foredge, with the back projecting about half an inch, and allowed to dry spontaneously, and on no account to be dried by the heat of a fire. All artificial heat in drying in any process of bookbinding is injurious to the work.

But not all books are assembled in the press; some workers put together several books and, letting them stick out a bit over their press, glue them all at once; others, by holding the book in their left hand and moving the brush up and down the spine. However, these last methods are only used in cloth shops, where books are bound or cased at very low prices. The proper way, as I've explained, is to put the book in the lying press. The book is then placed on its side to dry, and if there are multiple books, they should be laid alternately back to front, with the spine sticking out about half an inch, and allowed to dry naturally, never using heat from a fire. Any artificial heat in drying during the bookbinding process is harmful to the work.

CHAPTER XI. Rounding.

The word “rounding” applies to the back of the book, and is preliminary to backing. In rounding the back, the book is to be laid on the press before the workman with the foredge towards him; the book is then to be held with the left hand by placing the thumb on the foredge and fingers on the top of the book pointing towards the back, so that by drawing the fingers towards the thumb, or by pressing fingers and thumb together, the back is drawn towards the workman at an angle. In this position the back is struck with the face of the hammer, beginning in the centre, still drawing the back over with the left hand. The book is then to be turned over, and the other side treated in the same way, and continually |47| changed or turned from one side to the other until it has its proper form, which should be a part of a circle. When sufficiently rounded, it should be examined to see if one side be perfectly level with the other, by holding the book up and glancing down its back, and gently tapping the places where uneven, until it is perfectly true or uniform. The thicker the book the more difficult it will be found to round it; and some papers will be found more obstinate than others, so that great care must be exercised both in rounding and backing, as the foredge when cut will have exactly the same form as the back. Nothing can be more annoying than to see books lop-sided, pig-backed, and with sundry other ailments, inherent to cheap bookbinding. |48|

The word “rounding” refers to the back of the book and comes before backing. To round the back, the book should be placed on the press with the foredge facing the worker. The worker holds the book with their left hand, placing their thumb on the foredge and fingers on the top of the book pointing towards the back. By drawing the fingers towards the thumb or pressing the fingers and thumb together, the back is drawn towards the worker at an angle. While in this position, the back is struck with the face of the hammer, starting in the center, while still drawing the back over with the left hand. The book is then flipped over, and the other side is treated the same way, continually changing or turning from one side to the other until it takes its proper shape, which should resemble part of a circle. Once rounded enough, the book should be checked to see if one side is perfectly level with the other by holding it up and looking down its back, gently tapping any uneven places until it's perfectly straight or uniform. The thicker the book, the more challenging it will be to round it, and some papers will be more stubborn than others, so great care must be taken in both rounding and backing, as the foredge when cut will mirror the shape of the back. Nothing is more frustrating than seeing books that are lopsided, have a pig-backed shape, or have various other problems typical of low-quality bookbinding.

Rounding Machine.

The back when properly rounded should be about a third of a circle, according to the present mode, but in olden times they were made almost flat. They were not rounded as now done, but the swelling caused by the thread used made quite enough rounding when put in the press for backing.

The back, when properly rounded, should be about a third of a circle, based on current standards, but in the past, they were made nearly flat. They weren't rounded like they are today; instead, the bulge from the thread used created enough rounding when pressed for backing.

Flat back books have a certain charm about them, the more so if in other respects they are properly forwarded. The theory is altogether averse to practical binding. I have always been given to understand that we round our books in order to counteract the tendency of a book to sink in and assume a convex back. Any old well-used book bound with a flat back will show at once this defect.

Flat back books have a unique charm, especially when they are well-made in other ways. The idea is completely opposed to practical binding. I’ve always been told that we round our books to prevent them from sinking in and developing a curved back. Any old, well-used book with a flat back will quickly reveal this issue.

Messrs. Hopkinson and Cope, of Farringdon Road, London, manufacture a rounding machine. They claim that this machine will round 600 books per hour, and that any desired “round” may be given to the book with great uniformity.

Messrs. Hopkinson and Cope, located on Farringdon Road, London, make a rounding machine. They assert that this machine can round 600 books per hour and that any desired "round" can be applied to the book with great consistency.

CHAPTER XII. BACKING.

The boards required for backing, called backing boards, should always be the same length as the book. They are made somewhat thicker than cutting boards, and have their tops planed at an angle, so that the sheets may fall well over.

The boards needed for backing, known as backing boards, should always be the same length as the book. They are a bit thicker than cutting boards and have their tops smoothed at an angle, so that the sheets can hang over nicely.

Backing Hammer.

Hold the book in the left hand, lay a board on one side, a little away from the back, taking the edge of the top sheet as a guide, the distance to be a trifle more than the thickness of the boards intended to be used. Then |49| turn over the book, with the backing board, holding the board to the book by the thumb, so that it does not shift, and lay the other board at exactly the same distance on the other side. The whole is now to be held tightly by the left hand and lowered into the press. The boards may possibly have shifted a little during the process, and any correction may now be made whilst the press holds the book before screwing up tight, such as a slight tap with the hammer to one end of a board that may not be quite straight. Should the boards however be not quite true, it will be better to take the whole out and readjust them, rather than lose time in trying to rectify the irregularity by any other method. If the rounding is not quite true it will be seen at once, and the learner must not be disheartened if he has to take his book out of the press two or three times to correct any slight imperfection.

Hold the book in your left hand and place a board on one side, slightly away from the back. Use the edge of the top sheet as a guide, with the distance being a bit more than the thickness of the boards you plan to use. Then |49| flip the book over, keeping the backing board in place by holding it with your thumb so it doesn’t move, and lay the other board at exactly the same distance on the opposite side. Now hold everything tightly with your left hand and lower it into the press. The boards may have shifted a bit during this process, so any adjustments can be made while the press holds the book before you tighten the screws, like giving a slight tap with the hammer to one end of a board that might not be perfectly straight. If the boards are still not aligned properly, it’s better to take everything out and readjust them instead of wasting time trying to fix the irregularity in other ways. If the rounding isn’t quite right, it will be obvious, and you shouldn’t get discouraged if you need to take your book out of the press a few times to fix any minor imperfections.

Before Backing. After Backing.

The book and boards having been lowered flush with the cheeks of the press, screw it up as tightly as possible with the iron hand-pin. The back of the book must now be gently struck with the back of the hammer, holding it slanting and beating the sheets well over towards the backing boards. Commence from the centre of the back and do |50| not hit too hard, or the dent made by the hammer will show after the book has been covered. The back is to be finished with the face of the hammer, the sheets being brought well over on the boards so that a good and solid groove may be made. Each side must be treated in the same way, and have the same amount of weight and beating. The back must have a gradual hammering, and the sheets, when knocked one way, must not be knocked back again. The hammer should be swung with a circular motion, always away from the centre of the back. The book, when opened after backing, should be entirely without wrinkles; their presence being a sign that the workman did not know his business, or that it was carelessly done. Backing and cutting constitute the chief work in forwarding, and if these two are not done properly the book cannot be square and solid—two great essentials in bookbinding.

The book and boards should be lowered so they're flush with the edges of the press. Screw it up as tightly as possible using the iron hand-pin. Now, gently strike the back of the book with the hammer, holding it at an angle and making sure to beat the sheets well over towards the backing boards. Start from the center of the back and don’t hit too hard, or the dent from the hammer will be visible once the book is covered. Finish the back using the face of the hammer, pushing the sheets over the boards to create a solid groove. Treat each side the same way, applying equal weight and pressure. The back requires gradual hammering, and when the sheets are moved in one direction, they should not be moved back again. Swing the hammer in a circular motion, always away from the center of the back. When the book is opened after backing, it should be completely wrinkle-free; having wrinkles indicates that the worker didn’t know what they were doing or that the job was done carelessly. Backing and cutting are the main tasks in bookbinding, and if these are not done correctly, the book will not be square and solid—two crucial aspects of bookbinding.

Backing flexible work will be found a little more difficult, as the slips are tighter; but otherwise the process is exactly the same, only care must be taken not to hammer the cord too much, and to bring over the sections very gently, in order not to break the sewing thread.

Backing flexible work will be a bit more challenging, as the slips are tighter; but otherwise, the process is exactly the same. Just be careful not to pull the cord too hard and to move the sections very gently, so you don't break the sewing thread.

Two-edged Backing Boards.

The backing boards may be replaned from time to time, as they become used, but boards may be had having a double face of steel to them; these may be used from either side. The edges of the steel must not be sharp, or they will cut the paper when backing. The ordinary boards may also have a face of steel screwed to them, but I prefer to use the wood—one can get a firmer back without fear of cutting the sheets.

The backing boards can be replaned occasionally as they get worn down, but boards are also available with a double steel face, allowing them to be used on either side. The edges of the steel should not be sharp, or they can cut the paper during backing. Regular boards can have a steel face attached with screws, but I prefer using wood—it provides a firmer backing without the risk of cutting the sheets.

There are several backing machines by different makers but they are all of similar plan. The book being first rounded is put between the cheeks, and the roller at the |51| top presses the sheets over. I am sorry to say that a great number of sheets get cut by this process, especially when a careless man has charge of the machine.

There are several backing machines from different manufacturers, but they all have a similar design. The book is first rounded and then placed between the cheeks, while the roller at the top presses the sheets down. Unfortunately, many sheets get cut during this process, especially when a careless person is operating the machine.

CHAPTER XIII. Millboards.

There is no occasion to wait for the book to be advanced as far as the backing before the workman sees to his boards; but he should take advantage of the period of drying to prepare them, to look out the proper thickness of the board, and to line them with paper either on one side or on both.

There’s no need to wait for the book to be fully set up before the worker gets to his boards; instead, he should use the drying time to prepare them, check the right thickness of the board, and line them with paper on one side or both.

There are now so many kinds of mill-boards made that a few words about them may not be out of place. The best boards are made of old rope, and cost about £30 per ton. The various mills make each a different quality, the prices ranging down to £14 per ton; about this price the straw boards may be said to commence, they going as low as £7, and even less.

There are now many different types of millboards available, so it might be helpful to say a few words about them. The highest quality boards are made from old rope and cost around £30 per ton. Each mill produces a different quality, with prices going down to £14 per ton; straw boards typically start at this price and can go as low as £7, or even less.

A new board has lately appeared called leather board; it is exceedingly hard and durable. I made several experiments with this board, but up to the present have not succeeded in getting it to lay flat on the book.

A new board has recently come out called leather board; it is really tough and long-lasting. I’ve tried using this board several times, but so far I haven’t been able to get it to lie flat in the book.

Boards are made to the various sizes in sheets varying from pott (171 ⁄ 4 × 141 ⁄ 4 inches) to double elephant (40 × 28 inches). The thickness is known as 6d., 7d., 8d.; 8x, or eightpenny one cross; 8xx, eightpenny two cross; X for tenpenny. Here is a list in full of all the boards likely to be used:—|52|

Boards come in various sizes, from pott (17 1/4 × 14 1/4 inches) to double elephant (40 × 28 inches). The thickness is referred to as 6d, 7d, 8d; 8x, or eightpenny one cross; 8xx, eightpenny two cross; X for tenpenny. Here is a complete list of all the boards likely to be used:—|52|

KEY: D=“Dozens in a Bundle.”; W=“Weight Per Bundle, lb.”
DESCRIPTION. SIZE. 6d. 7d. 8d. 8x. 8xx. X.
inches. D W D W D W D W D W D W
Pott 17 1/4  × 14 1/4 6 28 6 40 5 48 5 56 4 60 3 58
Foolscap 18 1/2  × 14 1/2 6 32 6 44 5 50 5 58 4 62 3 58
Crown 20  × 16 1/4 6 36 6 50 5 62 5 72 4 74 3 72
Small Half Royal 20 1/4  × 13 6 30 6 44 5 50 5 60 4 62 3 58
Large Half Royal 21  × 14 6 30 6 48 5 60 5 62 4 70 3 72
Short 21  × 17 6 38 6 55 5 70 5 78 4 78 3 78
Sm. Half Imperial 22 1/4  × 15 6 36 6 50 5 64 4 70 3 62 2 60
Half Imperial 23 1/2  × 16 ½ 6 40 6 60 5 66 4 70 3 66 2 64
Mdle. or Sm. Demy 22.5  × 18 1/2 6 45 6 60 5 66 4 74 3 72 2 66
Large Middle or Large Demy 23 3/4  × 18 1/2 6 48 6 68 5 66 4 76 3 74 2 60
Large or Medium 24  × 19 6 48 6 70 5 65 4 76 3 74 2 60
Small Royal 25 1/2  × 19 1/2 6 52 6 78 5 78 4 84 3 84 2 68
Large Royal 26 3/4  × 20 3/4 6 52 6 78 4 68 3 76 2 68 2 86
Extra Royal 28 1/2  × 21 1/2 6 56 6 82 4 74 3 80 2 74 2 92
Imperial 32  × 22 1/2 6 72 4 72 3 72 2 72 2 96 2 120
Mill-board Shears.

Having chosen the board, it is necessary to cut it up to the size wanted. If the book is 8vo., the board is cut into eight pieces; if 4to., into four; using a demy board for a demy book, or a royal for a royal book. To cut up the board, first mark up, as a guide for the mill-board shears. These are very large shears, in shape somewhat like an enlarged tin shears. To use the shears, screw up one arm in the laying press, hold the board by the left hand, using the right to work the upper arm, the left hand meanwhile guiding the board. Some little tact is required |53| to cut heavy boards. It will be found that it is necessary to press the lower arm away with the thigh, and bring the upper arm towards the operator whilst cutting.

Once you've selected the board, you need to cut it down to the desired size. If the book is 8vo, the board is cut into eight pieces; if it's 4to, then it’s cut into four pieces. Use a demy board for a demy book, or a royal one for a royal book. To cut the board, first mark it as a guide for the mill-board shears. These shears are quite large, resembling oversized tin shears. When using the shears, secure one arm in the laying press, hold the board with your left hand, and operate the upper arm with your right hand while guiding the board with the left. Some skill is needed to cut through heavy boards. You'll find it necessary to push the lower arm away with your thigh while bringing the upper arm toward you as you cut.

Mill-board Machine.

A mill-board cutting machine is now in all large shops. The cut fairly well explains itself; the long blade descending cuts the boards, which are held fast on the table by the clamp. The gauges are set either on the table or in front. The board is put on the table and held tight by pressure of the foot on the treadle; the knife descending upon the exposed board cuts after the principle of the guillotine blade. Another kind, introduced by Messrs. Richmond, of Kirby Street, Hatton Garden, is made for steam work, and is no doubt one of the best that can be made. Instead of a knife to descend, a number of circular cutters are made to revolve on two spindles, the one cutter working against the other (see woodcut); but I give Messrs. Richmond’s own description, it being more explicit than any I could |54| possibly give: “The machine accomplishes a surprising amount of superior work in a very short time, and the best description of the ordinary lever mill-board cutting machine cannot be compared with it. The machine is very strongly and accurately constructed. It is furnished with an iron table having a planed surface, and is also provided with a self-acting feed gauge. The gear wheels are engine cut, and the circular cutters, which are of the best cast steel, being turned and ground “dead true,” clean and accurate cutting is insured. The machine will therefore be found to be a most profitable acquisition to any bookbinding establishment in which large quantities of mill-board are used up.”

A mill-board cutting machine is now available in all large shops. The cut pretty much explains itself; the long blade moves down to cut the boards, which are securely held on the table by the clamp. The gauges are set either on the table or in front. The board is placed on the table and held tight by the pressure of the foot on the treadle; the knife drops onto the exposed board, cutting just like a guillotine blade. Another type, introduced by Messrs. Richmond of Kirby Street, Hatton Garden, is designed for steam operation, and it's undoubtedly one of the best available. Instead of a knife that descends, several circular cutters rotate on two spindles, with one cutter working against the other (see woodcut). I’ll share Messrs. Richmond’s own description, as it’s more detailed than anything I could possibly provide: “The machine accomplishes a surprising amount of superior work in a very short time, and the best description of the ordinary lever mill-board cutting machine cannot be compared with it. The machine is very strongly and accurately constructed. It features an iron table with a planed surface and also comes with a self-acting feed gauge. The gear wheels are engine-cut, and the circular cutters, made from the best cast steel and turned and ground ‘dead true,’ ensure clean and accurate cuts. Therefore, this machine will be a valuable addition to any bookbinding establishment that uses large amounts of mill-board.”

Steam Mill-board Cutting Machine.

The boards being cut, square the edge which is to go to the back of the book. This must be done in the cutting press, using a cutting board for one side termed a “runner,” and another called a “cut-against” for the other side. |55| These are simply to save the press from being cut; and a piece of old mill-board is generally placed on the cut-against, so that the plough knife does not cut or use up the cut-against too quickly. The boards are now, if for whole-binding, to be lined on both sides with paper; if for half-binding only on one side. The reason for lining them is to make the boards curve inwards towards the book. The various pastings would cause the board to curve the contrary way if it were not lined. If the boards are to be lined both sides, paper should be cut double the size of the boards; if only one side, the paper cut a little wider than the boards, so that a portion of the paper may be turned over on to the other side about a quarter of an inch. The paper is now pasted with not too thick paste, and the board laid on the paper with the cut edge towards the portion to be turned over. It is now taken up with the paper adhering, and laid down on the press with the paper side upwards, and rubbed well down; it is then again turned over and the paper drawn over the other side. It is advisable to press the boards to make more certain of the paper adhering, remembering always that the paper must be pasted all over very evenly, for it cannot be expected to adhere if it is not pasted properly.

Cut the boards and square the edge that will go to the back of the book. This needs to be done in the cutting press, using a cutting board on one side called a “runner,” and another one called a “cut-against” for the other side. |55| These help protect the press from being damaged; usually, a piece of old millboard is placed on the cut-against to prevent the plough knife from wearing it down too quickly. If the boards are for whole-binding, they should be lined with paper on both sides; if for half-binding, only on one side. Lining them helps the boards curve inward toward the book. Without lining, the various pastes would make the boards curve outward. If both sides are being lined, paper should be cut to double the size of the boards; if just one side, the paper should be cut a bit wider than the boards to leave about a quarter of an inch to fold over on the other side. Now, paste the paper with a not too thick paste, and lay the board on the paper with the cut edge facing the part that will be turned over. Pick it up with the paper still sticking, and place it down on the press with the paper side facing up, rubbing it down well. Then, turn it over and fold the paper over the other side. It’s a good idea to press the boards to ensure the paper sticks well, always remembering that the paper must be evenly pasted all over; otherwise, it won’t stick properly.

When the books are very thick, two boards must be pasted together, not only to get the proper thickness, but for strength, for a made board is always stronger than a single one. If a board has to be made, a thick and a somewhat thinner board should be fastened together with paste. Paste both boards and put them in the standing press for the night. Great pressure should not be put on at first, but after allowing them to set for a few minutes, pull down the press as tight as possible. When placing made boards to the book, the thinner one should always be next the book. It may be taken as a general rule that a thinner board when pasted will always draw a thicker one. |56|

When the books are really thick, you need to paste two boards together, not just to achieve the right thickness but also for added strength, since a constructed board is always sturdier than a single one. If you need to create a board, attach a thick one to a slightly thinner one with paste. Paste both boards and place them in the standing press overnight. Don’t apply too much pressure at first; instead, let them sit for a few minutes before tightening the press as much as possible. When attaching made boards to the book, the thinner one should always be next to the book. A good rule of thumb is that a thinner board when pasted will always pull a thicker one. |56|

When boards are lined on one side only it is usual to turn half an inch of the paper over the square or cut edge, and the lined side must be placed next the book.

When boards are lined on just one side, it's common to fold half an inch of the paper over the square or cut edge, and the lined side should be placed next to the book.

Many binders line the mill-board all over with paper before cutting; this may save time, but the edge of the board at the joint is liable to be abraised, and the resulting joint uneven.

Many binders cover the mill-board with paper before cutting; this may save time, but the edge of the board at the joint is likely to be scratched, and the resulting joint uneven.

The boards when lined should be laid about or stood up to dry, and when dry, cut to the proper and exact size for the book. As a fact, the black boards now sold are much too new or green to be used direct by the binder, they should be stocked for some months.

The boards, once lined, should be placed around or stood up to dry, and when they are dry, cut to the right size for the book. In fact, the black boards currently sold are often too fresh or green to be used directly by the binder; they should be stored for a few months.

The requisite width is obtained by extending the compass from the back of the book to the edge of the smallest bolt or fold in the foredge. It is advisable not to measure less than this point, but to leave a leaf or two in order to show that the book is not cut down. The compasses being fixed by means of the side screw, the boards are to be knocked up even, compassed up, and placed in the lying press, in which they are cut, using, as before, the “cut-against,” and placing the runner exactly to the compass holes. When cut they are to be tested by turning one round and putting them together again; if they are the least out of truth it will be apparent at once. The head or top of the boards is next to be cut by placing a square against the back and marking the head or top with a bodkin or point of a knife. The boards being quite straight are again put into the press and cut, and when taken out should be again proved by reversing them as before, and if not true they must be recut. The length is now taken from the head of the book to the tail, and in this some judgment must be used. If the book has already been cut the measure must be somewhat larger than the book, allowing only such an amount of paper to be cut off as will make the edge smooth. If, however, the book is to |57| be entirely uncut, the size of the book is measured, and in addition the portion called squares must be added.

The necessary width is obtained by extending the compass from the back of the book to the edge of the smallest bolt or fold on the foredge. It’s best not to measure less than this point, but to leave a leaf or two to show that the book hasn’t been cut down. Once the compasses are fixed using the side screw, the boards should be brought together evenly, compassed up, and placed in the lying press, where they are cut, using the “cut-against” method, and positioning the runner exactly to the compass holes. After cutting, they should be tested by turning one board around and putting them back together; if they’re even slightly off, it will be noticeable immediately. The head or top of the boards is then cut by placing a square against the back and marking the head or top with a bodkin or knife point. Once the boards are perfectly straight, they go back into the press to be cut again, and after being taken out, should be checked again by flipping them, and if they’re not straight, they need to be recut. The length is now measured from the head of the book to the tail, requiring a bit of judgment. If the book has already been cut, the measurement should be slightly larger than the book, allowing just enough paper to be cut off to smooth the edge. If, however, the book is to be completely uncut, the size of the book is measured, and additionally, the portion known as squares must be added.

When a book has not been cut, the amount that is to be cut off the head will give the head or top square, and the book being measured from the head, another square or projection must be added to it, and the compass set to one of the shortest leaves in the book. Bearing in mind the article on trimming, enough of the book only should be cut to give the edge solidity for either gilding or marbling. A few leaves should always be left not cut with the plough, to show that the book has not been cut down. These few leaves are called proof, and are always a mark of careful work.

When a book hasn’t been trimmed, the amount cut off the top will create a flat edge, and when measuring from the top, another flat edge or overhang needs to be added. The compass should be set to one of the shortest pages in the book. Remember the section on trimming; only enough of the book should be cut to ensure the edge is solid enough for gilding or marbling. A few pages should always remain untrimmed to show that the book hasn’t been fully cut down. These untrimmed pages are called proof, and they indicate careful craftsmanship.

About twenty years ago it was the mode to square the foredge of the boards, then lace or draw them in, and to cut the head and tail of the boards and book together, then to turn up and cut the foredge of the book.

About twenty years ago, it was trendy to square the edges of the covers, then lace or draw them in, and to trim the top and bottom of the covers and the book together, then to lift and cut the foredge of the book.

CHAPTER XIV. Pulling In AND Pushing.

The boards having been squared, they are to be attached to the book by lacing the ends of the cord through holes made in the board. The boards are to be laid on the book with their backs in the groove and level with the head; they must then be marked either with a lead pencil or the point of a bodkin exactly in a line with the slips, about half an inch down the board. On a piece of wood the mill-board is placed, and holes are pierced by hammering a short bodkin through on the line made, at a distance from the edge in accordance with the size of the book. About half an inch away from the back is the right distance for an |58| octavo. The board is then to be turned over, and a second hole made about half an inch away from the first ones. The boards having been holed, the slips must be scraped, pasted slightly, and tapered or pointed. Draw them tightly through the hole first made and back through the second. Tap them slightly when the board is down to prevent them from slipping and getting loose. When the cords are drawn through, cut the ends close to the board with a knife, and well hammer them down on the knocking-down iron to make the board close on the slips and hold them tight. The slips should be well and carefully hammered, as any projection will be seen with great distinctness when the book is covered. The hammer must be held perfectly even, for the slips will be cut by the edge of it if used carelessly.

The boards, once squared, need to be attached to the book by threading the ends of the cord through holes made in the board. The boards should be positioned on the book with their backs in the groove and level with the top; they must then be marked either with a pencil or the point of a sharp tool, exactly in line with the slips, about half an inch down the board. A piece of wood is used to place the mill-board, and holes are made by hammering a short tool through along the marked line, at a distance from the edge based on the size of the book. About half an inch away from the back is the correct distance for an octavo. Then, flip the board over and make a second hole about half an inch away from the first one. After the boards have been holed, the slips need to be scraped, lightly pasted, and tapered or pointed. Pull them tightly through the first hole and back through the second. Tap them gently when the board is down to stop them from slipping and getting loose. Once the cords are drawn through, cut the ends close to the board with a knife, and hammer them down on the knocking-down iron to ensure the board closes on the slips and holds them tight. The slips should be carefully hammered, as any bump will be easily noticeable once the book is covered. The hammer must be held perfectly straight, as the slips will be cut by its edge if used carelessly.

The book is now to be examined, and any little alteration may be made before putting it into the standing press. With all books, a tin should be placed between the mill-board and book, to flatten the slips, and prevent their adherence. The tin is placed right up to the groove, and serves also as a guide for the pressing board. Pressing boards, the same size as the book, should be put flush with the groove, using the pressing tin as guide, and the book or books placed in the centre of the press directly under the screw, which is to be tightened as much as possible. In pressing books of various sizes, the largest book must always be put at the bottom of the press, with a block or a few pressing boards between the various sizes, in order to get equal pressure on the whole, and to allow the screw to come exactly on the centre of the books.

The book is now ready for examination, and any small changes can be made before placing it in the press. For all books, a tin should be placed between the millboard and the book to smooth out the slips and prevent them from sticking. The tin goes right up to the groove and also acts as a guide for the pressing board. Pressing boards, which should be the same size as the book, need to be aligned with the groove, using the pressing tin as a guide, and the book or books should be centered in the press directly under the screw, which should be tightened as much as possible. When pressing books of different sizes, the largest book should always be at the bottom of the press, with a block or a few pressing boards between the different sizes to ensure even pressure across all of them and to allow the screw to be positioned directly over the center of the books.

The backs of the books are now to be pasted, and allowed to stand for a few minutes to soften the glue. Then with a piece of wood or iron, called a cleaning-off stick (wood is preferable), the glue is rubbed off, and the backs are well rubbed with a handful of shavings and left to dry. Leave them as long as possible in the press, and if the volume is |59| rather a thick one a coat of paste or thin glue should be applied to the back. Paste is preferable.

The backs of the books should now be glued and left to sit for a few minutes to let the glue soften. Then, using a piece of wood or metal called a cleaning-off stick (wood is better), the glue is wiped away, and the backs are thoroughly rubbed with a handful of shavings before being left to dry. Keep them in the press for as long as possible, and if the book is on the thicker side, apply a coat of paste or thin glue to the back. Paste is the better choice.

If the book is very thick a piece of thin calico may be pasted to the back and allowed to dry, the surplus being taken away afterwards.

If the book is really thick, you can glue a piece of thin calico to the back and let it dry, trimming off the excess afterward.

In flexible work care must be taken that the cleaning-off stick is not forced too hard against the bands, or the thread being moist will break, or the paper being wet will tear, or the bands may become shifted. The cleaning-off stick may be made of any piece of wood; an old octavo cutting board is as good as anything else, but a good workman will always have one suitable and at hand when required for use.

In flexible work, it's important not to press the cleaning stick too hard against the bands, or the moist thread might break, the wet paper could tear, or the bands might shift. The cleaning stick can be made from any piece of wood; an old octavo cutting board works just fine, but a skilled worker will always have a suitable one ready for use when needed.

When the volumes have been pressed enough (a day’s pressing is none too much) they are to be taken out, and the tins and pressing boards put away. The book is then ready for cutting. Of the numerous presses, excepting the hydraulic, Gregory’s Patent Compound Action Screw Press is to my mind the best, and I believe it to be one of the most powerful presses yet invented; sixty tons pressure can be obtained by it.

When the volumes have been pressed enough (a day's pressing is just about right), they should be taken out, and the tins and pressing boards stored away. The book is then ready for cutting. Of all the presses, except for the hydraulic one, Gregory's Patent Compound Action Screw Press is, in my opinion, the best, and I believe it's one of the most powerful presses ever invented; it can provide sixty tons of pressure.

CHAPTER XV. CUTTING.

In olden times, when our present work-tools did not exist and material aids were scarce, a sharp knife and straight edge formed the only implements used in cutting. Now we have the plough and cutting machine, which have superseded the knife and straight edge; and the cutting machine is now fast doing away with the plough. There are very few shops at the present moment where a cutting |60| machine is not in use, in fact I may say that, without speaking only of cloth books, for they must always be cut by machinery owing to the price not allowing them to be done otherwise, there are very few books, not even excepting extra books, that have escaped the cutting machine.

In the past, when the tools we use today didn't exist and materials were hard to come by, a sharp knife and straight edge were the only tools for cutting. Now we have the plow and cutting machine, which have replaced the knife and straight edge; and the cutting machine is increasingly taking the place of the plow. There are very few shops today that don't use a cutting machine; in fact, I can say that, aside from cloth books—which must always be cut by machines because the costs don't allow for anything else—very few books, including specialty books, have avoided the cutting machine.

Cutting Press and Plough.
Sliding Knife.

All cutting “presses” are used in the same way. The plough running over the press, its left cheek running between two guides fastened on the left cheek of the press. By turning the screw of the plough the right cheek is advanced towards the left; the knife fixed on the right of the plough is advanced, and with the point cuts gradually through the boards or paper secured in the press, as already described in preparing the boards. There are two kinds of ploughs in use—in one the knife is bolted, in the other the knife slides in a dovetail groove—termed respectively |61| “bolt knife” and “slide knife.” The forwarder will find that the latter is preferable, on account of its facility of action, as any length of knife can be exposed for cutting. But with a bolt knife, being fastened to the shoe of the plough, it is necessarily a fixture, and must be worn down by cutting or squaring mill-boards, or such work, before it can be used with the truth necessary for paper.

All cutting “presses” work the same way. The plough moves over the press, its left side running between two guides attached to the left side of the press. By turning the screw of the plough, the right side moves toward the left; the knife attached to the right of the plough moves forward and gradually cuts through the boards or paper held in the press, as previously explained in preparing the boards. There are two types of ploughs in use—one has a bolted knife, and the other has a knife that slides in a dovetail groove—referred to as the “bolt knife” and “slide knife.” The operator will find that the latter is better because it’s easier to use, allowing any length of the knife to be exposed for cutting. But with a bolt knife, since it’s attached to the shoe of the plough, it’s fixed in place and must be worn down by cutting or squaring millboards or similar tasks before it can be used accurately for paper.

Bolt Knife.

To cut a book properly it must be quite straight, and the knife must be sharp and perfectly true. Having this in mind, the book may be cut by placing the front board the requisite distance from the head that is to be cut off. A piece of thin mill-board or trindle is put between the hind board and book, so that the knife when through the book may not cut the board. The book is now to be lowered into the cutting press, with the back towards the workman, until the front board is exactly on a level with the press. The head of the book is now horizontal with the press, and the amount to be cut off exposed above it. Both sides should be looked to, as the book is very liable to get a twist in being put in the press. When it is quite square the press is to be screwed up tightly and evenly. Each end should be screwed up to exactly the same tightness, for if one end is loose the paper will be jagged or torn instead of being cut cleanly.

To cut a book properly, it needs to be completely straight, and the knife must be sharp and perfectly aligned. Keeping this in mind, you can cut the book by positioning the front cover at the required distance from the top that you want to trim. A piece of thin millboard or trindle is placed between the back cover and the book, so the knife doesn't slice through the board. Now, lower the book into the cutting press with the spine facing the worker until the front cover is level with the press. The top of the book should be horizontal with the press, and the portion to be cut off will be sticking out above it. You should check both sides since the book can easily get twisted when placed in the press. When it's perfectly square, tighten the press evenly and securely. Make sure each end is tightened to the same degree; if one end is loose, the paper will end up jagged or torn instead of being cut smoothly.

The book is cut by drawing the plough gently to and fro; each time it is brought towards the workman a slight amount of turn is given to the screw of the plough. If too much turn is given to the screw, the knife will bite too deeply into the paper and will tear instead of cutting it. If the knife has not been properly sharpened, or has a burr |62| upon its edge, it will be certain to cause ridges on the paper. The top edge being cut, the book is taken out of the press and the tail cut. A mark is made on the top of the hind or back board just double the size of the square, and the board is lowered until the mark is on a level with the cut top. The book is again put into the press, with the back towards the workman, until the board is flush with the cheek of the press; this will expose above the press the amount to be taken off from the tail, as before described, and the left hand board will be, if put level with the cut top, exactly the same distance above the press as the right band board is below the cut top. The tail is cut in the same way as the top edge.

The book is trimmed by moving the plough gently back and forth; each time it's brought towards the worker, a slight turn is given to the screw of the plough. If the screw is turned too much, the knife will dig too deeply into the paper and will tear instead of cutting it. If the knife isn’t sharpened properly or has a burr |62| on its edge, it will definitely create ridges on the paper. Once the top edge is cut, the book is taken out of the press and the tail is cut. A mark is made on the top of the back board that’s double the size of the square, and the board is lowered until the mark is level with the cut top. The book is then placed back into the press, with the back facing the worker, until the board is flush with the side of the press; this will reveal above the press how much needs to be taken off from the tail, as previously described, and if the left-hand board is aligned with the cut top, it will be exactly the same distance above the press as the right-hand board is below the cut top. The tail is cut the same way as the top edge.

To cut a book properly requires great care. It will be of great importance to acquire a methodical exactness in working the different branches, cutting especially. Always lay a book down one way and take it up another, and in cutting always work with the back of the book towards you, and cut from you. Give the turn to the screw of the plough as it is thrust from you, or you will pull away a part of the back instead of cutting it.

To cut a book properly takes a lot of care. It's really important to develop a precise method for handling the different tasks, especially cutting. Always place a book down in one direction and pick it up from another, and when you cut, always have the back of the book facing you and cut away from yourself. Turn the screw of the plough as you push it away from you, or you might accidentally pull away part of the back instead of cutting it.

Section of Book and Press, book partly cut.

In cutting the foredge, to which we must now come, always have the head of the book towards you, so that if not cut straight you know exactly where the fault lies. The foredge is marked both back and front of the book by placing a cutting board under the first two or three leaves as a support; the mill-board is then pressed firmly into the groove and a line is drawn or a hole is pierced head and tail, the foredge of the board being used as a guide. The book is now knocked with its back on the press quite flat, and trindles (flat pieces of steel in the shape of an elongated U, about 11 ⁄ 2 inch wide and 3 or 4 inches long, with a slot nearly the whole length) are placed between the boards and book by letting the boards fall back from the book and then passing one trindle at the head, the other at |63| tail, allowing the top and bottom slip to go in the grooves of the trindles. The object of this is to force the back up quite flat, and by holding the book when the cut-against and runner is on it, supported by the other hand under the boards, it can be at once seen if the book is straight or not. The cut-against must be put quite flush with the holes on the left of the book, and the runner the distance under the holes that the amount of square is intended to be. The book being lowered into the press, the runner is put flush with the cheek of the press and the cut-against just the same distance above the press as the runner is below the holes. The trindles must be taken out from the book when |64| the cutting boards are in their proper place, and the mill-boards will then fall down. The book and cutting boards must be held very tightly or they will slip and, if the book has been lowered into the press accurately, everything will be quite square. The press must now be screwed up tightly, and the foredge ploughed; when the book is taken out of the press it will resume its original rounding, the foredge will have the same curve as the back, and if cut truly there will be a proper square all round the edges. This method is known as “cutting in boards.”

In cutting the foredge, which we’ll discuss now, always keep the head of the book facing you, so if it’s not cut straight, you know exactly where the mistake is. The foredge is marked on both the front and back of the book by placing a cutting board under the first two or three leaves for support; then, the mill-board is pressed firmly into the groove, and a line is drawn or a hole is pierced at the head and tail, using the foredge of the board as a guide. The book is then placed flat on the press, and trindles (flat steel pieces shaped like an elongated U, about 1/2 inch wide and 3 or 4 inches long, with a slot nearly the whole length) are placed between the boards and the book by letting the boards fall back from the book and then inserting one trindle at the head and the other at |63| the tail, allowing the top and bottom slips to go into the grooves of the trindles. The purpose of this is to force the back to lie completely flat, and by holding the book while the cut-against and runner are on it, supported by the other hand under the boards, you can immediately see if the book is straight or not. The cut-against must be flush with the holes on the left side of the book, and the runner should be placed the same distance below the holes as the amount of square you want. When the book is lowered into the press, the runner should be flush with the cheek of the press, and the cut-against should be at the same distance above the press as the runner is below the holes. The trindles must be removed from the book once |64| the cutting boards are properly positioned, allowing the mill-boards to fall down. The book and cutting boards must be held tightly; otherwise, they will slip. If the book has been lowered into the press accurately, everything will be perfectly square. The press must now be screwed tightly, and the foredge ploughed; when the book is taken out of the press, it will return to its original rounded shape, the foredge will have the same curve as the back, and if cut correctly, there will be a proper square all around the edges. This method is called “cutting in boards.”

If the amateur or workman has a set of some good work which he wishes to bind uniformly, but which has already been cut to different sizes, and he does not wish to cut the large ones down to the smaller size, he must not draw the small ones in, as he may possibly not be able to pull the boards down the required depth to cut the book, but he must leave the boards loose, cut the head and tail, then draw the boards in, and turn up and cut the foredge.

If a hobbyist or craftsman has a collection of quality work that he wants to bind uniformly but they’re currently different sizes, and he doesn't want to cut the larger pieces down to the smaller size, he shouldn’t push the smaller ones in. He might not be able to pull the boards down deep enough to cut the book. Instead, he should keep the boards loose, cut the top and bottom, then pull the boards in and trim the foredge.

“Cutting out of boards” is by a different method. The foredge is cut before gluing up, if for casing, taking the size from the case, from the back to the edge of the board in the foredge. The book is then glued up, rounded, and put into the press for half an hour, just to set it. The size is again taken from the case, allowing for squares head and tail. The book having been marked is cut, and then backed. Cloth cases are made for most periodicals, and may be procured from their publishers at a trifling cost, which varies according to the size of the book and the amount of blocking that is upon them.

“Cutting out of boards” is done using a different method. The foredge is trimmed before gluing, if it's for a casing, with the size taken from the case, from the back to the edge of the board on the foredge. The book is then glued, rounded, and placed in the press for half an hour, just to set. The size is measured again from the case, allowing for squares at the head and tail. After marking the book, it is cut and then backed. Cloth cases are made for most periodicals and can be obtained from their publishers at a minimal cost, which varies based on the book's size and the amount of blocking on them.

This method of cutting out of boards is adopted in many of the cheap shops (even leather shops). It is a method, however, not to be commended.

This way of cutting from boards is used in many budget shops (including leather shops). However, it's not a method worth recommending.

To test if the book be cut true it is only necessary to turn the top leaf back level to the back of the book and |65| even at the head; if it be the slightest bit untrue it will at once be seen.

To check if the book is cut accurately, just flip the top page back so it's even with the back of the book and level at the top; if it's even slightly off, you’ll notice right away. |65|

Cutting Machine.

A few words about the various cutting machines that are in the market. Each maker professes his machine the best. In some the knife moves with a diagonal motion, in others with a horizontal motion.

A few words about the different cutting machines available in the market. Each manufacturer claims their machine is the best. In some, the blade moves diagonally, while in others, it moves horizontally.

The principle of all these machines is the same: the books are placed to a gauge, the top is lowered and clamps |66| the book, and, on the machine being started, the knife descends and cuts through the paper.

The principle behind all these machines is the same: the books are positioned according to a gauge, the top is lowered and clamps down on the book, and, once the machine is activated, the knife comes down and cuts through the paper.

Registered Cutting Machine.

Another machine by Harrild and Son, called a registered cutting machine, is here illustrated. Its operation is on the same principle as a lying press, the difference being, that this has a table upon which the work is placed; a gauge is placed at the back so that the work may be placed against it for accuracy, the top beam is then screwed down and the paper ploughed. A great amount of work may be accomplished with this machine, and to anyone that cannot afford an ordinary cutting machine this will be found invaluable.

Another machine by Harrild and Son, called a registered cutting machine, is shown here. It operates on the same principle as a lying press, but the difference is that it has a table where the work is placed. A gauge is situated at the back so that the work can be aligned against it for accuracy. The top beam is then screwed down, and the paper is ploughed. This machine can accomplish a great deal of work, and for anyone who can't afford a standard cutting machine, this will be incredibly useful.

CHAPTER XVI. Coloring the Edges.

The edges of every book must be in keeping with the binding. A half roan book should not have an expensive edge, neither a whole bound morocco book a sprinkled edge. Still, no rule has been laid down in this particular, and taste should regulate this as it must in other branches. The taste of the public is so changeable that it is impossible to lay down any rule, and I leave my reader to his own discretion.

The edges of every book should match the binding. A half-roan book shouldn't have a fancy edge, just like a fully bound morocco book shouldn't have a decorative edge. However, there are no strict guidelines for this, and personal taste should dictate it just like in other areas. Since public taste changes so quickly, it's impossible to set any firm rules, so I’ll leave it up to the reader's own judgment.

Here are various ways in which the edges may be coloured.

Here are several ways to color the edges.

Sprinkled Edges.—Most shops have a colour always ready, usually a reddish brown, which they use for the whole of their sprinkled edge books. The colour can be purchased at any oil shop. A mixture of burnt umber and red ochre is generally used. The two powders must be well mixed together in a mortar with paste, a few drops of sweet oil, and water. The colour may be tested by sprinkling some on a piece of white paper, allowing it to dry, and then burnishing it. If the colour powders or rubs, it is either too thick, or has not enough paste in it. If the former, some water must be added; if the latter, more paste: and it will perhaps be better if the whole is passed through a cloth to rid it of any coarse particles. The books may be sprinkled so as to resemble a kind of marble by using two or three different colours. For instance, the book is put in the lying press and a little sand is strewn upon the edge in small mounds. Then with a green colour a moderate |68| sprinkle is given. After allowing it to dry, more sand is put on in various places, a dark sprinkle of brown is put on, and the whole allowed to dry. When the sand is shaken off, the edge will be white where the first sand was dropped, green where the second, and the rest brown.

Sprinkled Edges.—Most shops always have a color ready, usually a reddish-brown, that they use for all their sprinkled edge books. You can buy the color at any paint store. A mixture of burnt umber and red ochre is typically used. The two powders should be thoroughly mixed together in a mortar with paste, a few drops of sweet oil, and water. To test the color, sprinkle some on a piece of white paper, let it dry, and then burnish it. If the color powders or rub off, it's either too thick or not enough paste is added. If it's too thick, add some water; if it doesn’t have enough paste, add more. It might be better to pass the mixture through a cloth to remove any coarse particles. The books can be sprinkled to resemble marble by using two or three different colors. For example, the book is placed in the lying press, and a little sand is sprinkled on the edge in small mounds. Then with a green color, a moderate sprinkle is applied. After it dries, more sand is added in different spots, a dark sprinkle of brown is applied, and the whole thing is allowed to dry. When the sand is shaken off, the edge will be white where the first sand was placed, green where the second was added, and the remaining will be brown.

A colour of two shades may be made by using sand, then a moderately dark brown sprinkled, then more sand, and lastly a deeper shade of same colour.

A color with two shades can be created by layering sand, then adding a medium dark brown, followed by more sand, and finally a darker shade of the same color.

Sprinkling Brush and Sieve.

There are a few of the “Old Binders” who still use what is called the “finger brush,” a small brush about the size of a shaving brush, made of stiff bristles cut squarely. They dip it into the colour, and then by drawing the finger across it jerk the colour over the edge. Another method is to use a larger brush, which being dipped in the colour is beaten on a stick or press-pin until the desired amount of sprinkle is obtained. But the best plan is to use a nail brush and a common wire cinder sifter. Dip the brush in the colour and rub it in a circular direction over the cinder sifter. This mode has the satisfactory result of doing the work quicker, finer, and more uniformly. The head, foredge and tail must be of exactly the same shade, and one end must not have more sprinkle on it than the other, and a set of books should have their edges precisely alike in tone and colour.

There are a few of the “Old Binders” who still use something called the “finger brush,” a small brush about the size of a shaving brush, made with stiff bristles cut straight across. They dip it in color, and by drawing their finger across it, they fling the color over the edge. Another method is to use a larger brush, which, after being dipped in color, is tapped on a stick or press-pin until the right amount of sprinkle is achieved. However, the best approach is to use a nail brush and a standard wire cinder sifter. Dip the brush in the color and rub it in a circular motion over the cinder sifter. This method effectively speeds up the work and delivers a finer, more uniform result. The head, foredge, and tail must all be exactly the same shade, with no end having more sprinkle than the other, and a set of books should have their edges matching perfectly in tone and color.

Colours for Sprinkling.—To give an account of how the various colours are made that were formerly used would be only waste of time, as so many dyes and colours that |69| answer all purposes may be purchased ready for instant use. I may with safety recommend Judson’s dyes diluted with water.

Colors for Sprinkling.—Explaining how the different colors were made in the past would just be a waste of time since there are so many dyes and colors available for purchase that serve all purposes and are ready for use. I can confidently recommend Judson’s dyes diluted with water.

Plain Colouring.—The colour having been well ground is to be mixed with paste and a little oil, or what is perhaps better, glaire and oil. Then with a sponge or with a brush colour the whole of the edge. In colouring the foredge the book should be drawn back so as to form a slope of the edge, so that when the book is opened a certain amount of colour will still be seen. It is often necessary to give the edges two coats of colour, but the first must be quite dry before the second is applied.

Plain Colouring.—Once the color is finely ground, mix it with paste and a bit of oil, or even better, egg white and oil. Then, using a sponge or a brush, apply the color to the entire edge. When coloring the foredge, tilt the book back to create a sloped edge, so that a portion of the color is still visible when the book is opened. It’s often necessary to apply two coats of color to the edges, but make sure the first coat is completely dry before applying the second.

A very good effect may be produced by first colouring the edge yellow, and when dry, after throwing on rice, seeds, pieces of thread, fern leaves, or anything else according to fancy, then sprinkling with some other dark colour. For this class of work body sprinkling colour should always be used. It may be varied in many different ways.

A really good effect can be achieved by first painting the edge yellow, and once it’s dry, adding rice, seeds, bits of thread, fern leaves, or anything else you like, then sprinkling it with a darker color. For this type of work, you should always use body-sprinkling color. It can be varied in many different ways.

Marbled Edges.—The edges of marbled books should in almost every instance correspond with their marbled ends.

Marbled Edges.—The edges of marbled books should, in almost every case, match their marbled ends.

In London very few binders marble their own work, but send it out of the house to the Marblers, who do nothing else but make marbled edges and paper. One cannot do better than send one’s books to be marbled; it will cost only a few pence, which will be well spent in avoiding the trouble and dirt that marbling occasions; nevertheless I will endeavour to explain; it is, however, a process that may seem very easy, but is very difficult to execute properly.

In London, not many binders marble their own work; instead, they send it out to the Marblers, who focus solely on creating marbled edges and paper. It’s best to have your books sent out for marbling; it only costs a few pence, which is worth it to avoid the hassle and mess that comes with marbling. Still, I will try to explain it; it might seem simple, but it’s actually quite tricky to do well.

The requisites are a long square wooden or zinc trough about 2 inches deep to hold the size for the colours to float on; the dimensions to be regulated by the work to be done. About 16 to 20 inches long and 6 to 8 inches wide will probably be large enough. Various colours are used, such as lake, rose, vermilion, king’s yellow, yellow ochre, |70| Prussian blue, indigo, some green, flake white, and lamp black. The brushes for the various colours should be of moderate size, and each pot of colour must have its own brush. Small stone jars are convenient for the colours, and a slab of marble and muller to grind them must be provided. The combs may be made with pieces of brass wire about two inches long, inserted into a piece of wood; several of these will be required with the teeth at different distances, according to the width of the pattern required to be produced. Several different sized burnishers, flat and round, will be required for giving a gloss to the work.

The essentials include a long square wooden or zinc trough about 2 inches deep to hold the size for the colors to float on; the size should be based on the work being done. About 16 to 20 inches long and 6 to 8 inches wide should be sufficient. Various colors are used, such as lake, rose, vermilion, king’s yellow, yellow ochre, |70| Prussian blue, indigo, some green, flake white, and lamp black. The brushes for the different colors should be of moderate size, and each color pot must have its own brush. Small stone jars are handy for the colors, and a slab of marble along with a muller to grind them is necessary. The combs can be made from pieces of brass wire about two inches long, inserted into a piece of wood; several of these will be needed with the teeth at varying distances, depending on the width of the pattern to be created. Several different sized burnishers, both flat and round, will be necessary to give a gloss to the work.

Marbling Trough.

The first process in marbling is the preparation of the size on which the colours are to be floated. This is a solution of gum tragacanth, or as it is commonly called, gum dragon. If the gum is placed over night in the quantity of water necessary it will generally be found dissolved by the morning. The quantity of gum necessary to give proper consistency to the size is simply to be learned by experience, and cannot be described; and the solution must always be filtered through muslin or a linen cloth before use.

The first step in marbling is preparing the size on which the colors will float. This is a solution of gum tragacanth, often referred to as gum dragon. If the gum is left overnight in the right amount of water, it will typically be dissolved by morning. The amount of gum needed to achieve the right consistency for the size is something you learn through experience and can't really be described; also, the solution must always be filtered through muslin or linen cloth before use.

The colours must be ground on the marble slab with a little water, as fine as possible; move the colour from time to time into the centre of the marble with a palette knife, and as the water evaporates add a little more. About one oz. of colour will suffice to grind at once, and it will take about two hours to do it properly.

The colors need to be ground on the marble slab with a little water, as finely as possible; occasionally move the pigment toward the center of the marble with a palette knife, and as the water evaporates, add a bit more. About one ounce of color is enough to grind at once, and it will take around two hours to do it right.

Having everything at hand and ready, with the size in |71| the trough, and water near, the top of the size is to be carefully taken off with a piece of wood the exact width of the trough, and the colour being well mixed with water and a few drops of ox gall, a little is taken in the brush, and a few very fine spots are thrown on.

Having everything prepared and within reach, with the size in |71| the trough, and water nearby, gently remove the top layer of the size using a piece of wood that matches the width of the trough. Ensure that the color is well mixed with water and a few drops of ox gall; then dip the brush into it and apply a few very fine spots.

If the colour does not spread out, but rather sinks down, a few more drops of gall must be carefully added and well mixed up. The top of the size must be taken off as before described, and the colour again thrown on.

If the color doesn't spread out but instead sinks down, a few more drops of gall should be added carefully and mixed well. The top of the size must be removed as previously described, and the color should be applied again.

If it does not then spread out, the ground or size is of too thick consistency, and some clean water must be added, and the whole well mixed.

If it doesn't spread out, the mixture is too thick, and you need to add some clean water and mix it all together well.

If the colour again thrown on spreads out, but looks rather greyish or spotty, then the colour is too thick, and a little water must be added, but very carefully, lest it be made too thin. If the colour still assumes a greyish appearance when thrown on, then the fault lies in the grinding, and it must be dried and again ground.

If the color you apply spreads out but looks kind of grayish or has spots, it means the paint is too thick, so you should add a little water, but be careful not to make it too watery. If the color still looks gray when applied, then the problem is with the grinding process, and you need to let it dry and grind it again.

When the colour, on being thrown on, spreads out in very large spots, the ground or size is too thin and a little thicker size should be added. Now, if the consistency or the amount of gum water be noticed, by always using the same quantity the marbler cannot fail to be right.

When the color is applied and spreads out in large patches, the base layer is too thin, and you should add a bit more thickness to it. Now, if you pay attention to the consistency or amount of gum water used, consistently using the same quantity will ensure that the marbler gets it right every time.

If the colours appear all right on the trough, and when taken off on a slip of paper adhere to it, the size and colours are in perfect working order.

If the colors look good on the trough, and when removed onto a slip of paper they stick to it, the size and colors are in perfect working order.

The top of the size must always be taken off with the piece of wood before commencing work, so that it be kept clean, and the colours must always be well shaken out of the brush into the pot before sprinkling, so that the spots may not be too large. The marbler must always be guided by the pattern he wishes to produce, and by a little thought he will get over many difficulties that appear of greater magnitude than they really are.

The top of the size should always be removed with the piece of wood before starting work to keep it clean, and the colors must always be shaken out of the brush into the pot before sprinkling, so the spots aren't too big. The marbler should always follow the pattern he wants to create, and with a little thought, he can overcome many challenges that seem bigger than they actually are.

Spot Marble.—The size is first to be sprinkled with a |72| dark colour, and this is always termed the “ground colour,” then the other colours; bearing in mind that the colour that has the most gall will spread or push the others away, and this colour should in spot marbling be put on last.

Spot Marble.—First, sprinkle the surface with a |72| dark color, which is known as the “ground color,” followed by the other colors. Remember that the color with the most intensity will spread and push the others away, so this color should be applied last in spot marbling.

With very little variation all the other kinds of marbling are done; but in every case where there are more books or sheets of paper to be done of the same pattern than the trough will take at once, the same order of colours must be kept, and the same proportion of each, or one book will be of one colour and the second entirely different.

With almost no changes, all the other types of marbling are completed; however, in every situation where there are more books or sheets of paper to be marbled in the same pattern than the trough can handle at one time, the same order of colors must be maintained, and the same amount of each must be used, or one book will be one color and the next one will be completely different.

Comb or Nonpareil Marble.—The colours are to be thrown on as before, but as fine as possible. Then if a piece of wood or wire be drawn backwards and forwards across the trough, the colours, through the disturbance of the size, will follow the motion of the stick. A comb is then to be drawn the whole length of the trough in a contrary direction. The wire in the comb will draw the colour, and thus will be produced what is termed comb or nonpareil marble.

Comb or Nonpareil Marble.—The colors should be applied as before, but as finely as possible. Then, if a piece of wood or wire is moved back and forth across the trough, the colors, disturbed by the size, will follow the motion of the stick. Next, a comb should be drawn the entire length of the trough in the opposite direction. The wire in the comb will pull the color, creating what is known as comb or nonpareil marble.

The size or width of the teeth of the comb will vary the size of the marble.

The size or width of the comb's teeth will change the size of the marble.

Spanish Marble.—The ground colour is to be thrown on rather heavily, the others lighter, and the wavy appearance is caused by gently drawing the paper in jerks over the marble, thus causing the colour to form small ripples.

Spanish Marble.—The base color should be applied quite heavily, with the other colors applied lighter. The wavy effect is created by gently moving the paper in quick motions over the marble, which makes the color form small ripples.

A few drops of turpentine put in the colours will give them a different effect, viz.,—causing the small white spots that appear on the shell marble.

A few drops of turpentine added to the paints will change their effect, specifically, creating the small white spots that appear on the shell marble.

There are various patterns, each being known by name: old Dutch, nonpareil, antique, curl, Spanish, shell. An apprentice would do well to go to some respectable shop and ask for a sheet or two of the various kinds mentioned, and as each pattern is given to him, write the name on the back, and always keep it as a pattern for future use and reference. |73|

There are different patterns, each known by name: old Dutch, nonpareil, antique, curl, Spanish, shell. An apprentice should visit a reputable shop and ask for a sheet or two of the various types mentioned. As he receives each pattern, he should write the name on the back and always keep it as a reference for future use. |73|

Edges are marbled, after making the desired pattern on the trough by holding the book firmly, pressing the edge on the colour and lifting it up sharply. The foredge must be made flat by knocking the book on its back, but the marbler had better tie his book between a pair of backing boards, so that it may not slip, especially with large books. Care must be taken with books that have many plates, or if the paper is at all of a spongy nature or unsized. If a little cold water be thrown on the edges it will cause the colours to set better. In marbling writing paper, a sponge with a little alum water should be used to take off the gloss or shine from the edge, occasioned by the cutting knife, and to assist the marbling colour to take better.

Edges are marbled after creating the desired pattern on the trough by holding the book firmly, pressing the edge into the color, and lifting it up quickly. The foredge needs to be made flat by tapping the book on its back, but it’s better for the marbler to tie the book between a pair of backing boards to prevent it from slipping, especially with larger books. Care should be taken with books that have many plates or if the paper is somewhat spongy or unsized. If a little cold water is splashed on the edges, it will help the colors set better. When marbling writing paper, a sponge with some alum water should be used to remove the gloss or shine from the edge caused by the cutting knife, and to help the marbling color adhere better.

Paper is marbled in the same way by holding it at two corners; then gently putting it on the colour and pressing it evenly, but gently all over, so that the colour may take on every part. It must be lifted carefully, as the least shake by disturbing the size will spoil the regularity of the pattern. Paper should be damped over night and left with a weight on the top. When the paper has been marbled and is dry, a rag with a little bee’s wax or soap should be rubbed over it, so that the burnisher may not stick, and may give a finer gloss; this applies also to the edges in burnishing. Marble paper manufacturers burnish the paper with a piece of polished flint or glass fixed in a long pole working in a socket at the top, the other end resting on a table which is slightly hollowed, so that the segment of the circle which the flint takes is exactly that of the hollow table. The paper is laid on the hollow table, and the burnisher is worked backwards and forwards until the desired gloss is attained. By the best and latest method, the paper is passed between highly polished cylinders. It is more expensive, on account of the cost of the machinery, but insures superior effect.

Paper is marbled in the same way by holding it at two corners, then gently placing it on the color and pressing it evenly but softly all over, so the color can cover every part. It must be lifted carefully, as even the slightest shake can mess up the regularity of the pattern. The paper should be dampened overnight and placed under a weight on top. Once the paper has been marbled and is dry, a cloth with a little beeswax or soap should be rubbed on it, so the burnisher doesn’t stick and can provide a better gloss; this also applies to the edges when burnishing. Marble paper manufacturers burnish the paper with a polished piece of flint or glass attached to a long pole that moves in a socket at the top, with the other end resting on a slightly hollowed table, ensuring that the circular motion of the flint matches the shape of the hollow table. The paper is laid on the hollow table, and the burnisher is moved back and forth until the desired gloss is achieved. The best and latest method involves passing the paper between highly polished cylinders. This is more costly due to the machinery, but it guarantees a superior result.

A great deal of paper is now being made by means of a |74| mechanical process. It has a very high gloss; it is used on very cheap work.

A lot of paper is now being produced through a |74| mechanical process. It has a high gloss finish and is used for low-cost projects.

Sizing.—Paper should be always sized after being marbled. The size is made by dissolving one pound of best glue in five gallons of water with half a pound of best white soap. This is put into a copper over night, and on a low fire the next morning, keeping it constantly stirred to prevent burning. When quite dissolved and hot it is passed through a cloth into a trough, and each sheet passed through the liquor and hung up to dry; when dry, burnish as above.

Sizing.—Paper should always be sized after it’s been marbled. The size is made by dissolving one pound of high-quality glue in five gallons of water with half a pound of high-quality white soap. This mixture is placed in a copper container overnight, and the next morning, heated gently over a low fire, stirring constantly to prevent burning. Once fully dissolved and hot, it is strained through a cloth into a trough, and each sheet is dipped into the solution and hung up to dry; once dry, burnish as mentioned above.

But it will be far cheaper to buy the paper, rather than make it at the cost of more time than will be profitable. The charge for demy size is at the rate of 20s. to 95s. per ream, according to the quality and colour; but to those to whom money is no object, and who would prefer to make their own marbled paper, I hope the foregoing explanation will be explicit enough.

But it will be much cheaper to buy the paper instead of making it, which would take more time than it's worth. The price for demy size is between 20s. and 95s. per ream, depending on the quality and color; however, for those who aren't concerned about the cost and would rather create their own marbled paper, I hope the previous explanation is clear enough.

The “English Mechanic,” March 17th, 1871, has the following method of transferring the pattern from ordinary marble paper to the edges of books:—

The "English Mechanic," March 17th, 1871, has the following method for transferring the pattern from regular marble paper to the edges of books:—

“Ring the book up tightly in the press, the edge to be as flat as possible; cut strips of the best marble paper about one inch longer than the edge, make a pad of old paper larger than the edge of the book, and about a quarter inch thick; then get a piece of blotting paper and a sponge with a little water in; now pour on a plate sufficient spirits of salts (muriatic acid) to saturate the paper, which must be placed marble side downwards on the spirit (not dipped in it); when soaked put it on the edge (which has been previously damped with a sponge), lay your blot paper on it, then your pad, now rap it smartly all over, take off the pad and blot, and look if the work is right, if so, take the book out and shake the marble paper off; when dry burnish.”

“Press the book firmly in the press, making sure the edges are as flat as possible. Cut strips of high-quality marble paper about one inch longer than the edges, and create a pad of old paper that is larger than the book’s edges and about a quarter inch thick. Next, get a piece of blotting paper and a sponge with a little water. Pour enough muriatic acid onto a plate to soak the paper, which should be placed with the marble side down on the acid (not submerged in it). Once soaked, put it on the edge (which you've already dampened with the sponge), then place your blotting paper on top, followed by your pad. Now, gently tap it all over, remove the pad and blotting paper, and check if everything looks right. If it does, take the book out and shake off the marble paper; once dry, burnish it.”

At a lecture delivered at the Society of Arts, January, |75| 1878, by Mr. Woolnough, a practical marbler, the whole process of marbling was explained. Mr. Woolnough has since published an enlarged treatise on marbling,6 and one that should command the attention of the trade. A copy of the Society’s journal can be had, describing the process, No. 1,314, vol. XXVI., and will be of great service to any reader, but his work is more exhaustive.

At a lecture given at the Society of Arts in January 1878, Mr. Woolnough, a skilled marbler, explained the entire marbling process. Mr. Woolnough has since published a larger book on marbling, 6, which should grab the attention of the industry. A copy of the Society’s journal is available, detailing the process in No. 1,314, vol. XXVI., and it will be very helpful for any reader, but his book is much more comprehensive.

[6] George Bell and Sons, York Street, Covent Garden.
Leo’s Mechanical Marblers.
Leo’s Mechanical Marblers.

A transfer marble paper may now be had, and from examples sent me the process seems fairly workable. The following is the method of working sent by the importers of the paper:—

A transfer marble paper is now available, and based on the examples sent to me, the process seems quite workable. Here’s the method for using it provided by the importers of the paper:—

“Place the book in the press. The book edge which is to be marbled has to be rubbed with pure spirits of wine; the dry strip of transfer marble is then to be put on the edge. The white back or reverse side, whilst being pressed hard against the book edge, is to be moistened carefully with boiling water, by dabbing a saturated sponge on it; this dabbing process to be continued so long till the colour will show through the white back—a proof that it is loosened from the paper. Then remove the white paper, and let the edge dry slowly. When quite dry burnish.”

“Put the book in the press. The edge of the book that you want to marble needs to be rubbed with pure alcohol; then, place a dry strip of transfer marble on the edge. While pressing hard against the book edge, carefully moisten the white back or reverse side with boiling water by dabbing it with a soaked sponge; keep dabbing until the color shows through the white back—this indicates that it has loosened from the paper. Next, remove the white paper and let the edge dry slowly. Once it's completely dry, burnish it.”

Another invention is to marble the edges by means of one or more rollers. The top roller or rollers holds the colour, which is distributed on the under rollers; these, in turn, ink the edge on being passed over it. The books are naturally held in the press whilst this is being done. |76|

Another invention is to marble the edges using one or more rollers. The top roller or rollers hold the color, which is spread onto the under rollers; these, in turn, apply the ink to the edge as they pass over it. The books are naturally held in the press while this is happening. |76|

From a book, the “School of Arts,” third edition, 1750, which has a chapter on marbling, the following, with cut, is taken:—

From a book, the “School of Arts,” third edition, 1750, which has a chapter on marbling, the following, with cut, is taken:—

“When thus you have your colours and all things in good order, then take a pencil, or the end of a feather, and sprinkle or put first your red colour; then the blue, yellow, green, etc. Begin your red from No. 1, and go along your trough to No. 2, also the blue from No. 3, all along to No. 4; the yellow and green put here and there in the vacant places. Then with a bodkin or a small skewer draw a sort of a serpentine figure through the colours, beginning from No. 1 to No. 2; when this is done, then take your comb and draw the same straight along from |77| No. 1 to No. 2. If you have some turnings or snail work on your paper, then with a bodkin give the colours what turns you please. (See the plate.)

“When you have your colors and everything set up nicely, take a pencil or the end of a feather, and first sprinkle or apply your red color; then the blue, yellow, green, etc. Start your red at No. 1 and move along your trough to No. 2, and do the same with blue from No. 3 all the way to No. 4; place the yellow and green in the empty spots here and there. Then, using a bodkin or a small skewer, draw a wavy line through the colors, starting from No. 1 to No. 2; once that’s done, take your comb and drag it straight from |77| No. 1 to No. 2. If you have any curves or snail designs on your paper, use the bodkin to create whatever turns you want in the colors. (See the plate.)”

Cut from Book “School of Arts,” 1750.

“Thus far you are ready in order to lay on your paper, which must be moistened the day before, in the same manner as book-printers do their paper for printing; take a sheet at a time, lay it gently upon your colours in the trough, press it slightly with your finger down in such places where you find the paper lies hollow; this done, take hold at one end of the paper, and draw it up at the other end of the trough; hang it up to dry on a cord; when dry, glaze it, and it is done. You may also embellish your paper with streaks of gold, by applying mussel gold or silver, tempered with gum water, among the rest of the colours.”

“Before you start, make sure your paper is ready. It should be moistened the day before, just like book printers prepare their paper for printing. Take one sheet at a time, gently place it on your colors in the trough, and press down lightly with your finger in any uneven spots. Once you've done that, grab one end of the paper and lift it up from the other end of the trough. Hang it up to dry on a cord; when it’s dry, add a glaze, and it’s done. You can also decorate your paper with gold streaks by applying gold or silver leaf mixed with gum water, along with the other colors.”

This last paragraph shows that the gold vein which is now in such demand is really over 150 years old.

This last paragraph shows that the gold vein that's currently in high demand is actually over 150 years old.

Leo’s Marbling Set.

Messrs. Leo, of Stuttgart, have put together a complete marbling apparatus, containing colours, gall, cups, combs, sticks, filter, brushes, etc., the whole in a box. To a small country bookbinder this is indispensable.

Messrs. Leo from Stuttgart have assembled a complete marbling kit, which includes colors, gall, cups, combs, sticks, a filter, brushes, and more, all packed in a box. For a small country bookbinder, this is essential.

CHAPTER XVII. GILT EDGES.

A gilt edge is the most elegant of all modes of ornamenting edges, and this branch of bookbinding has from time to time been so greatly extended, that at the present day there are many ways in which a book may have the edges gilt; but some methods are not pursued, either from ignorance on the binder’s part, or with a view to save expense.

A gilt edge is the most stylish way to decorate edges, and this aspect of bookbinding has evolved over time. Nowadays, there are many ways to gild the edges of a book, but some techniques are overlooked, either because the binder isn't aware of them or to cut costs.

First we have the “plain gilt,” then “gilt in the round”; then again some colour under the gold, for instance, “gilt on red,” or whatever the colour may be, red being mostly used, especially for religious books. Some edges are “tooled,” and some have a gilt edge with landscape or scene appropriate to the book painted on the edge, only to be seen when the book is opened. “Marbling under gilt” may also be used with good effect; but still better “marbling on gilt.”

First, we have the “plain gilt,” then “gilt in the round”; then, some color under the gold, for example, “gilt on red,” or whatever the color may be, with red being commonly used, especially for religious books. Some edges are “tooled,” while others have a gilt edge with a landscape or scene related to the book painted on the edge, only visible when the book is opened. “Marbling under gilt” can also be used effectively; but even better is “marbling on gilt.”

The room where gilt edge work is done should be neither dirty nor draughty, and the necessary materials are:—

The room where gilt edge work is done should be neither dirty nor drafty, and the necessary materials are:—

1st. The Gold Cushion.—This may be purchased ready for use, or if the binder wishes to make one, it may be done by covering a piece of wood, about 12 inches by 6, with a piece of white calf, the rough side outwards, and padding it with blotting paper and cloth. The pieces underneath should be cut a little smaller than the upper one, so that it will form a bevel at the edge, but quite flat on the top. The calf to be neatly nailed all round the edge. If the pile of the leather is too rough, it can be reduced with a piece of pumice stone, by rubbing the stone on the calf with a circular motion. |79|

1st. The Gold Cushion.—This can be bought ready to use, or if the binder wants to make one, it can be done by covering a piece of wood, about 12 inches by 6, with a piece of white calf leather, the rough side facing out, and padding it with blotting paper and cloth. The pieces underneath should be cut a little smaller than the top piece, so that it forms a bevel at the edge, but stays flat on top. The calf leather should be neatly nailed all around the edge. If the leather's texture is too rough, it can be smoothed down with a piece of pumice stone by rubbing the stone on the calf in a circular motion. |79|

2nd. Gold Knife.—This should be a long knife of thin steel, the blade about one to one and a half inch wide.

2nd. Gold Knife.—This should be a long knife made of thin steel, with a blade that is about one to one and a half inches wide.

3rd. Burnishers.—These are made of agate stone, and can be purchased of any size. A flat one, and two or three round ones, will be found sufficient. They should have a very high polish.

3rd. Burnishers.—These are made of agate stone and can be bought in various sizes. A flat one and two or three round ones will be enough. They should have a very high polish.

4th. Glaire Water or Size.—The white of an egg and a tea-cup full of water are well beaten together, until the albumen is perfectly dissolved. It must then be allowed to stand for some hours to settle, after which it should be strained through a piece of linen which has been washed; old linen is therefore preferred to new.

4th. Glaire Water or Size.—Beat the white of an egg together with a tea cup of water until the albumen is completely dissolved. Let it sit for a few hours to settle, and then strain it through a piece of washed linen; old linen is preferred to new.

5th. Scrapers.—Pieces of steel with the edge or burr made to turn up by rubbing the edge flat over a bodkin or other steel instrument, so that when applied to the edge a thin shaving of paper is taken off. The beauty of gilding depends greatly on proper and even scraping.

5th. Scrapers.—Steel tools with a sharp edge or burr designed to lift up by being rubbed flat against a bodkin or other metal tool, allowing it to shave off a thin layer of paper when applied to the edge. The effectiveness of gilding relies heavily on consistent and careful scraping.

6th. The Gold Leaf.—This is bought in books, the price according to quality; most of the cheap gold comes from Germany. I recommend the use of the best gold that can be had; it being in the end the cheapest, as cheap gold turns black by the action of the atmosphere in course of time.

6th. The Gold Leaf.—This is sold in books, with the price depending on quality; most of the inexpensive gold comes from Germany. I suggest using the best gold available, as it ultimately proves to be the cheapest option since cheap gold tarnishes and turns black over time due to exposure to the atmosphere.

The method of preparing the gold7 is by making an alloy: gold with silver or copper. It is drawn out into a wire of about six inches in length, and by being passed again between steel rollers is made into a ribbon. This ribbon is then cut into squares and placed between vellum leaves, about four or five inches square, and beaten with a hammer somewhat like our beating hammer, until the gold has expanded to the size of the vellum. The gold is again cut up into squares of about one inch, and again |80| interleaved; but gold-beaters’ skin is now used instead of vellum; and so by continual beating and cutting up, the proper thickness is arrived at. If the gold is held up to the light, it will be found to be beaten so thin that it is nearly transparent, although when laid on any object it is of sufficient thickness to hide the surface underneath. It has been estimated that the thickness of the gold leaf is only 1 ⁄ 280000 of an inch.

The process of preparing gold is by creating an alloy: gold mixed with silver or copper. It’s stretched into a wire about six inches long, and then passed again through steel rollers to turn it into a ribbon. This ribbon is then cut into squares, placed between leather-like leaves about four or five inches square, and hammered, similar to how we use a beating hammer, until the gold expands to the size of the leaves. The gold is then cut into squares about one inch, and interleaved again; this time, gold-beaters’ skin replaces the leaves. By continually beating and cutting, the desired thickness is achieved. When the gold is held up to the light, it appears so thin that it’s nearly transparent, but when laid on any surface, it’s thick enough to cover what’s underneath. It's estimated that the thickness of the gold leaf is only 1/280,000 of an inch.

[7] Although this has practically nothing to do with the art of bookbinding, it is always advisable for a workman to know something about the tools and materials he uses.

To gild the edges, the book should be put into the press straight and on a level with the cheeks of the press between cutting boards, the boards of the book being thrown back. The press should be screwed up very tightly, and any projection of the cutting boards should be taken away with a chisel. If the paper is unsized or at all spongy, the edge should be sized and left to dry. This may be ascertained by wetting a leaf with the tongue: if spongy, the moisture will sink through as in blotting paper. The edge should be scraped quite flat and perfectly even, care being taken to scrape every part equally, or one part of the edge will be hollow or perhaps one side scraped down, and this will make one square larger than the other. When scraped quite smoothly and evenly, a mixture of black lead and thin glaire water is painted over the edge, and with a hard brush it is well brushed until dry.

To gild the edges, the book should be placed in the press straight and level with the cheeks of the press between cutting boards, with the boards of the book pushed back. The press should be tightened very securely, and any excess from the cutting boards should be trimmed away with a chisel. If the paper is unsized or somewhat spongy, the edge should be sized and left to dry. You can check this by wetting a page with your tongue: if it feels spongy, the moisture will soak through like blotting paper. The edge should be scraped completely flat and even, making sure to scrape every part uniformly; otherwise, one part of the edge could end up hollow or one side scraped lower, making one square larger than the other. Once the edge is scraped smooth and even, a mixture of graphite and thin egg white is brushed onto the edge, and it is brushed thoroughly with a stiff brush until dry.

The gold should now be cut on the gold cushion. Lift a leaf out of the book with the gold knife, lay it on the gold cushion, and breathe gently on the centre of the leaf to lay it flat; it can then be cut with perfect ease to any size. The edge is now to be glaired evenly, and the gold taken up with a piece of paper previously greased by drawing it over the head. The gold is then gently laid on the edge, which has been previously glaired. The whole edge or end being done, it is allowed to get perfectly dry, which will occupy some two hours.

The gold should now be cut on the gold cushion. Pick a leaf from the book using the gold knife, place it on the gold cushion, and lightly breathe on the center of the leaf to flatten it; it can then be easily cut to any size. The edge should now be evenly covered with glaire, and the gold picked up with a piece of paper that’s been greased by rubbing it on the head. The gold is then gently placed on the edge that’s already been glaired. Once the entire edge or end is done, it should be left to dry completely, which will take about two hours.

Book-edge Burnishers.

Before using the burnisher on the gold itself, some gilders |81| lay a piece of fine paper on the gold and gently flatten it with the burnisher. Books are often treated in this manner, they then become “dull gilt.” When intended to be bright, a waxed cloth should be gently rubbed over the surface two or three times before using the burnisher. The beauty of burnishing depends upon the edge presenting a solid and uniform metallic surface, without any marks of the burnisher. The manner of burnishing is to hold a flat burnisher, where the surface is flat, firmly in the right hand with the end of the handle on the shoulder, to get better leverage. Work the burnisher backwards and forwards with a perfectly even pressure on every part. When both ends are finished, the foredge is to be proceeded with, by making it perfectly flat. It is better to tie the book, to prevent it slipping back. The foredge is to be gilt exactly in the same manner as the ends; it will of course return to its proper round when released from the press. This is done with all books in the ordinary way, but if the book is to have an extra edge, it is done “solid” or “in the round.” For this way the book must be put into the press with its proper round, without flattening it, and scraped in that position with scrapers corresponding with the rounding. The greatest care must be taken in this kind of scraping that the sides |82| are not scraped away, or the squares will be made either too large or lop-sided.

Before using the burnisher on the gold itself, some gilders |81| place a piece of fine paper on the gold and gently press it with the burnisher. Books are often treated this way, resulting in a “dull gilt.” When a bright finish is intended, a waxed cloth should be gently rubbed over the surface two or three times before using the burnisher. The beauty of burnishing relies on the edge creating a solid and uniform metallic surface, free of any marks from the burnisher. To burnish, hold a flat burnisher, with the flat side facing down, firmly in your right hand, resting the end of the handle on your shoulder for better leverage. Move the burnisher back and forth with even pressure across every area. Once both ends are complete, proceed to the foredge, making it perfectly flat. It’s better to tie the book to prevent it from slipping back. The foredge should be gilt in exactly the same way as the ends; it will naturally return to its proper round when released from the press. This method is used for all books in the usual manner, but if the book requires an extra edge, it is done “solid” or “in the round.” For this method, the book must go into the press in its proper round, without flattening, and be scraped in that position using scrapers that match the rounding. Great care must be taken with this kind of scraping to ensure the sides |82| are not scraped away, or else the squares will be either too large or uneven.

Gilt on Red.—The edges are coloured by fanning them out as explained in colouring edges, and when dry, gilt in the usual way; not quite such a strong size will be wanted, through there being a ground in the colour; nor must any black lead be used. The edges should in this process be scraped first, then coloured and gilt in the usual way.

Gold on Red.—The edges are painted by fanning them out as explained in coloring edges, and when dry, gilded in the usual way; a slightly lighter adhesive will be needed since there’s a base in the color; also, no black lead should be used. The edges should be scraped first, then colored and gilded as normal.

Tooled Edges.—The book is to be gilt as usual, then while in the press stamped or worked over with tools that are of some open character; those of fine work being preferable. Some design should be followed out according to the fancy of the workman. The tools must be warmed slightly so that the impression may be firm; the foredge should be done first. Another method is to tool the edge before burnishing, or the different portions of the tooling may be so managed in burnishing that some parts will be left bright and standing in relief on the unburnished or dead surface.

Tooled Edges.—The book is to be gilded as usual, and then while it's in the press, it should be stamped or worked over with tools that are somewhat open in design; finer tools are preferred. Some design should be followed based on the worker's creativity. The tools must be warmed slightly to ensure a solid impression; the foredge should be done first. Alternatively, the edge can be tooled before burnishing, or the different parts of the tooling can be managed during burnishing so that some areas remain bright and raised against the unburnished or dull surface.

Painted Edges.—The edge is to fanned out and tied between boards, and whilst in that position some landscape or other scene, either taken from the book itself or appropriate to the subject of it, painted on the foredge, and when quite dry it is gilt on the flat in the usual manner. This work of course requires an artist well skilled in water-colour drawing. The colours used must be more of a stain than body colour, and the edges should be scraped first.

Painted Edges.—The edge is to be fanned out and tied between boards, and while it's in that position, a landscape or another scene, either taken from the book itself or suitable for the subject, is painted on the foredge. Once it's completely dry, it's gilded on the flat in the usual way. This work obviously needs an artist who is skilled in watercolor painting. The colors used should be more of a stain than solid color, and the edges should be scraped first.

After the edges have been gilt by any of the foregoing methods, the rounding must be examined and corrected; and the book should be put into the standing press for two or three hours, to set it. The whole of the edges should be wrapped up with paper to keep them clean during the remainder of the process of binding. This is called “capping up.”

After the edges have been gilded using any of the methods mentioned above, check and fix the rounding. Then, place the book in the standing press for two or three hours to set it. Wrap all the edges in paper to keep them clean for the rest of the binding process. This is known as “capping up.”

CHAPTER XVIII. Headbanding.

Few binders work their own head-bands in these times of competition and strikes for higher wages. It takes some time and pains to teach a female hand the perfection of head-band working, and but too often, since gratitude is not universal, the opportunity of earning a few more pence per week is seized without regard to those at whose expense the power of earning anything was gained, and the baffled employer is wearied by constant changes. Owing to this, most bookbinders use the machine-made head-band. These can be purchased of any size or colour, at a moderate price.

Few binders make their own headbands these days due to competition and strikes for higher wages. It takes time and effort to train someone on the art of headband making, and too often, since gratitude isn’t common, the chance to earn a bit more money each week is taken without considering those who made that earning possible. As a result, employers are frustrated by the constant turnover. Because of this, most bookbinders use machine-made headbands. These can be bought in any size or color at a reasonable price.

Head-banding done by hand is really only a twist of different coloured cotton or silk round a piece of vellum or cat-gut fastened to the back every half dozen sections. If the head-band is to be square or straight, the vellum should be made by sticking with paste two or three pieces together. Damp the vellum previously and put it under a weight for a few hours to get soft. Vellum from old ledgers and other vellum bound books is mostly used. The vellum when quite dry and flat is to be cut into strips just a little under the width of the squares of the books, so that when the book is covered, the amount of leather above the head-band and the head-band itself will be just the size or height of the square.

Head-banding done by hand is really just a twist of different colored cotton or silk around a piece of vellum or cat-gut secured to the back every six sections. If the head-band is supposed to be square or straight, the vellum should be made by gluing together two or three pieces. Moisten the vellum beforehand and place it under a weight for a few hours to soften it. Vellum from old ledgers and other vellum-bound books is usually used. Once the vellum is completely dry and flat, it should be cut into strips slightly narrower than the book squares so that when the book is covered, the amount of leather above the head-band and the head-band itself will be the same size or height as the square.

If, however, a round head-band is chosen, cat-gut is taken on the same principle with regard to size, and this is further advanced by using two pieces of cat-gut, the one |84| being generally smaller than the other, and making with the beading three rows. The round head-band is the original head-band, and cord was used instead of cat-gut. The cords were fastened to lay-cords on the sewing press, and placed at head and tail, and the head-band was worked at the same time that the book was sewn. I am now speaking of books bound about the 15th century; and in pulling one of these old bindings to pieces, it will compensate for the time occupied and the trouble taken, if the book be examined to see how the head-band was worked, and how the head-band then formed the catch-up stitch; the head-band cords were drawn in through the boards, and thus gave greater strength to the book than the method used at the present day. To explain how the head-band is worked is rather a difficult task; yet the process is a very simple one. The great difficulty is to get the silks to lie close together, which they will not do if the twist or beading is not evenly worked. This requires time and patience to accomplish. The hands must be clean or the silk will get soiled; fingers must be smooth or the silk will be frayed.

If a round headband is chosen, then cat-gut is used with similar size considerations, and this is enhanced by using two pieces of cat-gut, one usually smaller than the other, creating three rows with the beading. The round headband is the original design, where cord was used instead of cat-gut. The cords were attached to lay-cords on the sewing press, positioned at the top and bottom, and the headband was created at the same time the book was sewn. I’m referring to books bound around the 15th century; if you take apart one of these old bindings, it's worth the time and effort to check how the headband was constructed and how it served as the catch-up stitch. The headband cords were threaded through the boards, giving the book more durability than modern methods. Explaining how the headband is made can be tricky, but the process itself is quite straightforward. The main challenge is getting the silk strands to sit closely together, which won’t happen if the twist or beading isn’t done evenly. This takes time and patience. Your hands need to be clean, or the silk will get dirty; your fingers must be smooth, or the silk will fray.

Head-banding.

Suppose, for instance, a book is to be done in two colours, red and white. The head-band is cut to size, the |85| book is, for convenience, held in a press, or a plough with the knife taken out, so that the end to be head-banded is raised to a convenient height. The ends of the silk or cotton are to be joined together, and one, say the red, threaded through a strong needle. This is then passed through the back of the book, at about the centre of the second section, commencing on the left of the book. This must be passed through twice, and a loop left. The vellum is put in this loop and the silk drawn tightly, the vellum will then be held fast. The white is now to be twisted round the red once, and round the head-band twice; the red is now to be taken in hand and twisted round the white once, and the head-band twice; and this is to be done until the whole vellum is covered. The needle must be passed through the back at about every eight sections to secure the head-band. The beading is the effect of one thread being twisted over the other, and the hand must be kept exactly at the same tightness or tension, for if pulled too tightly the beading will go underneath, or be irregular. The fastening off is to be done by passing the needle through the back twice, the white is then passed round the red and under the vellum, and the ends are to be tied together.

Suppose, for example, a book is going to be made in two colors, red and white. The head-band is cut to size, and the book is conveniently held in a press or a plough with the blade removed, so the end that will have the head-band is raised to a comfortable height. The ends of the silk or cotton are joined together, and one, let’s say the red, is threaded through a sturdy needle. This is then passed through the back of the book, about the center of the second section, starting on the left side of the book. It must go through twice, leaving a loop. The vellum is placed in this loop, and the silk is pulled tight; this will hold the vellum securely. Next, the white thread is twisted around the red once, and around the head-band twice; then, the red thread is taken and twisted around the white once, and around the head-band twice; and this process continues until the entire vellum is covered. The needle must go through the back approximately every eight sections to secure the head-band. The beading results from one thread being twisted over the other, and the tension must be consistent; if pulled too tightly, the beading will sink underneath or become uneven. To finish, the needle should be passed through the back twice, the white thread is then wrapped around the red and tucked under the vellum, and the ends are tied together.

Three Colours Plain.—This is to be commenced in the same way as with two, but great care must be taken that the silks are worked in rotation so as not to mix or entangle them. The silks must be kept in the left hand, while the right twists the colour over or round, and as each is twisted round the vellum it is passed to be twisted round the other two. In fastening off, both colours must be passed round under the vellum and fastened as with the two colour pattern.

Three Colours Plain.—Start this the same way as the two-color method, but make sure to handle the silks carefully to avoid mixing or tangling them. Hold the silks in your left hand while your right hand twists the color around. As each color gets twisted around the vellum, pass it to twist around the other two. When finishing off, both colors should be wrapped under the vellum and secured like in the two-color pattern.

The head-bands may be worked intermixed with gold or silver thread, or the one colour may be worked a number of times round the vellum, before the second colour has |86| been twisted, giving it the appearance of ribbons going round the head-band.

The headbands can be made with threads of gold or silver mixed in, or a single color can be wrapped around the vellum multiple times before the second color is added, creating the look of ribbons circling the headband.

With regard to stuck-on head-bands, the binder may make them at little expense, by using striped calico for the purpose. A narrow stripe is to be preferred of some bright colour. The material must be cut into lengths of about one-and-a-half inch wide, with the stripes across. Cords of different thickness are then to be cut somewhat longer than the calico, and a piece of the cord is to be fastened by a nail at one end on a board of sufficient length. The calico is then to be pasted and laid down on the board under the cord, and the cord being held tightly may be easily covered with the striped calico, and rubbed with a folder into a groove.

For stuck-on headbands, you can make them cheaply by using striped fabric. A narrow stripe in a bright color is best. Cut the material into strips about one-and-a-half inches wide, with the stripes going across. Next, cut cords of different thicknesses a bit longer than the fabric. Attach one end of a cord to a board with a nail. Then, glue the fabric down on the board under the cord. Hold the cord tight, and you can easily cover it with the striped fabric, rubbing it down with a folder into a groove.

When this is dry, the head and tail of the book is glued and the proper piece of the head-band is put on. Or the head-band may be purchased, as before stated, worked with either silk or cotton ready for fastening on, from about 2s. 3d. to 4s. 6d. a piece of twelve yards, according to the size required: it has, however, the disadvantage of not looking so even as a head-band worked on the book. I have lately seen some specimens of as good imitations of hand-worked ones as it is possible for machinery to manufacture.

When this is dry, the top and bottom of the book are glued, and the right piece of the head-band is attached. Alternatively, the head-band can be purchased, as mentioned earlier, made with either silk or cotton ready for attaching, costing about 23d to 46d for a piece of twelve yards, depending on the size needed. However, it has the downside of not looking as neat as a head-band made directly on the book. Recently, I’ve seen some examples of machine-made head-bands that closely resemble hand-worked ones.

After the head-band has been put on or worked, the book is to be “lined up” or “made ready for covering.”

After the headband is attached or completed, the book needs to be "lined up" or "prepared for covering."

CHAPTER XIX. PREPARING FOR COVERING.

Nearly all modern books are bound with hollow backs, except where the books are sewn for flexible work or otherwise meant to have tight backs.

Nearly all modern books are bound with flexible spines, except in cases where the books are stitched for flexibility or designed to have rigid spines.

Much of the paper used at the present day is so hard, that the binder is almost forced to make a hollow back, in order that the book may open.

Much of the paper used today is so stiff that the binder often has to create a hollow back to allow the book to open.

The head-band is first set with glue, if worked, by gluing the head and tail, and with a folder the head-band is made to take the same form as the back. This is to be done by holding the book in the left hand with its back on the press, then a pointed folder held in the right hand is run round the beading two or three times to form it; the silk on the back is then rubbed down as much as possible to make all level and even, and the book is allowed to dry. When dry it is put into the lying press to hold it, and the back is well glued all over; some paper, usually brown, is now taken, the same length as the book, put on the back, and rubbed down well with a thick folder: a good sized bone from the ribs of beef is as good as anything. The overplus of the paper is now to be cut away from the back, except the part projecting head and tail. A second coat of glue is now put on the top of the brown paper and another piece is put on that, but not quite up to the edge on the left hand side. When this is well rubbed down it is folded evenly from the edge on the right side over to the left, the small amount of glued space left will be found sufficient to hold it down; the top is again glued |88| and again folded over from left to right, and cut off level by folding it back and running a sharp knife down the fold. This is what is generally termed “two on and two off,” being of course two thicknesses of paper on the back and two for the hollow; but thin or small books need only have one on the back and two for the hollow. Thick or large books should have more paper used in proportion to their size. Books that have been over-cast in the sewing should have rather a strong lining-up, so that there be not such a strain when the book is opened. When the whole is dry, the overplus of the paper, head and tail, is to be cut off close to the head-band.

The headband is first glued in place, if it's being worked on, by attaching the head and tail. Using a folder, shape the headband to match the spine. Hold the book in your left hand with its spine on the press, then use a pointed folder in your right hand to go around the beading two or three times to form it. Rub down the silk on the spine as much as possible to make it level and even, then let the book dry. Once dry, place it in the lying press to hold it, and glue the spine thoroughly. Take a piece of paper, usually brown, the same length as the book, place it on the spine, and rub it down well with a thick folder; a good-sized bone from beef ribs works well for this. Trim away the excess paper from the spine, leaving the parts that stick out at the head and tail. Apply a second coat of glue to the top of the brown paper and attach another piece, not quite reaching the edge on the left side. Once well rubbed down, fold the paper evenly from the edge on the right side over to the left. The small amount of glued space left will be enough to hold it down; glue the top again and fold it over from left to right, then level it by folding it back and cutting down the fold with a sharp knife. This is typically called “two on and two off,” referring to the two layers of paper on the spine and two for the hollow; however, thin or small books only need one layer on the spine and two for the hollow. Larger or thicker books should use more paper in proportion to their size. Books that have been oversewn should have a stronger lining to reduce the strain when the book is opened. When everything is dry, trim off the excess paper at the head and tail close to the headband.

I need hardly say that the better the paper used the more easy will be the working of it. Old writing or copy-book paper will be found to be as good as any, but good brown paper is, as I have said before, mostly used.

I hardly need to mention that the better the paper you use, the easier it will be to work with. Old writing or notebook paper works just fine, but good quality brown paper is, as I’ve mentioned before, what is mostly used.

The book is now ready for putting the bands on. These are prepared beforehand by sticking with glue two or three pieces of leather together or on a piece of paper, well pressing it, and then allowing it to dry under pressure. The paper must then be glued twice, allowing each coat to dry before gluing again. It should then be put on one side for future use, and when wanted, the proper thickness is chosen and cut into strips of a width to correspond with the size of the book. The book is now to be marked up, five bands being the number generally used, leaving the tail a little longer than the other portions. The strips of band are then to be moistened with a little hot water to cause the glue upon the paper to melt. Each piece is then to be fixed upon the back just under the holes made with the compasses in marking-up. This will be found to be a far better plan than to first cut the strips and then to glue them. By the latter plan the glue is liable to spread upon the side, where it is not wanted, and if the book has to be covered with light calf, it will certainly be stained black: |89| so the coverer must be careful that all glue is removed from the back and sides before he attempts to cover any of his books with calf. It is rather provoking to find some favourite colour when dry, having a tortoiseshell appearance, which no amount of washing will take out. When dry the ends of the bands are to be cut off with a bevel, and a little piece of the boards from the corners nearest the back also taken off on the bevel, that there may not be a sharp point to fret through the leather when the book is opened. This is also necessary so that the head-band may be properly set. A sharp knife should be inserted between the hollow and should separate it from the back at head and tail on each side so far as to allow the leather to be turned in. Morocco may have the back glued, as it will not show through, and will facilitate the adhesion of the leather.

The book is now ready for the bands to be attached. These are made in advance by gluing together two or three pieces of leather or a piece of paper, pressing it firmly, and then letting it dry under pressure. The paper needs to be glued twice, allowing each layer to dry before applying the next. After that, it should be set aside for later use. When needed, the right thickness is selected and cut into strips that match the book's size. Next, the book is marked up, typically using five bands, with the tail a bit longer than the other sections. The bands are then dampened with a small amount of hot water to help melt the glue on the paper. Each piece is attached to the back just below the holes created when marking up. This method is much better than cutting the strips first and then gluing them, as the glue can spread to unwanted areas. If the book is going to be covered in light calf leather, any glue that spreads can leave black stains. Therefore, the coverer must ensure that all glue is removed from the back and sides before covering any books with calf leather. It’s quite frustrating to find a favorite color has a tortoiseshell look after drying, which cannot be removed no matter how much washing is done. Once dry, the ends of the bands should be trimmed with a bevel, and a small piece of the corners from the boards nearest the back should also be cut off at an angle to prevent sharp points from poking through the leather when the book is opened. This step is also necessary for properly setting the head-band. A sharp knife should be inserted between the hollow to separate it from the back at the top and bottom on each side, allowing the leather to be turned in. For morocco, the back can be glued as it won’t show through, which helps the leather bond better.

Flexible Work.—This class of work is not lined up. The leather is fastened directly upon the book; the head-band is set as before explained, and held tight by gluing a piece of fine linen against it, and when quite dry, the overplus is to be cut away, and the back made quite smooth. The bands are then knocked up gently with a blunt chisel to make them perfectly straight, being first damped and made soft with a little paste to facilitate the working and to prevent the thread from being cut. Any holes caused by sawing-in, in previous binding, must be filled up with a piece of frayed cord, pasted. Any holes thus filled up must be made quite smooth when dry, as the least unevenness will show when the book is covered.

Flexible Work.—This type of work isn’t organized. The leather is attached directly to the book; the head-band is set as explained before and secured by gluing a piece of fine linen against it. Once it's completely dry, the excess is cut away, and the spine is made completely smooth. The bands are then gently pushed up with a dull chisel to ensure they are perfectly straight. They should be dampened and softened with a bit of paste to make the process easier and to prevent the thread from getting cut. Any holes made during the previous binding should be filled with a piece of frayed cord, glued in place. After the filling has dried, it must be smoothed out because even the slightest unevenness will be noticeable when the book is covered.

In “throw up” backs, or in “flexible not to show,” a piece of thin linen (muslin) or staff called mull is glued on the back first, and one piece of paper on the top. For the hollow, three, four, or even five pieces are stuck one on the other, so that it may be firm; whilst the book itself will be as if it had a flexible back. The bands, if any, are then |90| to be fastened on, and the corners of the boards cut off. It is then ready for covering. “Mock flexible” has generally one piece of paper glued on the back, and when marked-up, the bands are put on as before, and the book covered.

In “throw up” backs, or in “flexible not to show,” a piece of thin linen (muslin) or a material called mull is first glued to the back, and a piece of paper is placed on top. For the hollow, three, four, or even five pieces are stacked on top of each other to make it sturdy, while the book itself will appear to have a flexible back. If there are any bands, they are then attached, and the corners of the boards are trimmed. It’s then ready to be covered. “Mock flexible” usually has one piece of paper glued on the back, and when it’s marked-up, the bands are added as before, and the book is covered.

CHAPTER XX. COVERING.

Books are covered according to the fancy of the binder or customer. The materials used at the present day, are—leather of all sorts, parchment or vellum, bookbinder’s cloth, velvet, needle-work, and imitation leather, of which various kinds are manufactured, such as leatherette and feltine.

Books are covered based on the preferences of the binder or the customer. Nowadays, the materials used include all types of leather, parchment or vellum, bookbinder's cloth, velvet, embroidery, and imitation leather, with various kinds produced, such as leatherette and feltine.

French Paring Knife.

Each kind requires a different manner of working or manipulation. For instance, a calf book must not be covered in the same manner as a velvet one: I will take each in the above order and explain how they are managed.

Each type requires a different way of working or handling. For example, a calfskin book shouldn't be covered the same way as a velvet one: I'll address each of them in the order mentioned above and explain how they're managed.

Under the class of leather, we have moroccos of all kinds; russia; calf, coloured, smooth, and imitation; roan, sheep, and imitation morocco.

Under the leather category, we have all kinds of morocco; russia; calf, colored, smooth, and faux; roan, sheep, and imitation morocco.

Method of Holding French Knife.
German Paring Knife.

The morocco cover, indeed any leather cover, is to be cut out by laying the skin out on a flat board, and having chosen the part or piece of the skin to be used, the book is laid on it and the skin is cut with a sharp knife round the book, leaving a space of about 3 ⁄ 4 of an inch for an 8vo, and more or less according to the size of the book and thickness of board for turning in. The morocco |91| cover should now have marked upon it with a pencil the exact size of the book itself, by laying the book on the cover, and running the point of a black lead pencil all round it. The leather must then be “pared,” or shaved round the edges, using the pencil marks as a guide. This paring process is not so difficult, especially if a French knife is used, such as may now be purchased at most material dealers. The chief point being that a very sharp edge is to be kept on the knife, and that the burr is on the cutting edge. The knife is to be held in the right hand, placing two fingers on the top with the thumb underneath. The leather must be placed on a piece of marble, lithographic stone, or thick glass, and held tightly strained between finger and thumb of the left hand. Then by a series of pushes from the right hand, the knife takes off more or less according to the angle given. The burr causes the knife to enter the leather; if the burr is turned up the knife will not cut but run off. If the knife is held too much at an angle it will go right through the leather, a rather unpleasant experience, and one to be carefully avoided. The leather should from time to time be examined, by turning it over, to see if any unevenness appears, for every cut will show. Especial attention should be given to where the edges of the board go. The turning in at the head and tail should be pared off as thin as possible, as there will be twice as much thickness of leather on the back where turned in, the object of this care being, that it must not be seen. The morocco |92| cover should now be wetted well, and grained up by using either the hand or a flat piece of cork. This is to be done by gently curling it up in all directions; and when the grain has been brought up properly and sufficiently, the leather should be pasted on the flesh side with thin paste, and hung up to dry. Should the leather be “straight grain,” it must only be creased in the one direction of the grain, or if it is required to imitate any old book that has no grain, the leather should be wetted as much as possible, and the whole of the grain rubbed out by using a rolling pin with even pressure.

The morocco cover, or any leather cover for that matter, is made by laying the skin out on a flat board. Once you choose the part of the skin to use, you place the book on it and cut around the book with a sharp knife, leaving about 3 ⁄ 4 of an inch space for an 8vo book, adjusting according to the size and thickness of the board for turning in. Next, you should mark the exact size of the book on the morocco cover by laying the book on it and tracing around it with a pencil. The leather then needs to be “pared,” or shaved down around the edges, following the pencil marks as a guide. This paring process isn’t too hard, especially if you use a French knife, which is now readily available from most material suppliers. The key point is to keep the knife very sharp, ensuring the burr is on the cutting edge. Hold the knife in your right hand, resting two fingers on the top and your thumb underneath. Place the leather on a piece of marble, lithographic stone, or thick glass, holding it tightly with the thumb and fingers of your left hand. Then, using a series of pushes from your right hand, you can shave off the leather according to the angle you give. The burr helps the knife cut into the leather; if it’s turned up, the knife won't cut properly and will slip off. If the knife is angled too much, it might cut right through the leather, which is not ideal and should be avoided. Periodically check the leather by flipping it over to see if any unevenness has developed, as every cut will be visible. Pay particular attention to the edges where the board will go. The turns at the head and tail should be pared as thin as possible since there will be double the thickness of leather on the back where it’s turned in; the goal is for this to be invisible. Then, moisten the morocco cover well and raise the grain using either your hand or a flat piece of cork. Do this by gently curling it in all directions; once the grain is sufficiently raised, paste the leather on the flesh side with thin paste and hang it up to dry. If the leather has a “straight grain,” only crease it in the direction of the grain. If you need it to mimic an old book with no grain, wet it thoroughly and use a rolling pin with even pressure to rub out the grain completely.

Method of Holding Ordinary Knife.

The Morocco leather first brought from that country, had a peculiar grain, and was dyed with very bright colours. It is now largely manufactured in London and Paris; the French manufacture is the finest. Russia and calf require no setting up of the grain, but russia should be well rolled out with the rolling pin.

The Morocco leather originally imported from that country had a unique grain and was dyed in very vibrant colors. It's now mostly produced in London and Paris, with the French version being the best quality. Russian leather and calfskin don’t need any grain setup, but Russian leather should be rolled out well with a rolling pin.

Band Nippers.

When the cover (morocco) is dry, it is to be well pasted, the squares of the book set, so that each side has its proper portion of board projecting. The book is then laid down evenly on the cover, which must be gently drawn on; the back is drawn tight by placing the book on its foredge and drawing the skin well down over it. The sides are next drawn tight, and the bands pinched well up with a pair of band nippers. The four corners of the leather |93| are cut off with a sharp knife in a slanting direction, a little paste put on the cut edge, and the operation of turning in may be commenced. The book must be held on its edge, either head or tail, with a small piece of paper put close to the head-band to prevent any paste soiling the edge or head-band, and with the boards extended, the hollow is pulled a little away from the back and the leather neatly tucked in. The leather is next to be tightly brought over the boards and well rubbed down, both on the edge and inside, with a folding stick, but on no account must the outside be rubbed, or the grain will be taken away. The foredge is to be treated in like manner, by tucking the corners in for strength. The head-band is now to be set, by tying a piece of thread round the book between the back and the boards in the slots cut out from the corners of the boards; this thread must be tied in a knot. The book being held in the left hand, resting on its end, the leather is drawn with a pointed folding-stick, as it were, towards the foredge, and flattened on the top of the head-band. When this is done properly it should be exactly even with the boards, and yet cover the head-band, leaving that part of the head-band at right angles with the edge exposed. With a little practice the novice may be able to ascertain what amount of leather is to be left out from the turning-in, so that the head-band can be neatly covered. The perfection in covering a book depends upon the leather being worked sharp round the boards, but with the grain almost untouched.

When the cover (made of morocco) is dry, it should be well pasted, making sure the squares of the book are set so that each side has the right amount of board sticking out. The book is then placed evenly on the cover, which should be gently pulled over it; the back is tightened by placing the book on its foredge and pulling the leather down securely. Next, the sides are tightened, and the bands are pinched up using a pair of band nippers. The four corners of the leather |93| are trimmed off at an angle with a sharp knife, a little paste is applied to the cut edges, and the process of turning in can begin. The book should be held on its edge, either at the top or bottom, with a small piece of paper placed close to the head-band to avoid getting any paste on the edge or head-band. With the boards extended, the hollow is pulled slightly away from the back, and the leather is neatly tucked in. The leather should then be pulled tightly over the boards and rubbed down well, both on the edge and inside, using a folding stick, but the outside must not be rubbed at all, or the grain will be damaged. The foredge should be treated the same way, with the corners tucked in for strength. The head-band is then set by tying a piece of thread around the book between the back and the boards, in the slots cut out from the corners of the boards; this thread should be tied in a knot. Holding the book in the left hand, resting on its end, the leather is pulled with a pointed folding stick towards the foredge and flattened over the top of the head-band. When done correctly, it should be even with the boards while still covering the head-band, leaving the part of the head-band at right angles with the edge exposed. With a bit of practice, a beginner may be able to figure out how much leather should be left out from the turning-in so the head-band can be neatly covered. The quality of the book cover depends on how sharply the leather works around the boards while keeping the grain mostly intact.

Paste should be always used for morocco, calf, russia and vellum, in fact for all kinds of leather; but in my humble opinion, all leather with an artificial grain should be glued; the turning-in may be with paste. The glue gives more |94| body to the leather, and thus preserves the grain. White morocco should be covered with paste made without any alum, which causes it to turn yellow, and if the leather is washed with lemon juice instead of vinegar when finishing, the colour will be much improved.

Paste should always be used for morocco, calf, russia, and vellum, in fact for all types of leather; but in my opinion, any leather with an artificial grain should be glued; the turning-in can be done with paste. The glue adds more substance to the leather and helps preserve the grain. White morocco should be covered with paste made without any alum, which can cause it to turn yellow, and if the leather is washed with lemon juice instead of vinegar during finishing, the color will be significantly better.

Russia is to be pared in the same way as morocco. It should be damped, and rolled with a rolling-pin before covering, or stretched out with a thick folding-stick.

Russia should be treated similarly to morocco. It needs to be dampened and rolled out with a rolling pin before being covered, or stretched using a thick folding stick.

Calf, either coloured or white, need be pared only round the head-band. Calf should be covered with paste and the book washed when covered with a clean damp sponge. In putting two books together, when bound in calf of two different colours, a piece of paper should be placed between, as most colours stain each other, especially green. Care should be taken to handle calf as little as possible whilst wet, and touching it with iron tools, such as knives and band nippers, will cause a black stain. Morocco will bear as much handling as you like, but the more tenderly calf is treated the better.

Calf, whether colored or white, only needs to be trimmed around the headband. The calf should be covered with paste, and the book cleaned with a damp sponge when covered. When binding two books in calf of different colors, a piece of paper should be placed between them, as many colors can stain each other, especially green. Care should be taken to handle calf as little as possible while it's wet, and touching it with metal tools, like knives and band nippers, can leave a black stain. Morocco can be handled as much as you want, but the more gently you treat calf, the better it will be.

Vellum or Parchment.—The boards should be covered with white paper, to avoid any darkness of the board showing through. The vellum or parchment should be pared head and tail, and the whole well pasted and allowed to stand for a short time so that it be well soaked and soft. The book should then be covered, but the vellum must not on any account be stretched much, or it will, when dry, draw the boards up to a most remarkable extent. It will perhaps be better if the book be pressed, to make the vellum adhere better. The old binders took great pains in covering their white vellum books. The vellum was lined carefully with white paper and dried before covering: this in some degree prevented the vellum from shrinking so much in drying, and enabled the workman to give the boards a thin and even coat of glue, which was allowed to dry before putting on the covering. |95|

Vellum or Parchment.—The boards should be covered with white paper to prevent any darkness from the boards from showing through. The vellum or parchment should be trimmed at the top and bottom, and then thoroughly pasted and left to sit for a short while so that it can soak and soften properly. The book should then be covered, but the vellum must not be stretched too much, or it will, when dry, pull the boards in a very noticeable way. It might be better if the book is pressed to help the vellum stick better. The old binders put a lot of effort into covering their white vellum books. The vellum was carefully lined with white paper and dried before being covered; this somewhat prevented the vellum from shrinking so much during drying and allowed the worker to apply a thin and even layer of glue to the boards, which was allowed to dry before adding the covering. |95|

Roan should be covered with glue and turned in with paste. Head and tail only need be pared round the head-band.

Roan should be coated with glue and submitted with paste. Only the head and tail need to be neatly trimmed around the head-band.

Cloth is covered by gluing the cover all over and turning in at once: gluing one cover at a time, and finishing the covering of each book before touching the next.

Cloth is covered by applying glue to the entire cover and folding it in at once: glue one cover at a time, and complete the covering of each book before moving on to the next.

Smooth cloth, cloth with no grain, may be covered with paste: great care must be taken that no paste be on the fingers, or the cloth will be marked very badly when dry.

Smooth fabric, fabric without texture, can be covered with paste: it’s important to be very careful that no paste gets on your fingers, or the fabric will get marked up really badly when it dries.

Velvet should be covered with clean glue not too thick; first glue the back of the book and let that set before the sides are put down. The sides of the book should next be glued, and the velvet laid down, and turned in with glue. The corners should be very carefully cut or they will not meet, or cover properly when dry. When the whole is dry the pile may be raised, should it be finger marked, by holding the book over steam, and if necessary by carefully using a brush.

Velvet should be covered with clean glue that's not too thick; first, glue the back of the book and let that set before attaching the sides. Next, glue the sides of the book, lay down the velvet, and fold it in with glue. The corners should be cut very carefully, or they won't meet or cover properly when dry. Once everything is dry, if there are any finger marks, the pile can be raised by holding the book over steam, and if necessary, use a brush gently.

Silk and Satin should be lined first with a piece of thin paper cut to the size of the book. The paper must be glued with thin clean glue, rubbed down well on to the silk, and allowed to get dry, before covering the book. When dry, cover it as with velvet.

Silk and Satin should be lined first with a piece of thin paper cut to the size of the book. The paper must be glued with thin, clean glue, pressed down well onto the silk, and allowed to dry before covering the book. Once dry, cover it like you would with velvet.

Dr. Dibdin, whose knowledge of libraries and great book collectors must stamp him as an authority, says that:—

Dr. Dibdin, with his extensive knowledge of libraries and renowned book collectors, clearly qualifies as an authority, states that:—

“The general appearance of one’s library is by no means a matter of mere foppery or indifference: it is a sort of cardinal point, to which the tasteful collector does well to attend. You have a right to consider books, as to their outsides, with the eye of a painter; because this does not militate against the proper use of the contents. . . . . Be sparing of red morocco or vellum, they have each so |96| distinct, or what painters call spotty, an appearance, that they should be introduced but circumspectly.”

“The overall look of your library isn’t just a trivial concern or a sign of indifference: it’s an essential aspect that a discerning collector should take seriously. You have every right to view books, in terms of their exteriors, like an artist would; this doesn’t detract from their actual content. . . . . Be cautious with red morocco or vellum; each has such a distinct, or what artists refer to as spotty, appearance that they should be used carefully.”

I cannot agree entirely with the Doctor with regard to being sparing with the red morocco. A library without colour is dark, dreary, and repulsive. The library should be one of the most inviting and cheery rooms in a house, and even if one cannot aspire to a room entirely devoted to literature and study, let the bookcase, whatever its position or however humble, be made as cheerful and inviting as possible. What colour will do this so well as red? But it should be judiciously dispersed with other colours.

I can't completely agree with the Doctor about using less red morocco. A library without color feels dark, dull, and uninviting. The library should be one of the most welcoming and bright rooms in a house, and even if you can't have a room solely for books and study, the bookcase, no matter where it is or how simple, should be as cheerful and inviting as possible. What color does this better than red? But it should be wisely mixed with other colors.

If some standard colour were chosen for each subject, one might recognize from some little distance the nature of the book by its colour. For instance, all books relating to Military matters might be in bright red; Naval affairs in blue; Botany in green; History in dark red; Poetry in some fancy colour, such as orange, light blue, light green, or olive, according to its subject; Divinity in dark brown; Archæology in dull red, and Law in white as at present. This would give a pleasing variety, and a light and cheerful appearance to a library.

If we chose a specific color for each subject, you'd be able to tell what kind of book it is from a distance just by its color. For example, all books about military topics could be bright red; naval subjects could be blue; botany could be green; history could be dark red; poetry could have a fun color like orange, light blue, light green, or olive, depending on the topic; theology could be dark brown; archaeology could be dull red, and law could stay white like it is now. This would create a nice variety and give a light and cheerful vibe to a library.

An imitation russia leather is imported from America, of far greater strength than the real. It is made from buffalo skins, and tanned in the same way as the russia hides. This fact, combined with the price, has doubtless caused this material to be received with favour in the English market. It is to be had from nearly all leather sellers.

An imitation Russian leather is imported from America, much stronger than the real thing. It's made from buffalo skins and tanned the same way as Russian hides. This fact, along with the cost, has definitely made this material popular in the English market. You can find it at almost all leather sellers.

Half-bound Work.—The title speaks for itself, the book has its back, a part of the sides, and the corners covered with leather. The sides are, after the leather is perfectly dry, covered either with cloth or paper according to fancy, turned over the boards as with leather. The book is then to be pasted down. Before the paper is put on the sides, |97| all unevenness of the leather is to be pared away. This style has gained its reputation very much on account of its economy; the amount of leather required is less, and the work is as strong and serviceable as in a whole-bound book. It will be better if the back be finished before the corners are put on, as there is great likelihood that the corners may get damaged to some extent during the process of finishing. The outside paper may either match the colour of the leather, or be the same as the edge or end papers. This, like many other rules in bookbinding, is quite a matter of taste.

Half-bound Work.—The title is self-explanatory; the book has its spine, part of the sides, and the corners covered with leather. Once the leather is completely dry, the sides are covered with either cloth or paper based on preference, folded over the boards just like the leather. The book is then pasted down. Before applying the paper to the sides, |97| any rough edges of the leather should be trimmed down. This style is popular mainly because it's cost-effective; it uses less leather and is just as strong and functional as a fully-bound book. It’s advisable to finish the spine before adding the corners, as the corners can get somewhat damaged during the finishing process. The outside paper can either match the color of the leather or be the same as the endpapers. This, like many other guidelines in bookbinding, really comes down to personal preference.

CHAPTER XXI. Pasting Down.

This is to cover up the inside board by pasting down the end papers to the boards.

This is to cover the inside board by gluing the end papers to the boards.

The white or waste leaf, that has till this process protected the end papers, must now be taken away or torn out. The joint of the board must be cleaned of any paste or glue that may have accumulated there during the course of either gluing up or covering, by passing the point of a sharp knife along it, so that when the end is pasted down, the joint will be quite straight and perfectly square. Morocco books should be filled in with a smooth board or thick paper, the exact substance of the leather. This thickness must be carefully chosen, and one edge be cut off straight, and fastened to the inside of the board very slightly, in fact only touching it in the centre with a little glue or paste, just sufficient to hold it temporarily. It must be |98| flush with the back-edge of the board. When dry, this paper or board is to be marked with a compass about half an inch round, and both paper and leather cut through at the same cut with a sharp knife. The overplus board will fall off and the outside of the leather may be easily detached by lifting it up with a knife. The paper or board, which will now fit in exactly, should be glued and well rubbed down with a folding stick, or it may be pressed in the standing press if the grain of the morocco is to be polished, but not otherwise.

The white or waste leaf that has protected the end papers until now needs to be removed or torn out. The area where the board connects must be cleared of any glue or paste that might have built up during the gluing or covering process by running the point of a sharp knife along it. This ensures that when the end is pasted down, the joint will be perfectly straight and square. For Morocco books, a smooth board or thick paper that matches the leather needs to be used as a filling. The thickness must be carefully selected, and one edge should be cut straight and attached to the inside of the board very lightly, just touching it in the center with a small amount of glue or paste to hold it temporarily. It should be flush with the back edge of the board. Once dry, this paper or board needs to be marked with a compass about half an inch around, and both the paper and leather should be cut through at the same time with a sharp knife. The excess board will fall off, and the outside of the leather can be easily lifted off with a knife. The paper or board, which will now fit perfectly, should be glued down and well rubbed with a folding stick, or it can be pressed in a standing press if the grain of the Morocco is to be polished, but not otherwise.

As morocco books only have morocco joints, I may as well explain at once how they are made. Morocco of the same colour is cut into strips the same length as the book, and about one inch and a half in breadth for 8vo.; a line is drawn or marked down each strip about half an inch from one edge, either with a pencil or folder, as a guide. The leather is now to be pared from the mark made to a thin edge on the half inch side, and the other side pared as thin as the leather turned in round the board, so that there will be two distinct thicknesses on each piece, the larger half going on the board to correspond with the leather round the three sides, and the smaller and thinly pared half going in the joint and edge on to the book. The end papers, only held in with a little paste, are to be lifted out from the book, and the leather well pasted is to be put on the board, so that the place where the division is made in the leather by paring will come exactly to the edge of the board; the thin part should then be well rubbed down in the joint, and the small thin feather edge allowed to go on the book.

As Morocco books only have Morocco joints, I’ll explain how they are made. Morocco of the same color is cut into strips the same length as the book and about one and a half inches wide for 8vo. A line is drawn or marked down each strip about half an inch from one edge, either with a pencil or a folding tool, as a guide. The leather is then pared from the mark to a thin edge on the half-inch side, and the other side is pared as thin as the leather folded around the board, creating two distinct thicknesses on each piece. The larger half goes on the board to match the leather around the three sides, and the smaller, thinner half goes in the joint and edge onto the book. The end papers, which are only held in with a bit of paste, should be lifted out from the book, and the leather, well pasted, should be placed on the board so that the paring division in the leather aligns precisely with the edge of the board. The thin part should then be firmly pressed down in the joint, and the small, thin feather edge should go onto the book.

Great care must be taken to rub the whole down well, that it may adhere properly; the grain need not be heeded. With regard to the overplus at the head and tail, there are two ways of disposing of it: first, by cutting both leathers slanting through at once, and making the two |99| meet; or, secondly, by cutting the cover away in a slant and doing the same to the joint, so that the two slant cuts cover each other exactly. This requires very nice paring, or it will be seen in the finishing. The book should be left till quite dry, which will take some five or six hours. The boards are then to be filled in by the same method as above described, and the end papers fastened in again properly.

Great care must be taken to rub the entire surface well so that it adheres properly; the grain does not need to be a concern. Regarding the extra material at the head and tail, there are two ways to handle it: first, by cutting both pieces of leather diagonally at the same time and bringing the two |99| together; or, second, by cutting the cover away at an angle and doing the same to the joint, ensuring that the two slanted cuts overlap perfectly. This requires very precise trimming, or it will show in the final result. The book should be left to dry completely, which will take about five or six hours. The boards are then filled in using the same method described above, and the end papers need to be attached properly again.

Cloth Joints.—If the cloth has been fastened in when the ends were made, after cleaning all unevenness from the joints, the boards are to be filled in as above, and the cloth joint stuck down with thin glue, and rubbed down well. The marble paper may now be put on the board by cutting it to a size a little larger than the filling in of the board, so that it may be well covered. When cloth joints are put in, the board paper is generally brought up almost close to the joint; but with morocco joints, the space left all round should be even.

Cloth Joints.—If the cloth was attached when the ends were made, after removing all unevenness from the joints, fill in the boards as described above, and stick down the cloth joint with thin glue, rubbing it in well. You can now apply the marble paper to the board by cutting it slightly larger than the filling in of the board to ensure it’s completely covered. When cloth joints are used, the board paper is usually brought almost up to the joint; however, with morocco joints, there should be an even space left all around.

Calf, Russia, etc.—After having cleaned the joint, the leather must be marked all round a trifle larger than the size intended for the end papers to cover. Then with a knife, the leather is cut through in a slanting direction by holding the knife slanting. The boards should be thrown back to protect the leather, and the book placed on a board of proper size, so that both book and board may be moved together, when turning round. When the leather is cut, a piece of paper should be pasted on the board to fill up to the thickness of the leather, and to curve or swing the board back; the boards otherwise are sure to curve the contrary way, especially with calf. When this lining is dry, the end papers may be pasted down. As there are two methods of doing this, I give the most exact but longest first. The paper is to be pasted all over, and being held in the left hand, is to be well rubbed down, particularly in the joint. The paper is then marked all round—the head, foredge, |100| and tail, with a pair of compasses to the width required for finishing inside the board. With a very sharp knife the paper is to be cut through to the depth of the paper only, by laying the straight edge on the marks made by the compasses. This has the advantage of procuring an exact margin round the board, but it must be done quickly or the paper will stick to the leather round the board from the paste getting dry, the leather absorbing the watery particles in the paste.

Calf, Russia, etc.—After cleaning the joint, the leather needs to be marked all around a bit larger than the size intended for the endsheets to cover. Then, with a knife, cut the leather at a slant by holding the knife at an angle. The boards should be pushed back to protect the leather, and the book should be placed on a board of appropriate size, so both the book and board can be moved together when turning it around. Once the leather is cut, a piece of paper should be glued onto the board to match the thickness of the leather and to help curve or bend the board back; otherwise, the boards will likely curve the opposite way, especially with calf. When this lining is dry, the endsheets can be pasted down. There are two methods to do this; I’ll start with the most precise but longer one. The paper is to be glued all over and, while held in the left hand, is to be rubbed down well, especially at the joint. The paper should then be marked all around—the head, foredge, |100| and tail—with a pair of compasses to the width needed for finishing inside the board. With a very sharp knife, the paper is to be cut to the depth of the paper only, by laying the straight edge on the marks made by the compasses. This method ensures an exact margin around the board, but it must be done quickly, or the paper will stick to the leather around the board as the paste dries, with the leather absorbing the moisture from the paste.

The other way is to lay the paper back, and down on the board, and then to mark it. A tin is then to be placed between the book and paper, and the paper cut to the marks made. The paper is then pasted down as above. When pasted down, the book should be left standing on its end, with boards left open until thoroughly dry, which will be about six hours. A tin should be kept especially for cutting on, and the knife must be as sharp as possible. This latter method is used for all half bindings.

The other way is to lay the paper back down on the board and then mark it. A tin should be placed between the book and the paper, and the paper cut to the marks made. The paper is then pasted down as mentioned earlier. Once pasted down, the book should be left standing on its end, with the boards left open until it's completely dry, which will take about six hours. A tin should be reserved specifically for cutting, and the knife must be as sharp as possible. This method is used for all half bindings.

CHAPTER XXII. CALF COLORING.

Although coloured calf-skins may be bought almost as cheaply as smooth calf (the term given to uncoloured ones), yet there are so many reasons why coloured calf should not be used, that I give such instructions as will enable any one to colour, sprinkle, and marble his own leather.

Although colored calfskins can be purchased almost as cheaply as smooth calf (the term for uncolored ones), there are so many reasons not to use colored calf that I will provide instructions for anyone to dye, sprinkle, and marble their own leather.

The skins may, however, be procured already sprinkled or marbled at most leather shops. This plan of sprinkling and marbling the whole skin is good enough for cheap or |101| half-bound work, but for extra work it is far better to sprinkle, marble, or otherwise colour the leather when on the book. Hand-colouring is coming again into use, and by degrees getting known more and more throughout the trade; but a great many secrets in the art have been lost. Before giving the names of the chemicals to be used, I must give a general caution, that if any acid be used on the leather, it is essential to wash as much as possible of it out with water immediately after it has done its work, or after a few months the surface of the leather will be found to be eaten away and destroyed. It is a fault of some of our binders at the present day, that if they use any chemical, either on their leather or on their paper, they are not satisfied to use their acid weak, and allow it to do its work slowly, and when the proper moment has arrived stop its further action, they frequently use the acids as strong as possible, and, either to save time or through ignorance of their chemical properties, do not wash out the residue. The consequence is, the leather or the paper rots. In order to avoid this, I will not recommend any chemicals that will destroy the leather, but give instructions for harmless preparations, by the use of which as great a variety of different styles may be executed as will, I trust, satisfy any reasonable expectation.

The leather can be found pre-sprinkled or marbled at most leather shops. This technique is fine for affordable or partially bound projects, but for higher quality work, it’s much better to sprinkle, marble, or otherwise color the leather while it’s attached to the book. Hand-coloring is making a comeback and is gradually becoming more popular in the industry; however, many secrets of the craft have been lost. Before listing the chemicals to use, I must issue a general warning: if any acid is used on the leather, it’s crucial to rinse out as much as possible with water immediately after it has done its job, or after a few months, the leather’s surface will be damaged and deteriorated. A common mistake among some of today’s binders is that when they use any chemicals, whether on leather or paper, they don’t seem satisfied unless they use strong acids and allow them to work too rapidly, neglecting to stop the process at the right time. They often use acids at full strength and, either to save time or due to a lack of understanding of their chemical properties, fail to rinse off the residue. As a result, the leather or paper ends up rotting. To prevent this, I won't recommend any chemicals that could harm the leather, but instead, I’ll provide instructions for safe preparations that can achieve a wide variety of styles, which I hope will meet any reasonable expectations.

Black.—Sulphate of iron or copperas is the chief ingredient in colouring calf black. Used by itself, it gives a greyish tint, but if a coat of salts of tartar or other alkali be previously used it strikes immediately a rich purple black. The name copperas is probably from the old and mistaken idea that the crystals contain copper. They have a pale greenish blue colour. It can be purchased at the rate of one penny per pound from any drysalter.

Black.—Sulphate of iron or copperas is the main ingredient for dyeing calfskin black. When used alone, it produces a grayish tint, but if you first apply a layer of tartar salts or another alkaline substance, it instantly creates a deep purple-black. The term copperas likely comes from the outdated belief that the crystals contain copper. They actually have a light greenish-blue color. You can buy it for one penny per pound from any drysalter.

1. Into a quart of boiling water, throw a 1 ⁄ 4-lb. of sulphate of iron, let it re-boil, and stand to settle, and then bottle the clear liquid for use. |102|

1. In a quart of boiling water, add a 1/4 lb. of iron sulfate, let it come back to a boil, then let it sit to settle, and finally, bottle the clear liquid for later use. |102|

2. Boil a quart of vinegar with a quantity of old iron nails or steel filings for a few minutes. Keep this in a stone jar, and use the clear liquid. This can from time to time be boiled again with fresh vinegar. An old iron pot must be kept for boiling the black.

2. Boil a quart of vinegar with some old iron nails or steel filings for a few minutes. Store this in a stone jar, and use the clear liquid. You can re-boil it occasionally with fresh vinegar. Keep an old iron pot for boiling the black.

Brown.—1. Dissolve a 1 ⁄ 4-lb. of salts of tartar in a quart of boiling water, and bottle it for use.

Brown.—1. Dissolve a 1/4 lb. of cream of tartar in a quart of boiling water, and bottle it for later use.

This liquid is mostly used for colouring; it has a very mellow tone, and is always used before the black when a strong or deep colour is required. It is poisonous, and must not be used too strong on the calf or it will corrode it.

This liquid is mainly used for coloring; it has a very soft tone and is always applied before the black when a bold or deep color is needed. It is toxic, so it must not be used too strongly on the calf or it will damage it.

2. For a plain brown dye, the green shells of walnuts may be used. They should be broken as much as possible, mixed with water, and allowed to ferment. This liquid should then be strained and bottled for use. A pinch of salt thrown in will help to keep it. This does not in any way corrode the leather, and produces the best uniform tint.

2. For a plain brown dye, you can use the green shells of walnuts. They should be crushed as much as possible, mixed with water, and left to ferment. Then, strain the liquid and bottle it for use. Adding a pinch of salt will help preserve it. This won't damage the leather and creates the best even color.

Yellow.—1. Picric acid dissolved in water forms one of the sharpest yellows. It is a pale yellow of an intense bitter taste. It must not be mixed with any alkali in a dry state, as it forms a very powerful explosive compound. It is a dangerous chemical and should be carefully used. It may be bottled for use.

Yellow.—1. Picric acid dissolved in water creates one of the brightest yellows. It is a light yellow with a strong bitter taste. It should not be mixed with any alkali in a dry form, as it produces a very powerful explosive compound. It is a hazardous chemical and should be handled with care. It can be stored in a bottle for use.

2. Into a bottle put some turmeric powder, and mix well with methylated spirit; the mixture must be shaken occasionally for a few days until the whole of the colour is extracted. This is a very warm yellow, and produces a very good shade when used after salts of tartar.

2. Put some turmeric powder into a bottle and mix it well with methylated spirits; shake the mixture occasionally for a few days until all the color is extracted. This results in a warm yellow that creates a great shade when used after cream of tartar.

For all the following, a preparation or ground of paste-water must be put on the calf, that the liquids may not sink through too much. The calf must be paste-washed all over equally, and allowed to get thoroughly dry. It will then be ready for the various methods. Perhaps to wash it over night and let it stand till next morning will |103| be the best and surest plan. It matters very little whether the calf is on the book or in the skin.

For all of the following steps, you should apply a mixture of paste and water to the calf, so that the liquids don’t soak through too much. The calf should be evenly washed with the paste and then allowed to dry completely. Once it's dry, it will be prepared for the different methods. Washing it overnight and letting it sit until the next morning might be the best and most reliable approach. It doesn’t really matter whether the calf is bound in the book or left in the skin.

Sprinkles.—There are so many sprinkles, that it would be useless for me to enumerate a number, they are all worked in the same manner, by throwing the colour on finely or coarsely, as it may be wanted light or dark.

Sprinkles.—There are so many sprinkles that it would be pointless for me to list them. They all work the same way, by applying the color finely or coarsely, depending on whether a light or dark shade is desired.

Presuming that the paste or ground-wash be thoroughly dry, take liquid salts of tartar and dilute with cold water, one part salts to two of water, in a basin; wash the calf with this liquid evenly, using a soft sponge. The calf will require the wash to be applied two or three times, until a proper and uniform tint be obtained. Each successive wash must be allowed to get thoroughly dry before the next be applied.

Assuming that the paste or ground-wash is completely dry, take liquid cream of tartar and dilute it with cold water, mixing one part of the cream with two parts of water in a bowl; wash the calf with this mixture evenly using a soft sponge. You will need to apply the wash two or three times until you achieve a proper and uniform color. Each wash must be allowed to dry completely before applying the next one.

The next process will be to sprinkle the book, with the boards extended or open. Two pieces of flat wood, about three feet long, four inches in width, and half an inch thick, will be found very useful for supporting the book. These rods must be supported at each end, so that the book may be suspended between them, with the boards resting on the rods nearly horizontally. Now put into a round pan some of the copperas fluid, and into another some of the solution of salts of tartar. Use a pretty large brush for each pan, which brush must be kept each for its own fluid. The sprinkling may be commenced. The brushes being well soaked in the fluids, should be well beaten out, using a piece of broomstick or a hand pin to beat on before beating over the book, unless a coarse sprinkle is desired. Whilst beating over the book, the hands should be held up high, and also moved about, so that a fine and equal spray may be distributed; and this should be continued until the desired depth of colour is attained.

The next step is to spray the book while the covers are open. Two pieces of flat wood, about three feet long, four inches wide, and half an inch thick, are very helpful for supporting the book. These rods need to be held at each end so that the book can hang between them, with the covers resting on the rods almost horizontally. Now, pour some copperas fluid into a round pan, and some solution of tartar salts into another. Use a large brush for each pan, keeping each brush for its specific fluid. You can start spraying now. The brushes, well soaked in the fluids, should be shaken off using a piece of broomstick or a hand pin before you spray over the book, unless you want a coarse spray. While spraying the book, hold your hands high and move them around to create a fine, even mist, and continue this until you achieve the desired color depth.

This may be varied by putting some geometrical design, cut out of thin mill-board, on the cover; or if the book is on any special subject, the subject itself put on the cover |104| will have a very pretty effect, and may be made emblematical. A fern or other leaf for botanical work as an instance. The sprinkle must in these cases be very fine and dark for the better effect. The leaf or design being lifted from the cover when the sprinkle is dry, will leave the ground dark sprinkle with a light brown leaf or design. Cambridge calf is done in this way by cutting a square panel of mill-board out and laying it on the sides. The square on the cover may be left brown or may be dabbed with a sponge.

This can be changed by adding a geometric design cut from thin board to the cover, or if the book is about a specific topic, featuring that topic directly on the cover |104| can create a really nice look and serve as a symbol. For example, using a fern or another leaf for a botanical book. The sprinkle in these cases should be very fine and dark for the best effect. When the leaf or design is removed from the cover once the sprinkle is dry, it will leave a dark sprinkle with a light brown leaf or design. Cambridge calf is made this way by cutting a square panel from the board and placing it on the sides. The square on the cover can either be left brown or lightly dabbed with a sponge.

Marbles.—As the success of marbling depends upon the quickness with which it is executed, it is important that the colours, sponges, brushes and water, should be previously disposed in order and at hand, so that any of them can be taken up instantly. Another point to which attention must be directed is the amount of colour to be thrown on, and consequently the amount that each brush should contain. If too much colour (black) is thrown on, the result will be an invisible marble, or, as I once heard it expressed by a workman, “it could not be seen on account of the fog;” if too little, no matter how nicely the marble is formed, it will be weak and feeble.

Marbles.—Since the success of marbling relies on how quickly it’s done, it’s important to have the colors, sponges, brushes, and water organized and ready to use, so any of them can be grabbed immediately. Another aspect to pay attention to is how much color to apply and therefore how much each brush should hold. If too much color (black) is applied, the marble will become invisible, or as a worker once put it, “it couldn’t be seen because of the fog;” if too little is used, no matter how well the marble looks, it will be weak and fragile.

Marbling on leather is produced by small drops of colouring liquids, drawn, by the flowing of water down an inclined plane, into veins and spread into fantastic forms resembling foliage—hence, often called tree-marble. It is a process that requires great dexterity of hand and perfect coolness and decision, as the least hurry or want of judgment will ruin the most elaborate preparation.

Marbling on leather is created by small drops of colored liquids, which get drawn into veins and spread into amazing shapes that look like foliage as water flows down a sloped surface—this is why it’s often called tree-marble. It’s a process that demands a lot of skill and a calm mindset, because even the slightest rush or poor judgment can ruin the most intricate setup.

To prepare the book paste-wash it evenly all over, and to further equalize the paste-water, pass the palm of the hand over the board after washing it. When dry, wash over with a solution of salts of tartar two or three times to get the desired tint. When dry, glaire the whole as even as possible, and to diminish the froth that the sponge may |105| occasion, put a few drops of milk into the glaire. Again allow it to dry thoroughly. Put some fresh copperas into a pan, and some solution of salts of tartar into another, and soak each brush in its liquid. Place the book upon the rods, the boards extending over and the book hanging between. Should it be desired to let the marble run from back to foredge the back must be elevated a little, and the rods supporting the boards must be level from end to end. If the marble is to run from head to tail, elevate the ends of the rods nearest to the head of the book. The elevation must be very slight or the water will run off too quickly.

To prepare the book, apply the paste evenly all over, and to further distribute the paste-water, glide your palm over the board after washing it. Once dry, wash it with a solution of cream of tartar two or three times to achieve the desired color. When dry, apply the glaze as evenly as possible, and to reduce the foam that the sponge may create, add a few drops of milk into the glaze. Allow it to dry thoroughly again. Put some fresh copperas in one pan and some cream of tartar solution in another, and soak each brush in its liquid. Place the book on the rods, with the boards extending over and the book hanging in between. If you want the marbling to run from the back to the foredge, you need to elevate the back slightly, ensuring the rods supporting the boards are level from end to end. If the marbling is to run from head to tail, lift the ends of the rods closest to the head of the book. The elevation should be minimal, or the water will run off too quickly.

Place a pail of water close at hand, in it a sponge to wash off; and a bunch of birch to throw the water with. A little soda should be added to soften the water. Charge each brush well, and knock out the superfluous colour until a fine spray comes from it. A little oil rubbed in the palm of the hand, and the brush well rubbed into it, will greatly assist the flow of colour from the brush, and also prevent the black colour from frothing. Throw some water over the cover in blotches with the birch, just sufficient to make them unite and flow downwards together. Now sprinkle some black by beating the black brush on a press pin, as evenly and as finely as possible. When sufficient has been thrown on, beat the brown in like manner over the extended boards. When the veins are well struck into the leather, sponge the whole well with clean water. Have no fear in doing this as it will not wash off. Then set the book up to dry.

Place a bucket of water nearby, with a sponge in it for washing off, and a bundle of birch to splash the water around. Add a little soda to soften the water. Load each brush well and tap out the excess color until a fine mist comes from it. Rubbing a bit of oil into your palm, and then working the brush into it, will help the color flow from the brush and prevent the black color from foaming. Splash some water onto the cover in blotches with the birch, just enough to make them merge and flow downwards together. Now sprinkle some black by tapping the black brush against a press pin, as evenly and finely as possible. Once enough has been applied, repeat the process with the brown over the extended boards. When the veins are well pressed into the leather, sponge the whole thing with clean water. Don't worry about this; it won't wash off. Then set the book up to dry.

Tree-marbles.—The cover is to be prepared and sprinkled in the same manner as stated in marbling; the boards, however, must be bent a little, and a little water applied by a sponge in the centre of each board to give the necessary flow of water; when the water is thrown on, it will flow towards the centre or lowest part of the boards, and when the sprinkle is thrown on, a tree, as it were, will be |106| formed. The centre being white forms the stem, and from it branches will be formed by the gradual flow of the streams of water as they run down.

Tree marbling.—Prepare the cover and sprinkle it just like in regular marbling; however, the boards need to be slightly bent, and you should apply a little water with a sponge in the center of each board to create the necessary flow. When you pour the water on, it will move toward the center or lowest part of the boards, and when you sprinkle the colors on, a tree will be formed. The white center acts as the trunk, and branches will develop from the gradual flow of water as it runs down.

For marbling, every thing must be ready at hand before any water is thrown on, so that the water may not have time to run off before the colour is applied. The water must run at the same time that the spray is falling, or a failure will be the result.

For marbling, everything needs to be prepared beforehand before any water is splashed on, so the water doesn't have time to drain away before the color is added. The water has to flow at the same moment the spray is falling, or you'll end up with a failure.

It has been said that marbling was discovered by an accident; that a country bookbinder was sprinkling some books, when a bird, which was hung up in the shop, threw or splashed some water down on his books; the water running, took some of the colour with it and formed veins. Liking the form it gave, the workman improved upon it and thus invented marbling. There is, however, no doubt that it had its origin in Germany.

It’s been said that marbling was discovered by accident. A bookbinder in the countryside was sprinkling some books when a bird, hanging in the shop, splashed water onto them. The water mixed with some color, creating veins. Liking the design it produced, the worker improved upon it and essentially invented marbling. However, it's clear that it originated in Germany.

Tree calf seems to be coming into general use again, and to meet the demand for cheapness, a wood block has been cut resembling as closely as possible one done by the water process, and blocked in black on the calf; but, as might have been expected, it has not found much favour.

Tree calf seems to be making a comeback, and to keep costs low, a wood block has been created that closely mimics one made by the water process, with a black block on the calf. However, as expected, it hasn't gained much popularity.

Dabs.—This is a process with a sponge, charged with the black or the brown liquid, dabbed on the calf either all over the cover or in successive order. Give the proper preparation to the calf, and be very careful that the ground tint of brown be very even. Take a sponge of an open nature, so that the grain is pleasant to the eye; fill it with black and squeeze out again, now dab it carefully over the calf. Repeat the operation with another sponge charged with brown. Cat’s paw, French dab, and other various named operations all emanate from the sponge. When done properly this has a very good effect, and gives great relief to the eye when placed with a number of other books.

Dabs.—This is a technique using a sponge dipped in either black or brown liquid, applied to the calf in a consistent or sequential manner. Prepare the calf properly, ensuring the brown undercoat is uniform. Use a sponge with an open texture to ensure it looks nice; soak it with black and squeeze out the excess, then gently dab it over the calf. Repeat the process with another sponge filled with brown. Techniques like cat’s paw, French dab, and other variously named methods all come from using the sponge. When done correctly, this creates a pleasing effect and enhances the visual appeal when displayed among other books.

All these marbles and sprinkles require practice, so that |107| a first failure must not be regarded with discouragement. When one’s hand has got into the method with these two or three colours it is astonishing how many different styles may be produced. In all this manipulation a better effect is obtained if a yellow tint be washed over the leather after the sprinkle or marble has been produced. Again, by taking coloured calf and treating it in the same manner as white, some very pleasant effects are brought out; and when the colours are well chosen the result is very good. Take for instance a green calf and marble a tree upon it, or take a light slate colour and dab it all over with black and brown.

All these marbles and sprinkles take practice, so a first failure shouldn't be seen as discouraging. Once you get the hang of it with these two or three colors, you'll be surprised by how many different styles you can create. You'll achieve a better effect if you wash a yellow tint over the leather after making the sprinkle or marble. Also, by using colored calf and treating it the same way as white, you can bring out some really nice effects; and when the colors are well chosen, the result is excellent. For example, take a green calf and marble a tree on it, or use a light slate color and splatter it with black and brown.

In all operations with the copperas care must be taken that it does not get on the clothes, as it leaves an iron stain that cannot be easily got rid of. Keep a bason for each colour, and when done with wash it out with clean water. The same with the sponges: keep them as clean as possible; have a sponge for each colour, and use it only for that colour. A piece of glass to put the sponges on will be of great use, and prevent the work-table or board from catching any of the colour. A damp book or damp paper laid on a board that has been so stained will most probably be damaged, even though it has waste paper between the work-board and book. No amount of washing will ever take away such a stain.

In all dealings with copperas, be careful not to get it on your clothes, as it leaves an iron stain that’s really hard to remove. Keep a separate basin for each color, and remember to rinse it out with clean water when you’re done. Do the same with the sponges: keep them as clean as possible; have a sponge for each color, and use it only for that color. A piece of glass to place the sponges on will be very useful and will help keep your work table or board from getting stained. If a damp book or damp paper is laid on a board that has been stained, it will likely be damaged, even if there’s waste paper in between the board and the book. No amount of washing will ever remove that stain.

When the book has been coloured, the edges and inside are to be blacked or browned according to taste, or in keeping with the outside. The book is then ready for finishing.

When the book has been colored, the edges and inside should be painted black or brown based on personal preference or to match the outside. The book is then ready for finishing.

Some very good results may be obtained if the binder, using coloured calf of a light brown, treats it as if it were white calf, marbling with the usual colours; or a yellow calf, splashing it all over with salts of tartar only, the boards being placed in a slanting direction to allow the colour to gently run down. |108|

Some great results can be achieved if the binder uses light brown calfskin and treats it like white calfskin, marbling it with the usual colors; or using yellow calfskin, splashing it with just tartar salts, with the boards positioned at an angle to let the color gently flow down. |108|

Or the whole of a cover may be blacked with tartar and copperas, then with a diluted solution of acid it may be sprinkled, this will give grey-white spots on black or slate ground: if, after washing, the cover be sponged over with some colouring liquid, such as analine dyes, the spots will be of the colour used.

Or the entire cover can be covered with tartar and copperas, then sprinkled with a diluted acid solution, which will create gray-white spots on a black or slate background. If, after washing, the cover is wiped with a coloring liquid, like aniline dyes, the spots will take on the color used.

I do not give many methods or receipts for producing colours for calf, because, as before stated, the introduction of fancy calf has rendered obsolete the old-fashioned way of boiling and preparing the different woods for making colours, and the above will be found useful for colouring calf in many different ways.

I don’t provide many methods or recipes for creating colors for calf skin, because, as mentioned earlier, the introduction of fancy calf has made the old-fashioned process of boiling and preparing various woods for making colors outdated. The information above will be helpful for coloring calf in many different ways.

PART II. COMPLETE.

RENAISSANCE.
Roy folio.
T. Way, Photo-Lith.

CHAPTER XXIII. Finishing.

Monastic Tools.

Finishing is the art of embellishing the covers of books with different designs. Finishing comprises the embellishment of the covers either with blind work, gold, silver or platina leaf, or with metal ornaments fastened through the boards, or by only a lettering on the back of the book.

Finishing is the art of decorating book covers with various designs. It involves enhancing the covers using techniques like blind stamping, gold, silver, or platinum leaf, adding metal ornaments attached through the boards, or simply having lettering on the spine of the book.

The art of finishing does not com­prise any em­bel­lish­ment done with the “block­ing press.” There­in the art is more that of the block or tool cutter, who, working in concert with the artist who drew the design, cuts the metal accordingly. The binder’s use of these blocks is mechanical only.

The art of finishing doesn't involve any decoration done with the “blocking press.” Instead, it’s more about the block or tool cutter, who, working together with the artist who created the design, cuts the metal accordingly. The binder’s use of these blocks is purely mechanical.

The monks who cult­i­vat­ed all the arts, and en­riched their Hours and their Missals with mar­vel­lous min­ia­tures, gave great zeal to the oc­cu­pa­tion of bind­ing. So charm­ing­ly were the bind­ings orn­a­ment­ed with tools and small blocks re­pro­duced from the text, that we must regret that so few of these monas­tic bind­ings are now left to us.

The monks who developed all the arts and enhanced their Hours and Missals with beautiful miniatures put a lot of effort into the craft of bookbinding. The bindings were so beautifully decorated with tools and small designs taken from the text that it's unfortunate that so few of these monastic bindings remain today.

A great number of these books were exe­cuted in Germany, where this mode of dec­or­a­tion remained a long time in use; and we find that other count­ries bor­rowed from the printer this prim­i­tive mode of dec­ora­tion. As the art pro­gressed the binder’s mark was im­pressed on the cover as an orn­a­ment, or as a dis­tinc­tion, such as we find at the present day at the end or after the title of books to denote by what printer the work was executed. Later on, when the Renaissance shone in all its glory and beauty, we find that it freed itself from this limited practice. A new mode |112| of decoration came into use, which we may well study, even at the present day; a style at once rich and varied. If we follow the bold interlacing lines which form the skeletons of those infinite and varied designs, we catch the imaginative caprices of their authors; and the details of their transformation gives us a guide to the different schools and art of their time. The execution of these linear designs is extremely difficult. It can be easily seen that they have not been done by a block engraved in one piece, but with small segments.8 The art of putting together these small pieces, so as to form one complete and artistic pattern, is the skill of the finisher. Many books are now finished by means of the blocking press; but on close examination, these imitations may be readily distinguished. A blocked cover never has the life and spirit that a hand-finished one has. Of blocking I must speak in subsequent pages.

A large number of these books were produced in Germany, where this style of decoration was used for a long time. We see that other countries adopted this primitive decorative style from printers. As the art developed, the binder's mark was pressed onto the cover as an ornament or a distinction, similar to what we find today at the end or after the title of books to indicate which printer created the work. Later, when the Renaissance blossomed in all its glory and beauty, it broke away from this restricted practice. A new style of decoration emerged that is worth studying even today; a style that is both rich and varied. If we look at the bold, interlacing lines that create the framework of those countless and diverse designs, we catch glimpses of the creative whims of their creators; and the details of their transformation provide insight into the various schools and art movements of their time. Creating these linear designs is extremely challenging. It’s clear that they weren’t made from a single engraved block, but rather from small segments. The skill of assembling these small pieces to create one cohesive and artistic pattern belongs to the finisher. Many books now have their covers finished using a blocking press; however, upon closer inspection, these imitations can easily be identified. A blocked cover lacks the life and spirit that a hand-finished one possesses. I will discuss blocking in more detail in later pages.

[8] There are a few exceptions to this on a few old books of 12mo. size. One may now and then see such designs worked in one piece certainly by a block.
ANTIQUE WITH GOLD LINE.
Imperial 8vo.
T. Way, Photo Lith.
Venetian.
Grolier.

These intrinsic designs were very much used by the |113| binders contemporary with Grolier, and the use of lined or azuré tools are a distinctive mark of the period. This is the connecting link with the Italian bindings. It will be observed that the Italian or Venetian tools are solid, while in the other style the tools, although of the same shape, are lined or azuré. A little later on other artists, not satisfied with this modification, dispensed with the |114| fine cross lines, and retained their outlines only. France, during the reign of Henry II., left Italy far behind, and executed those grand compositions of Diane bindings. They are marvellous subjects, and are sometimes imitated at the present day, but are never surpassed in their wonderful originality.

These unique designs were commonly used by the binders who were around during the time of Grolier, and the use of lined or azurée tools is a distinctive feature of that era. This creates a link with the Italian bindings. It's noticeable that the Italian or Venetian tools are solid, while in the other style, the tools, although shaped the same, are lined or azurée. Shortly after, other artists, not happy with this change, got rid of the fine cross lines and kept just the outlines. During the reign of Henry II., France advanced way beyond Italy, creating the impressive Diane bindings. These are incredible designs, and while they are sometimes imitated today, they can never be matched in their remarkable originality.

DEROME.
4to
T. Way, Photo-lith.
Le Gascon.

After these masterpieces we find the curious bindings of Henry III., which instantly mark a distinct transformation. The interlacings are less bold and free, but more geometrically traced. The absence of filling in with small tools gives a coldness, which is increased by a heavy coat of arms on the sides. This form of decoration exercised a great influence, and from this epoch another school sprung up. Later on in time these interlacings served as a ground plan only for the brilliant fantasies of Le Gascon, a master who no doubt has had the least number of imitators. Although he followed and to a certain extent kept the shapes, the aspect of his bindings was very much changed by the application of pointed tools. Le Gascon rests for ever as the most renowned master of the 16th century. The number of tools necessary for the execution of a composition like one of Le Gascon’s is large; and when one considers that these tools are repeated, perhaps a thousand |115| times on each side of the book, a fair idea may be formed of the magnitude of such a work. I am of opinion that Le Gascon brought bookbinding to its highest point of richness and finish. His drawings are always pure and correct; his squares, lozenges, triangles, and ovals are so brought together as to form a series of compartments interlacing the one within the other, with an incomparable boldness and perfect harmony; above all, one must remark with what richness the compartments are filled. There is no doubt the ground work of the style was Grolier, but he never filled his panels with such richness or with such taste as that displayed by Le Gascon. The difficulty of adapting such designs to the different sizes of books has no doubt deterred the various masters from imitating such works, so that we see less of Le Gascon’s style than of any other ancient master.

After these masterpieces, we see the intriguing bindings of Henry III, which clearly highlight a significant shift. The interlacings are less bold and free but more geometrically defined. The lack of small tool detailing creates a cold effect, which is intensified by a heavy coat of arms on the sides. This style of decoration had a substantial impact, leading to the emergence of another school. Later, these interlacings became a foundation for the brilliant designs of Le Gascon, a master who likely has the fewest imitators. Although he followed and somewhat maintained the shapes, the look of his bindings changed greatly due to the use of pointed tools. Le Gascon remains forever recognized as the most famous master of the 16th century. The number of tools needed to create a composition like one of Le Gascon’s is considerable; when you think that these tools are repeated, perhaps a thousand |115| times on each side of the book, you can get a sense of the scale of such a work. I believe Le Gascon brought bookbinding to its peak in terms of richness and finish. His designs are always clean and precise; his squares, diamonds, triangles, and ovals are arranged to create a series of compartments interlocking with one another, showcasing unmatched boldness and perfect harmony; above all, the richness of the filled compartments is striking. There’s no doubt that the foundation of this style was Grolier, but he never adorned his panels with such vibrancy or taste as Le Gascon. The challenge of adapting such designs to various book sizes has likely discouraged other masters from trying to replicate Le Gascon’s works, which is why we see less of his style compared to other ancient masters.

Derome.

From Le Gascon’s period the tools became thicker and thicker, until we have the heavy tools of Derome, which are much in keeping for books of a serious character. They are original in shape, but their employment was only in borders, leaving the centre of the book free from ornament. |116| I do not pretend to give a history of the various masters, but rather a practical description of the art of bookbinding. Much has already been written about the various works executed by these grand old masters; my endeavour has been to show, that whilst the various masters of the art of bookbinding worked with tools but little altered from their original forms, they so modified and changed them in their character and use, as to form a distinctive mark of style for each artist, by which his work may be recognized.

From Le Gascon’s time, the tools became thicker and thicker, leading up to the heavy tools of Derome, which are quite fitting for serious books. They have a unique shape, but they were only used for borders, leaving the center of the book free of decoration. |116| I'm not aiming to provide a history of the different masters; instead, I'm giving a practical description of the art of bookbinding. A lot has already been written about the works of these great old masters; my goal is to show that, while the various masters of bookbinding used tools that remained mostly unchanged from their original forms, they adapted and modified them in their character and use, creating a distinctive style for each artist, making their work recognizable.

A pamphlet, published in Paris, 1878, says: “One of the branches of artistic industry in which France possesses unquestionable superiority is certainly bookbinding; the International Exhibitions, and still more the sales of private or other collections, have each day given evident proof of this. Italy, which initiated herself so perfectly in the Renaissance style, and Holland, once her rival in the 17th century, have long ceased to produce any work worthy of remark; everywhere books are being bound, but the ‘art’ of bookbinding is practised only in France.”

A pamphlet published in Paris in 1878 says: “One of the areas of artistic industry where France clearly excels is bookbinding; the International Exhibitions, and even more so the sales of private and other collections, have repeatedly demonstrated this. Italy, which mastered the Renaissance style, and Holland, once her competitor in the 17th century, have long stopped producing any noteworthy work; books are being bound everywhere, but the ‘art’ of bookbinding is only truly practiced in France.”

I cannot agree with its authors that one must go to France now to have a book bound properly. The method of bookbinding is quite differently managed and worked there than it is here. I have witnessed both methods, and prefer the English one as being more substantial.

I can't agree with its authors that you have to go to France now to get a book properly bound. The way of bookbinding is handled and done differently there than it is here. I've seen both methods, and I prefer the English one because it's more durable.

HAND-FINISHING.—We were first taught to work the gold leaf on books by a method not now employed, except, perhaps, by a novice, who wishes to get his books done before his glaire has dried. This method was to damp the cover well with water, either with a wet sponge or by other means. The gold leaf was then laid on, and the tool worked rather warm on the gold. Through the heat or steam generated the gold was burnt in, and the overplus washed off with a damp sponge or rag, the gold being left only in the impressions. If, however, any block or centre |117| was used, it was impressed with heat upon the side in a small lying press in use at the period. This press was known then as an arming press, because used commonly for impressing armorial bearings and monograms on the sides. The term arming press is still used for the lighter kinds of blocking presses.

Hand finishing.—We were first taught to apply gold leaf to books using a method that's not widely used now, except maybe by someone new who wants to finish their books before the glue dries. This method involved soaking the cover thoroughly with water, using a wet sponge or something similar. The gold leaf was then placed on top, and a tool was used while it was warm against the gold. The heat or steam created allowed the gold to adhere, and any excess was wiped away with a damp sponge or rag, leaving the gold only in the impressions. However, if a block or center|117| was used, it was pressed with heat on the side in a small lying press that was common at the time. This press was known as an arming press, as it was typically used for impressing coat of arms and monograms on the sides. The term arming press is still used for the lighter types of blocking presses.

Hand-finishing, as before stated, is really an art. The finisher should be able to draw, or at least have some knowledge of composition, and also know something about the harmony of colours. The workman not having any knowledge of drawing cannot expect to be a good finisher; because he cannot possibly produce any good designs, or by a combination of the small tools form a perfect and correct pattern. Taste has no small influence in the success of the workman in this branch of the art. It is better to finish books plainly, rather than put on the least portion of gold more than is necessary. If the intentions of the books’ owner is to put some special style or design into his bookcase, it will be well to think over the various styles before deciding upon any particular one. Before going thoroughly into the working details a few preliminary words may be permitted.

Hand-finishing, as mentioned before, is truly an art. The finisher should be able to draw or at least have some understanding of composition, and also know something about color harmony. A worker without any knowledge of drawing can't expect to be a good finisher because they wouldn't be able to create good designs or use small tools to form a perfect and accurate pattern. Taste plays a significant role in the success of the worker in this field. It’s better to finish books simply rather than adding any gold beyond what’s necessary. If the book owner's intention is to create a specific style or design for their bookshelf, it’s wise to consider the different styles before settling on one. Before diving into the detailed work, a few introductory remarks may be in order.

Let the tools be always in keeping with the book, both in size and character. Large ones should be used only on a large book, and those of less size for smaller works. A book on Natural History should have a bird, insect, shell, or other tool indicative of the contents. A flower should be used on works on Botany, and all other works be treated in the same emblematical manner; so that the nature of the book may be understood by a glance at the back. In lettering, see that the letters are of a size proportionate to the book—legible, but not too bold. They should neither be so large as to prevent the whole of the title being read at one view, nor so small as to present a difficulty in ascertaining the subject of a book when on the shelf. |118| Amongst a large number of books there should be an agreeable variety of styles, so that the effect may be in harmony with the colours around, and produce as pleasing a contrast as possible.

Let the tools always match the book, both in size and style. Use large tools only for large books, and smaller ones for smaller works. A book on Natural History should feature a bird, insect, shell, or another tool that reflects its content. A flower should be used for works on Botany, and all other works should follow this symbolic approach, so the nature of the book can be understood at a glance. For lettering, make sure the letters are proportional to the book—readable, but not overly bold. They shouldn't be so large that the entire title can't be read in one glance, nor so small that it's hard to figure out the subject when the book is on the shelf. |118| Among a large collection of books, there should be an attractive variety of styles to create an effect that harmonizes with the surrounding colors and provides as pleasing a contrast as possible.

Type-holder. Pallet.
Fillet.

Tools and Materials required for Finishing.Rolls, fillets, pallets, centre and corner tools of every possible class and character; type of various sizes for the lettering of books or labels. The type may be either of brass or of the usual printer’s metal; if the latter be chosen, care must be taken that it be not left at the fire too long, or it will melt. Type-holders to hold the type, which are made to fit the respective sizes are necessary, but one or two with a spring side, adjusted by screw at the side, will be found convenient for any sized type. In England it is the custom to letter books with hand letters, each letter being separate and fixed in a handle. I have, however, little doubt that these will in time be laid aside, and that the type and type case will be found in every bookbinder’s shop.

Tools and Materials Required for Finishing.Rolls, fillets, pallets, and various types of center and corner tools; types of different sizes for lettering books or labels. The type can be made of brass or the usual printer’s metal; if you choose the latter, make sure not to leave it in the fire too long, or it will melt. You'll need type-holders that fit the different sizes, but having one or two with a spring side, adjustable by a screw on the side, will be handy for any size of type. In England, it's common to letter books with hand letters, where each letter is separate and fixed in a handle. However, I'm pretty sure these will eventually be phased out, and type and type cases will become standard in every bookbinder’s shop.

Polishing irons. Of these two are necessary—one for the sides and one for the backs. There is generally a third |119| kept for polishing the board end papers when pasted down, which should be kept for this purpose only.

Polishing irons. You need two of these—one for the sides and one for the backs. Usually, there’s a third |119| kept specifically for polishing the board end papers when they're glued down, and it should be used solely for that purpose.

Polishing Iron.

A gold-rag, to wipe off the surplus gold from the back or side of a book. It should have a little oil well worked into it, so that when it has been wiped over the back or side the gold may adhere and remain in it. This rag when full of gold will be of a dirty yellow, and may then be melted down by any of the gold-refiners and the waste gold recovered.

A gold rag is used to wipe off extra gold from the back or side of a book. It should have a bit of oil worked into it, so that when it's used on the back or side, the gold sticks and stays on. Once the rag is full of gold, it will look a dirty yellow and can then be melted down by any gold refiners to recover the wasted gold.

India-rubber, cut up very small—the smaller the better—and steeped in turpentine, so as to render it as soft as possible, to be used for clearing away any gold not taken off by the gold-rag. This should also be melted down when full.9

India rubber, chopped up into tiny pieces—the tinier, the better—and soaked in turpentine to make it as soft as possible, is used for removing any gold that the gold rag didn't catch. This should also be melted down when it's full.9

[9] Messrs. Cow and Co., Cheapside, have lately prepared my rubber ready for use. I find it of great convenience.

Gold-cushion, for use as explained in Chapter XVII.

Gold-cushion, for use as described in Chapter XVII.

Gold leaf. The best should be used, it keeps its colour better, and is much more easy to work than the commoner metal usually sold.

Gold leaf. The best quality should be used; it retains its color better and is much easier to work with than the cheaper metal typically sold.

Sponges, both large and small—the large ones for paste-washing, the smaller for glairing and sizing.

Sponges, both big and small—the big ones for cleaning with paste, the smaller ones for applying egg white and sizing.

Glaire may be purchased already prepared, or it may be made from the white of egg, which must be very carefully beaten up to a froth with an egg whisk. In breaking the egg care must be taken not to let any of the yolk get amongst the white. A little vinegar should be mixed with the white before beating up, and a drop of ammonia, or a grain or two of common table salt, or a small piece of camphor, will in some measure prevent it from turning putrid, |120| as it is liable to do. Some workmen always have a stock of “good old glaire,” as they term it, by them, fancying that it produces better work, but this is a mistaken notion, often productive of annoyance, and destructive to the comfort of the workmen. I advise the finisher to beat his glaire from an egg as he may require it. When well beaten, allow it to stand for some hours, and then pour the clear liquid into a bottle for use. I have had some dried albumen sent me, but its working has not given me such satisfaction as that freshly prepared; it may answer the purpose in other hands, but with me the gold appears to have been burnt in.

Glaire can be bought pre-made, or you can make it from egg whites, which need to be whipped up carefully with an egg whisk until frothy. When breaking the egg, be careful not to let any yolk mix with the whites. It's a good idea to add a little vinegar to the whites before whipping. A drop of ammonia, a couple of grains of table salt, or a small piece of camphor can help prevent it from going bad, as it tends to do. Some workers always keep a supply of what they call “good old glaire,” believing it makes their work better, but this is a misconception that often leads to frustration and discomfort for them. I recommend that finishers whip up their glaire from an egg as needed. Once it's well beaten, let it sit for a few hours, then pour the clear liquid into a bottle for future use. I've received some dried albumen, but it hasn't performed as well for me as freshly made glaire; it might work fine for others, but for me, it seems like the gold has been burnt in. |120|

Cotton wool, for taking up the gold leaf and pressing it firmly on the leather.

Cotton wool, for picking up the gold leaf and pressing it down firmly on the leather.

Varnish should always be used on that part where glaire has been applied, after it has been polished; the object being to retain the brilliancy, and to preserve the leather from the ravages of flies and other insects which are attracted by the glaire; these pests do great damage to the covers of books which have been prepared with glaire, by eating it off. They also take away the surface of the leather and spoil the good appearance of the books. Varnish may be purchased at all prices: use only the best, and be very sparing with it.

Varnish should always be applied to the areas where glaire has been used, after polishing. The goal is to maintain the shine and protect the leather from damage caused by flies and other insects attracted to the glaire. These pests can cause significant harm to the covers of books prepared with glaire by eating it away. They also remove the surface of the leather, ruining the appearance of the books. Varnish is available at various price points: choose only the best quality and use it sparingly.

A small pair of spring dividers, some lard, sweet oil, and lastly, but most important, the finishing stove. Before gas was introduced the finishing stove in use was the now almost extinct charcoal fire. A bookbinder’s gas stove can now be purchased at almost any gas-fitter’s shop or bookbinders’ material dealers. The price varies according to size.

A small pair of spring dividers, some lard, sweet oil, and last but not least, the finishing stove. Before gas became common, the finishing stove used was the now nearly obsolete charcoal fire. You can now buy a bookbinder’s gas stove at almost any gas-fitter’s shop or from suppliers of bookbinding materials. The price varies based on size.

Leo’s Oil Finishing Stove.

A stove burning paraffin oil may now be had from Leo of |121| Stuttgart, which he guarantees smokeless and free from soot; where gas is not obtainable, this will be found very handy.

A paraffin oil stove is now available from Leo of |121| Stuttgart, which he guarantees to be smokeless and soot-free; this will be very useful where gas isn’t available.

Many still prefer the charcoal fire. To such a stove a pipe should be fixed to conduct the fumes away into the open air or up a chimney. To make such a stove any old tin may be utilized. Make a number of large holes through the sides; fill it with some live charcoal, and place a perforated tin plate on the top. It will keep alight for hours, and impart quite enough heat for any purpose required. This primitive stove, however, must be placed on a stand or on a piece of thick iron, lest it become dangerous.

Many still prefer charcoal fires. For this kind of stove, a pipe should be attached to direct the fumes outside or up a chimney. You can make this stove using any old tin. Just create several large holes in the sides, fill it with hot charcoal, and put a perforated tin plate on top. It will stay lit for hours and provide enough heat for whatever you need. However, this basic stove should be placed on a stand or a thick piece of iron to avoid any safety hazards.

A finishing press is a small press, having two sides of solid wood with wooden screws at each end, the cheeks should be of width enough to allow the sides of a book to be finished comfortably when the boards are extended, the book itself being held by the press which is screwed up tightly. The press should, however, be light enough to enable the finisher to easily turn it round, as it frequently must be, while finishing a book.

A finishing press is a small device made of solid wood on both sides with wooden screws at each end. The sides should be wide enough to comfortably finish the edges of a book when the boards are extended, while the book itself is securely held by the press, which is tightened with screws. However, the press should be light enough for the finisher to easily rotate it, as it often needs to be turned while finishing a book.

Finishing Press. The reverse side is quite flat, used when sides of books are being finished.

Mr. Leo has a press (patented) which he claims gives more freedom for finishing a book, but with it one can only finish the back of a book; there are, however, many good points that our English makers may well study. |122|

Mr. Leo has a patented press that he says offers more flexibility for finishing a book, but with it, you can only finish the back of a book; however, there are many good aspects that our English manufacturers should definitely consider. |122|

Finishing is divided into two classes—blind or antique, or, as it is sometimes called, monastic and gold-finished.

Finishing is divided into two categories—blind or antique, or, as it is sometimes referred to, monastic and gold-finished.

The term antique is mostly known in the trade; and when morocco antique or calf antique is mentioned, it means that the whole of the finishing is to be done in blind tooling. Not only this, but that the boards should be very thick and bevelled, and the edges either dull gilt or red, or gilt over red. This class of work is used extensively for religious books. A gold line introduced and intermixed with blind work gives a great relief to any class of antique work.

The term antique is mostly used in the industry; and when morocco antique or calf antique is mentioned, it means that all the finishing is done with blind tooling. Not only that, but the boards should be very thick and beveled, and the edges can be dull gilt or red, or gilt over red. This type of work is widely used for religious books. A gold line added and mixed with blind work provides a striking contrast to any type of antique work.

Leo’s Finishing Press.

It is not necessary that a special set of tools be kept for antique work, although some would look quite out of keeping if worked in gold. As a general rule antique tools are bold and solid, such as Venetian tools, whilst those for gold work are cut finer and are well shaded. The greater number work equally well in gold and in blind, but when a special style has to be followed the various tools and their adaptation to that style must be studied.

It’s not essential to have a specific set of tools for antique work, although some would definitely look odd if used with gold. Generally, antique tools are bold and sturdy, like Venetian tools, while those for gold work are more delicately crafted and well-shaded. Most tools work just as well for both gold and blind work, but when a specific style needs to be followed, it’s important to study the various tools and how they fit that style.

The general colour of the blind work is dark brown, and the proper way of working these antique tools is to take them warm and work them on the damp leather a number of times, thus singeing or burning as it were the surface only, until it has assumed its proper degree of colour. |123| Antique work, as a decoration, requires quite as much dexterity and care as gold work. Every line must be straight, and the tools must be worked properly on the leather, both in colour and depth; and as the tools have to be worked many times on the same spot, it requires a very steady hand and great care not to double them. Some consider blind work as preparatory to gold work, and that it gives experience in the method of handling and working the various tools, and the degree of heat required for different leathers without burning them through. The leather on which this work is mostly executed is morocco and calf.

The overall color of blind work is dark brown, and the right way to use these antique tools is to heat them up and press them onto damp leather several times. This process singes or burns just the surface until it reaches the right shade. |123| Antique work, as decoration, requires just as much skill and care as gold work. Every line has to be straight, and the tools need to be used correctly on the leather, both in color and depth. Since the tools have to be applied multiple times to the same area, it takes a steady hand and careful attention to avoid overlapping. Some people see blind work as a stepping stone to gold work, as it helps build experience in handling and using different tools, as well as understanding the right temperature needed for various types of leather without burning through them. The leather most commonly used for this work is morocco and calf.

Antique Stamps.

In finishing the back of a book it must always be held tightly in the “finishing press.” When in the press, mark the head and tail as a guide for the pallets by running a folding-stick along the edge of a piece of parchment or vellum held by the finger and thumb of the left hand against the sides of the volume across the back at the proper place. When two or more books of the same character and size are to range together, the backs must be compassed up so that the lines head and tail may run continuous when finished. In using the pallet, hold it firmly in the right hand, and let the working motion proceed from the wrist only, as if it were a pivot. It will be |124| found rather difficult at first to work the pallets straight over the back and even to the sides of the bands, but after a little practice it will become easy to accomplish.

When finishing the back of a book, it must always be held tightly in the "finishing press." While in the press, mark the top and bottom as a guide for the pallets by running a folding stick along the edge of a piece of parchment or vellum, which you hold with your left hand against the sides of the book across the back at the right spot. When two or more books of the same type and size are to be aligned together, their backs must be shaped so that the lines at the top and bottom run continuously when finished. When using the pallet, hold it firmly in your right hand, and let the motion come from your wrist only, as if it were a pivot. It might be a bit tricky at first to move the pallets straight over the back and to the sides of the bands, but with a little practice, it will become easy to do.

Morocco. Flexible work, as a rule, has blind lines, a broad and a narrow one, worked close to the bands. Damp the back with a sponge and clean water, and work the moisture evenly into the leather with a hard clean brush. Take a pallet of a size suitable to the book, warm it over the stove, and work it firmly over the back. As the leather dries, make the pallet hotter; this will generally be found sufficient to produce the required dark lines. Sometimes it will be necessary to damp the different places two or three times in order to get the proper colour in the blind tooling.

Morocco. Flexible work usually has blind lines, both broad and narrow, done close to the bands. Wet the back with a sponge and clean water, then work the moisture evenly into the leather with a hard, clean brush. Take a pallet that's the right size for the book, warm it over the stove, and press it firmly against the back. As the leather dries, make the pallet hotter; this is generally enough to create the desired dark lines. Sometimes, it may be necessary to dampen the spots two or three times to achieve the right color in the blind tooling.

The tools may have a tendency to stick to the leather and possibly burn it. To obviate this, take 11 ⁄ 4 oz. of white wax and 1 oz. of deer fat or lard, place them in a pipkin over a fire or in a warm place, so that they may be well mixed together; when mixed allow them to cool. Rub some of this mixture upon the rough or fleshy side of a piece of waste morocco, and when working any tools in blind, rub them occasionally over the prepared surface. This mixture will be found of great service in getting the tools to slip or come away from the leather in working. Lard alone is sometimes used, but this mixture will be found of greater service to any finisher, and the advantage of adding the wax will be apparent.

The tools can sometimes stick to the leather and may even burn it. To prevent this, take 1¼ oz. of white wax and 1 oz. of deer fat or lard, and place them in a small pot over a fire or in a warm spot to mix them well. Once mixed, let it cool. Apply some of this mixture to the rough or fleshy side of a scrap piece of morocco, and when working with any tools blind, rub them occasionally on the prepared surface. This mixture will really help the tools to slide off the leather while working. While lard alone is sometimes used, this mixture will be much more useful for any finisher, and you'll clearly see the benefits of adding the wax.

The lines impressed on the back must now have their gloss given to them. This is done by giggering the pallets over them. Make the pallet rather hot, rub it over the greased piece of leather, and work it backwards and forwards in the impression previously made. Great care must be taken that the pallet be kept steadily in the impressions already made, or they will be doubled. The back is now ready for lettering. This will be found further on, classed under gold work. |125|

The lines marked on the back now need to be polished. This is done by giggering the pallets over them. Heat the pallet, rub it on the greased piece of leather, and move it back and forth over the impression you've already made. Be very careful to keep the pallet steady in the existing impressions; otherwise, they will overlap. The back is now ready for lettering, which will be covered later under gold work. |125|

To blind tool the side of a book it must be marked with a folder and straight edge, according to the pattern to be produced, and as a guide for the rolls and tools to be used. These lines form the ground plan for any design that has to be worked. Damp the whole of the side with a sponge, and brush it as before directed; then work the fillets along the lines marked. Run them over the same line two or three times. When dry, make the fillet immovable by driving a wooden wedge between the roll and fork, and gigger it backwards and forwards to produce the gloss. If tools are to be worked, make them slightly warm, and as the leather dries make the tool hotter and hotter. This must be repeated as often as is necessary, until the desired depth of colour and gloss is obtained. In using a roll that has a running or continuous pattern, a mark should be made upon the side with a file, at the exact point that first comes in contact with the leather, so that the same flower, scroll, or other design, may always fall in the same place in the repeated workings. It is impossible for a roll to be cut so exactly that it may be worked from any point in the circumference without doubling the design. All blind work is done in the same manner, whether in using a small or a large tool, viz., the leather must be damped and repeatedly worked until the depth of colour is obtained. It is then allowed to dry, and re-worked to produce the gloss. The beauty of blind work consists in making the whole of the finishing of one uniform colour, in other words, avoiding the fault of having any portion of the work of lighter tint than the rest.

To blind tool the side of a book, it should be marked with a folder and a straight edge, according to the pattern to be produced, and used as a guide for the rolls and tools. These lines create the foundation for any design that needs to be applied. Wet the entire side with a sponge and brush it as previously instructed; then work the fillets along the marked lines. Go over the same line two or three times. Once dry, secure the fillet by inserting a wooden wedge between the roll and fork, then move it back and forth to create a shine. If tools are used, warm them slightly, and as the leather dries, increase the tool's temperature. This process should be repeated as often as necessary until the desired depth of color and shine is achieved. When using a roll with a continuous pattern, mark the side with a file at the exact spot that first touches the leather, so the same flower, scroll, or design always aligns in the same place during repeated work. It's impossible for a roll to be cut so precisely that it can be used from any point along its circumference without repeating the design. All blind work is done in the same way, whether with a small or large tool; that is, the leather must be dampened and worked repeatedly until the desired depth of color is reached. It is then allowed to dry and worked again to achieve the shine. The beauty of blind work lies in ensuring that all the finishing has a uniform color, meaning avoiding any lighter shades in parts of the work compared to the rest.

Gold Work is far more complicated than blind or antique work, so that it will be better if one practises upon some spare pieces of roan, calf, or morocco before one attempts to finish a book. Gold work is not more difficult than blind tooling, it is only more complicated. The |126| different kinds of leather require such different degrees of heat, that what would fail to make the gold adhere upon one leather would burn through another. The various colours each require their different degrees of heat; as a rule, light fancy colours require less heat than dark ones. The finisher has not only to contend with these difficulties, but he must also become an adept in handling the gold leaf and in using the proper medium by which the gold is made to adhere to the leather. This medium is used in two ways—wet and dry. The wet is used for leather, the dry for velvet, satin, silk, and paper.

Gold Work is much more complicated than blind or antique work, so it’s better to practice on some spare pieces of roan, calf, or morocco before trying to finish a book. Gold work isn't necessarily harder than blind tooling; it’s just more intricate. The different types of leather need different amounts of heat, so what works for one type might burn through another. Each color requires its own specific heat level; generally, lighter colors need less heat than darker ones. The finisher has to deal with these challenges and also needs to be skilled in handling gold leaf and using the right medium for making the gold stick to the leather. This medium can be applied in two ways—wet and dry. The wet medium is used for leather, while the dry one is meant for velvet, satin, silk, and paper.

The wet medium is again divided into two classes, one for non-porous and another for porous leather. Morocco is the principal of the non-porous leathers, with roan and all other imitation morocco.

The wet medium is again divided into two classes, one for non-porous and another for porous leather. Morocco is the main type of non-porous leather, along with roan and all other imitation morocco.

The porous varieties consist of calf of all kinds, russia, and sheep.

The porous types include all kinds of calfskin, Russian leather, and sheepskin.

The non-porous leathers need only be washed with thin paste-water or vinegar, and glaired once; but if the glaire be thin or weak it will be necessary to give them a second coat.

The non-porous leathers only need to be cleaned with thin paste-water or vinegar and coated with glaire once; however, if the glaire is thin or weak, a second coat will be necessary.

The porous varieties must be paste-washed carefully, sized all over very evenly, and glaired once or twice; care being taken that the size and glaire be laid on as evenly as possible.

The porous types need to be washed with paste carefully, sized evenly all over, and glazed once or twice; making sure that the size and glaze are applied as evenly as possible.

All this, although apparently so simple, must be well kept in mind, because the great difficulty that apprentices have to contend with is, that they do not know the proper medium for the various leathers, and one book may be prepared too much, while another may have a deficiency, and as a consequence, one book will be spoilt by the preparation cracking, and the gold not adhere to the other. By following the directions here given the finisher will find that his gold will adhere without much trouble, beyond the practice necessary in becoming accustomed to an accurate use of the various tools. |127|

All of this, while seemingly simple, needs to be remembered because the main challenge apprentices face is not knowing the right medium for different types of leather. One book might be over-prepared while another could be lacking, leading to issues like the preparation cracking and the gold not sticking properly. By following the instructions provided here, the finisher will find that the gold adheres with minimal trouble, aside from the practice needed to get comfortable with using the various tools accurately. |127|

Suppose that a half morocco book is before us to be neatly finished and lettered. Take a broad and narrow pallet of a suitable and proper size, and work it against the bands in blind as a guide for finishing in gold. As the impression need be but very slight, warm the pallet on the gas stove but very little. Choose some suitable tool as a centre piece to go between the bands. Work this also lightly on the back exactly in the centre of each panel. This must be worked as truly as possible and perfectly straight. A line made previously with a folding-stick along the centre of the back will greatly assist in the working of a tool in its proper position. Now wash the back with vinegar, and brush it well with a hard brush to disperse the moisture and drive it equally into the leather; some use paste-water for this purpose instead of vinegar. Paste-water has a tendency to turn grey in the course of time, and this is avoided in using vinegar; vinegar also imparts freshness to the morocco, and keeps it moist a longer time, which is very desirable when finishing morocco.

Suppose we have a half morocco book in front of us that needs to be neatly finished and lettered. Take a broad and narrow pallet of appropriate size, and use it against the bands in blind as a guide for gold finishing. Since the impression only needs to be very slight, warm the pallet on the gas stove just a little. Choose a suitable tool as a centerpiece to go between the bands. Lightly apply this on the back, precisely in the center of each panel. It must be positioned as accurately as possible and perfectly straight. A line drawn beforehand with a folding stick along the center of the back will help significantly in working the tool in the right position. Now wash the back with vinegar and brush it well with a hard brush to spread the moisture evenly into the leather; some people use paste-water for this instead of vinegar. Paste-water can turn grey over time, which can be avoided by using vinegar; vinegar also keeps the morocco fresh and moist longer, which is very useful when finishing morocco.

The impressions made by the broad and narrow pallet and the centre tool are now to be pencilled in with glaire; when dry, pencil in another coat; allow this again to dry, then rub them very slightly with a piece of oiled cotton wool. Take a leaf of gold from the book and spread it out evenly on the gold cushion; cut it as nearly to the various shapes and sizes of the tools as possible. Now take up one of the pieces of gold upon a large pad of cotton wool, previously greased slightly by drawing it over the head. (There is always a sufficient amount of natural grease in the hair to cause the gold to adhere to the cotton when so treated.) Lay the gold gently but firmly on the impressed leather. See that the whole of the impression is covered, and that the gold is not broken. Should it be necessary to put on another piece of gold leaf, gently breathing on the first will make the second adhere. When all the impressions are covered |128| with gold leaf, take one of the tools heated to such a degree that when a drop of water is applied it does not hiss but dries instantly; work it exactly in the blind impressions. Repeat this to the whole of the impressions, and wipe the overplus of gold off with the gold rag. The impressions are now supposed to be worked properly in gold; but if there are any parts where the gold does not adhere, they must be re-glaired and worked in again. A saucer should be placed near at hand, with water and a piece of rag or a sponge in it, to cool any tool and reduce it to its proper heat before using. If the tool be used too hot, the gold impression will be dull; if too cold, the gold will not adhere. To use all tools of the exact degree of heat required is one of the experiences of the skilled workman. The back is now ready for the title. Set up the proper words in a type-case, of a type sufficiently large and suitable to the book. The chief word of the title should be in somewhat larger size than the rest, the others diminishing, so that a pleasant arrangement of form be attained. In order to adjust the length of the words, it may be necessary to space some of them—that is, to put between each letter a small piece of metal called a space. Square the type, or make the face of the letters perfectly level, by pressing the face of them against a flat surface before tightening the screw. They must be exactly level one with another, or in the working some of them will be invisible. Screw up the type-case, warm it over the finishing stove, and work the letters carefully in blind as a guide. Damp the whole of the lettering space with vinegar. When dry, pencil the impressions in twice with glaire. Then lay the gold on and work them in gold.

The impressions made by the wide and narrow tools and the center tool should now be outlined with a glaze. After it dries, add another coat, let it dry again, and then lightly rub them with a piece of oiled cotton wool. Take a sheet of gold from the book and spread it evenly on the gold cushion; cut it as close to the various shapes and sizes of the tools as you can. Now pick up one of the pieces of gold using a large pad of cotton wool, which you’ve slightly greased by rubbing it over your head. (There’s usually enough natural grease in your hair to help the gold stick to the cotton when treated this way.) Gently but firmly lay the gold onto the impressed leather. Make sure the entire impression is covered and that the gold doesn’t tear. If you need to add another piece of gold leaf, gently breathing on the first will help the second stick. Once all the impressions are covered with gold leaf, take one of the tools heated just enough that when a drop of water is applied, it doesn’t sizzle but dries instantly; use it to work precisely into the blind impressions. Do this for all the impressions and wipe away any excess gold with a gold rag. The impressions should now be properly gilded, but if there are any spots where the gold hasn’t stuck, you’ll need to re-glaze and work those areas again. Keep a saucer nearby with water and a rag or sponge in it to cool any tool and bring it to the right temperature before using it. If the tool is too hot, the gold impression will be dull; if too cold, the gold won’t stick. Gaining the right temperature for all tools is part of the skill set of an experienced craftsman. The back is now ready for the title. Set the appropriate words in a type-case with a type size that's large enough and suitable for the book. The main word of the title should be a bit larger than the others, which should gradually decrease in size to create a nice balance. To adjust the spacing of the words, you might need to add space, which means placing small pieces of metal between each letter. Level the type, making the faces of the letters perfectly flat by pressing them against a smooth surface before tightening the screw. They need to be level with each other, or some of them will not show during the process. Secure the type-case, warm it over the finishing stove, and carefully work the letters in blind as a guide. Moisten the entire lettering area with vinegar. Once dry, pencil the impressions twice with a glaze. Then lay the gold on and work it in.

But with lead type and a spring type-case (a method more suitable for some binders on account of its relative cheapness and the convenience of the case fitting itself to the different sizes of the type, of which the binder will want |129| a selection of various sizes), the type-case must be warmed before the type is put in. The heat of the case should impart sufficient heat for the type to be worked properly. If the case and type be put on the stove, the type will probably be melted if not watched very narrowly. Hand letters are letters fixed in handles, each used as a single tool. The letters should be arranged in alphabetical order round the finishing stove, and as each letter is wanted it is taken from the order, worked, and replaced. They are still very much used in England, but where two or more books are to have the same lettering, brass type is very much better. It does its work more uniformly than hand letters, however skillfully used.

But with lead type and a spring type-case (a method that's better for some binders because it's relatively inexpensive and the case adapts to different type sizes, which the binder will need a variety of), the type-case has to be warmed before adding the type. The heat from the case should provide enough warmth for the type to be used properly. If the case and type are placed on the stove, the type might melt if not closely monitored. Hand letters are letters fixed in handles, each serving as a single tool. The letters should be arranged in alphabetical order around the finishing stove, and whenever a letter is needed, it is taken from the order, worked, and returned. They're still widely used in England, but when two or more books need the same lettering, brass type is much better. It produces more consistent results than hand letters, no matter how skillfully they're used.

   Pallets.    Panel entirely finished.    Band.    Panel mitred in gold, with title and small   corners.    Band.    Panel mitred and cornered with centre tool.    Band.    Panel mitred and cornered.    Band.    Panel mitred.    Band.    Panel marked out in blind for finishing.    Small tail panel with date.    Pallet.
Showing progressive Stages of Finishing.
Cut showing the use of Mitrepiece.

When this simple finishing can be executed properly and with ease, a more difficult task of finishing may be attempted, such as a full gilt back. This is done in two ways, a “run-up” back and a “mitred” back. As a general rule morocco is always mitred. Place the book on its side, lift up the mill-board, and make a mark head and tail on the back, a little away from the hinge of the back. Then with a folder and straight edge mark the whole length of the back: this is to be done on both sides. Make another line the whole length down the exact centre of the back. With a pair of dividers take the measurement of the spaces between the bands, and mark the size, head and tail, for the panels from the top and bottom band; with a folder and strip of parchment make a line across the back, head and tail, at the mark made by the dividers. Work a thin broad and narrow pallet alongside the bands in blind. Prepare the whole of the back with vinegar and glaire, as above described, but lay the glaire on with a sponge. When dry, lay the gold on, covering the whole of the back with it, mending any breaks. For mitreing, take a two-line pallet that has the ends cut at an angle of 45°, so that the joint at that angle may be perfect. Work this on the side at the |131| mark made up the back, and up to the line made in blind across the back. Repeat this to each panel. The two-line pallet must be worked across the back and up to the lines made in gold; the cutting of the pallet at the angle will allow of the union or mitre, so that each panel is independent of the other. There will be a space left, head and tail, which may be filled up with any fancy pallet or repetition of tools. The corners should be in keeping with the centre, and large enough to fit the panel. Work these from the sides of the square made, or from the centre of the panel, as will be found most convenient, according to the thickness of the book and style of finishing, and then fill in any small stops. When the whole is done, rub the gold off with the gold-rag, and use the india-rubber if necessary. The title has now to be put on, which is done in the same manner as before described.

When this simple finishing is done correctly and easily, a more challenging finishing task can be attempted, like a full gilt back. This is done in two ways: a “run-up” back and a “mitred” back. Generally, morocco is always mitred. Lay the book on its side, lift the mill-board, and mark the head and tail on the back, slightly away from the hinge. Then, using a folder and straight edge, mark the entire length of the back on both sides. Make another line down the exact center of the back. With a pair of dividers, measure the spaces between the bands and mark the size for the panels from the top and bottom bands; with a folder and a strip of parchment, make a line across the back, head and tail, at the marks made by the dividers. Use a thin broad and narrow pallet to work alongside the bands in blind. Prepare the entire back with vinegar and glaire as described earlier, but apply the glaire with a sponge. Once dry, lay the gold over the entire back, fixing any breaks. For mitring, take a two-line pallet with ends cut at a 45° angle so that the joint will be perfect. Work this on the side at the mark made up the back, and up to the line made in blind across the back. Repeat this for each panel. The two-line pallet needs to be worked across the back and up to the gold lines; the angled cut will allow for the union or mitre, making each panel independent. There will be space left at the head and tail, which can be filled with any decorative pallet or tool repetition. The corners should match the center and be large enough to fit the panel. Work these from the sides of the square made, or from the center of the panel, based on what’s most convenient depending on the thickness of the book and finishing style, then fill in any small stops. Once everything is finished, rub off the gold with a gold rag, using the rubber if necessary. Finally, the title needs to be added, which is done in the same way as previously described.

It is not always necessary that the finishing be done in blind first. I have explained it, and advocate its being so worked first as easier for a learner. One who is accustomed to finishing finds that a few lines marked previously with a folding-stick is all that is required. When working the title, a thread of silk drawn tightly across the gold produces a line sufficient, and is the only guide that an experienced workman requires.

It’s not always necessary for the finishing to be done in blind first. I’ve explained this and recommend it be done this way first because it’s easier for someone who’s learning. Someone who is used to finishing finds that just a few lines marked beforehand with a folding stick is all that’s needed. When working on the title, a thread of silk pulled tight across the gold creates a line that’s enough, and it’s the only guide an experienced worker needs.

To finish a side, make a mark with the folder and straight edge as a guide for any rolls or fillets. Prepare the leather as before described where the ornamentation is to come; but if the pattern is elaborate it must be worked first in blind. As a greater facility, take a piece of paper of good quality and well sized. Draw the pattern you wish to produce on the paper, and if any tools are to be used, hold them over the flame of gas; this will smoke them so that |132| they may be worked on the paper in black. When the pattern is complete in every detail, tip the four corners of the paper with a little paste, then work the pattern through the paper on to the leather, using the various sized gouges as the scrolls require, and a single line fillet where there are lines. Work thus the complete pattern in blind. This being done completely, take the paper off from the four corners, place it on the other side, and work it in the same way. Prepare the leather with vinegar, and pencil out with glaire the whole of the pattern. If the whole side be glaired with a sponge it will leave a glossy appearance that is very undesirable. The whole of the side is now to be laid on with gold, and the pattern worked again with the warm tools, in the previous or blind impressions.

To finish a side, make a mark with the folder and straight edge to guide any rolls or fillets. Prepare the leather as previously described where the decoration will be; if the pattern is complex, it should be done first in blind. For better ease, take a piece of good quality, well-sized paper. Draw the pattern you want to create on the paper, and if you’re using any tools, hold them over the gas flame; this will smoke them so you can work with them on the paper in black. Once the pattern is fully detailed, apply a little paste to the four corners of the paper, then trace the pattern onto the leather through the paper, using various sized gouges as needed for the scrolls, and a single line fillet for straight lines. Complete the pattern in blind this way. Once finished, lift the paper off from the four corners, flip it over, and trace it onto the other side in the same manner. Prepare the leather with vinegar, and outline the entire pattern with glaire. If the whole side is glaired with a sponge, it will end up with an unwanted glossy finish. Now, apply gold to the entire side and rework the pattern with warm tools, creating the earlier blind impressions.

The inside of a book is generally finished before the outside. This should be done as neatly as possible, carefully mitreing the corners when any lines are used. Most frequently a roll is used, thus saving a great deal of time. A style was introduced in France called “doublé,” the inside of the board being covered with a coloured morocco different to the outside, instead of having board papers. This inside leather was very elaborately finished; generally with a “dentelle” border, while the outside had only a line or two in blind. It is a style which, although very good in itself, is not now in great request, many prefer to have the finishing outside rather than to have it covered up and not seen when the book is shut.

The inside of a book is usually completed before the outside. This should be done as neatly as possible, carefully mitreing the corners when lines are used. Most often, a roll is used, saving a lot of time. A style introduced in France called “doublé” features the inside of the board covered with a different colored morocco than the outside, instead of using board papers. This inside leather was very elaborately finished, typically with a “dentelle” border, while the outside had only a line or two in blind. Although this style is quite nice in its own right, it isn't very popular now; many people prefer the finishing to be on the outside rather than covered up and hidden when the book is closed.

GROLIER.
Demy folio.

The edges of the boards and the headbands must be finished either in gold or blind, according to fancy, but in keeping with the rest of the embellishment. A fine line worked on the centre of the edge of the board by means of a fillet looks better, and of course requires more pains than simply running a roll over it. If it is to be in gold, simply glairing the edge is sufficient. Lay on the gold and work the fillet carefully. Place the book on its ends in the |133| finishing press to keep it steady, or it will shake and throw the fillet off. If a roll is used, take the gold up on the roll, but grease it first a little, by rubbing the gold rag over the edge to make the gold adhere. Then run the roll along the edge of the boards: the roll generally used for this purpose is called a bar roll—that is, one having a series of lines running at right angles with the edge of the roll.

The edges of the boards and the headbands should be finished in either gold or blind, depending on your preference, but they should match the rest of the decoration. A fine line created in the center of the edge of the board using a fillet looks better and, of course, takes more effort than just rolling over it. If you choose gold, simply glairing the edge is enough. Apply the gold and carefully work the fillet. Position the book on its ends in the |133| finishing press to keep it steady, or it will shake and misalign the fillet. If you're using a roll, pick up the gold onto the roll, but first, lightly grease it by rubbing the gold rag over the edge to help the gold stick. Then roll it along the edges of the boards; the type of roll usually used for this is called a bar roll, which has a series of lines running at right angles to the edge of the roll.

Imitation morocco is generally used for publishers’ bindings, where books are in large numbers and small in price, and the finishing is all done with the blocking press: To finish this leather by hand, it is advisable to wash it with paste-water and glaire twice.

Imitation morocco is typically used for publisher bindings, where books are produced in high volumes and are low in cost, and the finishing is entirely done with a blocking press. To finish this leather by hand, it's recommended to wash it with paste water and egg white twice.

Roan is generally used for circulating library work, and is very seldom finished with more than a few lines and the title across the back. This leather is prepared with paste-wash and glaire, and, when complete, varnished over the whole surface.

Roan is typically used for library circulation work and is rarely finished with more than a few lines and the title on the back. This leather is treated with paste-wash and glaire, and when it’s done, it’s varnished over the entire surface.

Inlaid Work.—Inlaid, or mosaic work, is used only in the higher branches of bookbinding. Formerly books were not inlaid, but painted with various colours. Grolier used a great deal of black, white, and green. Mr. Tuckett, the late binder to the British Museum, took out a patent for extracting one colour from leather and substituting another by chemical action. This method, however, was in use and known long before he turned his attention to the subject, although he improved greatly upon the old practice. As the patent has long expired, it may not be out of place to give an extract from the specification: “Take dark chocolate colour, and after the design has been traced thereon, it is then to be picked out or pencilled in with suitable chemicals, say diluted nitric acid; this will change the chocolate, leaving the design a bright red on a chocolate ground.” But to lay on the various colours with leather is, no doubt, by far the better plan. Paint has a tendency in time to crack, and, if acids are used, they will, to a certain |134| extent, rot or destroy the leather; but if leather is used it will always retain both colour and texture. To choose the proper colours that will harmonize with the ground, give tone, and produce a pleasing effect, requires a certain amount of study. Morocco is the leather generally used, but in Vienna calf has been used with very good results. If the pattern to be inlaid be very small, steel punches of the exact shape of the tools are used to punch or cut out the patterns required. To do this, work the pattern in blind on the side of the book; take morocco of a different colour to the ground it is required to decorate, and pare it down as thin as possible. Lay it on a slab of lead. Lead is better than anything else on account of its softness; the marks made by the punch can always be beaten out again, and when quite used up it may be re-melted and run out anew. Now take the steel punch of an exact facsimile of the tool used that is to be inlaid, and punch out from the leather the required number. These are to be pasted and laid very carefully on the exact spot made by the blind-tooling; press each down well into the leather, either with a folding-stick or the fingers, so that it adheres properly. When dry, the book should be pressed between polished plates, in order that the pieces that have been laid on, may be pressed well into the ground leather. When it has been pressed, the whole of the leather must be prepared as for morocco, and finished in gold. The tools in the working will hide all the edges of the various inlaid pieces, provided they are laid on exactly.

Inlaid Work.—Inlaid, or mosaic work, is only used in the higher levels of bookbinding. In the past, books weren’t inlaid; they were painted in various colors. Grolier often used a lot of black, white, and green. Mr. Tuckett, the former binder for the British Museum, patented a method for extracting one color from leather and replacing it with another through chemical means. However, this technique was already known and used long before he took an interest in it, though he made significant improvements to the existing practice. Since the patent has long expired, it’s fitting to include an excerpt from the specification: “Take dark chocolate color, and after the design has been traced on it, you should pick it out or pencil it in with suitable chemicals, like diluted nitric acid; this will change the chocolate, leaving the design a bright red on a chocolate background.” However, applying different colors with leather is, without a doubt, the much better option. Paint tends to crack over time, and using acids can partially rot or damage the leather; but leather will always maintain both its color and texture. Choosing the right colors that will blend well with the background, add tone, and create a pleasing effect takes a bit of study. Morocco leather is the most commonly used, but in Vienna, calf leather has also been used with great success. If the inlaid pattern is very small, steel punches shaped like the tools are used to punch or cut out the required designs. To do this, work the pattern in blind on the side of the book; take morocco of a different color than the background it is intended to decorate, and shave it down as thin as possible. Place it on a slab of lead. Lead is preferred due to its softness; the marks made by the punch can easily be beaten out again, and when it’s fully used up, it can be melted down and reshaped. Now take the steel punch that is an exact replica of the tool that will be inlaid, and punch out the necessary number from the leather. These should be pasted and carefully placed on the exact spot made by the blind-tooling; press each down firmly into the leather, using either a folding stick or your fingers, to ensure they stick properly. Once dry, the book should be pressed between polished plates, so the pieces laid on can be pressed firmly into the underlying leather. After pressing, the entire leather must be prepared as if for morocco, and finished with gold. The tools used in the process will cover all the edges of the various inlaid pieces, as long as they are applied accurately.

MAIOLI.
Royal folio.
T. Way, Photo Lith.

If interlacing bands are to be of various colours, the bands must be cut out. Pare the leather thin, and after working the pattern through the paper on to the sides of the book, lay it on the thinly pared leather; with a very sharp and pointed knife cut through the paper and leather together on a soft board. Or the design may be worked or drawn on a thin board, and the various bands cut out |135| of the board as patterns. Lay these on the thin leather and cut round them. Keep these board templates for any future use of the same patterns. The various pieces are to be well pasted, carefully adjusted in their places, and well rubbed down. The leather is then to be prepared and worked off in gold.

If you want to use different colored bands, you need to cut them out. Trim the leather thinly, and after transferring the pattern onto the sides of the book using paper, place it on the thinly trimmed leather. With a very sharp, pointed knife, cut through both the paper and the leather on a soft board. Alternatively, you can create the design on a thin board and cut out the various bands from the board to use as templates. Place these templates on the thin leather and cut around them. Keep these board templates for future use with the same patterns. Make sure to paste the pieces well, align them carefully, and smooth them down properly. Then, prepare the leather and apply gold to it.

Another method is to work the pattern in blind on the sides. Pare the morocco thin, and while damp place it upon the portion of the pattern to be inlaid, and press it well with the fingers, so that the design is impressed into it. Lay the leather carefully on some soft board, and cut round the lines made visible by the pressure with a very sharp knife. When cut out, paste and lay them on the book and prepare as before, and finish in gold. I do not recommend this last method as being of much value; I give it only because it is sometimes chosen; but for any good work, where accuracy is required, either of the plans mentioned previously are to be preferred.

Another method is to work the pattern in blind on the sides. Thinly pare the morocco leather, and while it's damp, place it over the part of the pattern you want to inlay, then press it firmly with your fingers to imprint the design into it. Carefully lay the leather on a soft board and cut around the lines made visible by the pressure with a very sharp knife. Once cut out, paste and position them on the book and prepare as before, then finish in gold. I don’t recommend this last method as being very valuable; I mention it only because it is sometimes preferred; but for any quality work where accuracy is important, either of the methods mentioned earlier is better.

The Viennese work their calf in quite a different manner, in fact, in the same way that the cabinet-makers inlay their woodwork. With a very sharp and thin knife they cut right through two leathers laid the one on the other. The bottom one is then lifted out and replaced by the top one. By this method the one fits exactly into the other, so that, if properly done, the junctions are so neatly made that no finishing is required to cover the line where the two colours meet.

The Viennese work with calf leather in a completely different way, similar to how cabinet-makers inlay their woodwork. They use a very sharp, thin knife to cut through two layers of leather stacked on top of each other. The bottom layer is then removed and swapped with the top one. This technique ensures that the two pieces fit perfectly together, so that if done correctly, the seams are so well-made that no finishing is needed to hide where the two colors meet.

The frontispiece to this treatise is a copy of a book bound by my father for one of the Exhibitions. The ground is of red morocco, inlaid with green, brown, and black morocco. The pattern may be called “Renaissance.” The inside of the boards are “Grolier,” inlaid as elaborately as the outside. Seven months’ labour was expended on the outside decoration of this volume.

The frontispiece of this treatise shows a book that my father bound for one of the Exhibitions. The cover is made of red morocco leather, inlaid with green, brown, and black morocco. The design is what you would call “Renaissance.” The inside of the covers features a “Grolier” style, inlaid just as intricately as the outside. It took seven months of work to decorate the outside of this volume.

Porous.Calf, as before described, requires more and |136| different preparation than morocco, on account of its soft and absorbing nature. As a foundation or groundwork, paste of different degrees of strength is used, according to the various work required.

Porous.Calf, as previously described, needs more and |136| different preparation than morocco because of its soft and absorbent nature. A paste of varying strengths is used as a base, depending on the specific work needed.

Calf books have generally a morocco lettering piece of a different colour to the calf on the back for the title. This is, however, optional, and may or may not be used, according to taste. Leather lettering pieces have a great tendency to peel off, especially if the book be exposed to a hot atmosphere, or if the paste has been badly made, so that it is perhaps better if the calf itself be lettered. There is no doubt that a better effect is produced in a bookcase when a good assortment of coloured lettering pieces are placed on the variously coloured backs, and the titles can be more easily read than if they were upon light or sprinkled calf; but where wear and tear have to be studied, as in public libraries, a volume should not have any lettering pieces. All such books should be lettered on their natural ground.

Calfskin books usually have a different color leather label on the spine for the title. This is optional and can be used depending on personal preference. Leather labels often peel off, especially if the book is in a hot environment or if the adhesive wasn't applied properly, so it might be better to letter directly onto the calfskin itself. It’s clear that a nicer appearance is created in a bookcase when there’s a good mix of colored labels on the variously colored spines, and the titles are easier to read than if they were on light or speckled calfskin. However, in cases where durability is important, like in public libraries, a book shouldn’t have any labels at all. All such books should be lettered on their natural spine.

For lettering pieces, take morocco10 of any colour, according to fancy, and having wetted it to facilitate the work, pare it down as thin and as evenly as possible. Cut it to size of the panel or space it is intended to fit. When cut truly, pare the edges all round, paste it well, put it on the place and rub well down. Should the book require two pieces—or one for the title, and one for the volume or contents—it is better to vary the colours. I must caution the workman not to allow the leather to come over on to the joint, as by the frequent opening or moving of the boards the edge of the leather will become loose. A very good plan as a substitute for lettering pieces is to colour the calf either dark brown or black, thus saving the leather at the expense of a little more time. When the lettering |137| pieces are dry, mark the back, head and tail, for the pallets or other tools with a folding-stick. Apply with a brush paste all over the back. With a thick folding-stick, or with the handle of an old tooth brush, which is better, rub the paste into the back. Before it has time to dry, take the overplus off with rather a hard sponge, dipped in thin paste-water. The learner will perhaps wonder why paste of full strength should be used for the back, and only paste-water for the sides. The reason is, that through the stretching of the leather over the back in covering, the pores are more open, and consequently require more filling up to make a firm ground. Much depends upon the groundwork being properly applied; and a general caution with regard to the working in general may not be here amiss. Finishing, above all other departments, demands perfect cleanliness. A book may have the most graceful designs, the tools be worked perfectly and clearly, but be spoiled by having a dirty appearance. See that everything is clean—paste-water, size, glaire, sponges, and brushes. Do not lay any gold on until the preparation be perfectly dry, or the gold will adhere and cause a dirty yellow stain where wiped off.

For lettering pieces, take morocco leather of any color you like, and wet it to make the work easier. Trim it down as thin and evenly as you can. Cut it to the size of the panel or space it will fit into. When cut accurately, trim the edges all around, apply paste generously, place it in position, and rub it down well. If the book needs two pieces—one for the title and one for the volume or contents—it’s better to mix up the colors. I must warn the worker not to let the leather overlap onto the joint, as frequent opening or moving of the boards can cause the leather edges to become loose. A good alternative to lettering pieces is to dye the calf leather either dark brown or black, which saves leather but takes a bit more time. Once the lettering pieces are dry, mark the back, head, and tail for the pallets or other tools using a folding stick. Use a brush to apply paste all over the back. With a thick folding stick or the handle of an old toothbrush, which is preferable, rub the paste into the back. Before it dries, remove the excess with a fairly firm sponge dipped in thin paste-water. The learner might wonder why full-strength paste is used for the back while only paste-water is used for the sides. The reason is that the leather stretches when covering the back, making the pores more open and requiring more filling to create a firm base. Properly applying the groundwork is crucial, and it’s worth mentioning a general caution about working in general. Finishing, especially, requires perfect cleanliness. A book can have the most elegant designs and perfectly executed tools, but if it looks dirty, it will be ruined. Make sure everything is clean—paste-water, size, glaire, sponges, and brushes. Don’t apply any gold until the preparation is completely dry, or the gold will stick and leave a dirty yellow stain when wiped off.

[10] Other leathers are often used instead of morocco, even paper; in fact a specially prepared paper is largely sold in Germany for this purpose.

Should the calf book be intended to have only a pallet alongside the bands, it is only necessary, when the paste-wash is quite dry, to glaire that portion which is to be gilt: this is usually done with a camel’s hair brush, by laying on two coats. When dry, cut the gold into strips, and take one up on the pallet and work it on the calf. This is what is termed calf neat. The band on each side is gilt, leaving the rest of the leather in its natural state. Some binders polish their backs instead of leaving them dead or dull. This, however, is entirely according to taste, whether so large a space be left polished only.

If the calf book is meant to have just a pallet next to the bands, you only need to glaze the area you want to gild after the paste-wash is completely dry. This is usually done with a camel's hair brush, applying two coats. Once it's dry, cut the gold into strips, pick one up with the pallet, and press it onto the calf. This method is called calf neat. The bands on each side are gilded, while the rest of the leather remains untouched. Some binders choose to polish their backs instead of leaving them matte or dull. However, whether to leave such a large area polished is purely a matter of personal preference.

Samples of Backs suitable for Calf Work.

Full Gilt Back.Run-up. Make a mark up the back on both sides a little away from the joint with a folder and |139| straight edge. Put on lettering piece. When dry, paste and paste-wash the back. When again dry, take some of Young’s patent size, melt it in a pipkin with a little water and apply it with a sponge. Lay this on very evenly with a very soft sponge, and be particular that it is perfectly clean, so that no stains be left. When the size is done with, put it on one side for future use. This size should not be taken its full strength, and when warmed again some more water should be added to make up for evaporation. When the coat of size has dried, apply two coats of glaire. The first must be dry before the second is applied, and great care must be taken that the sponge is not passed over the same place twice, or the previous preparation will be taken off. It is now ready for finishing. Cut the gold to proper size; rub a little lard over the whole of the back with a little cotton wool. This requires great attention. Very little must be put on light or green calf, as these colours are stained very readily. Take the gold up on a cotton pad; lay it carefully down on the back; breathe on the gold, and press down again. If there be any places where the gold is broken, they must be mended. Now take a two-line fillet; heat it so that it hisses when placed in the cooling pan or the saucer with the wet rag in it, and run it the whole length of the back on the line made before paste-washing. Do this on both sides, and rub the gold off with the gold-rag up to the line on the outside. Take a two-line pallet, and work it on each side of the bands. Work the morocco lettering piece last, as it requires less heat. The centre piece of each panel must now be worked. Impress the tools firmly but quickly. The corner tools next; work them from the centre or sides, using the right hand corners as a guide, and judging the distance by the left ones. The press must be turned when it is required to bring the left side to the right hand in working the corners. The requisite pallets may now be worked to finish the book |140| head and tail. As a rule these are worked when the two-line pallet is imprinted.

Full Gilt Back.Run-up. Mark up the back on both sides a little away from the joint using a folder and a straight edge. Attach the lettering piece. Once it's dry, paste and paste-wash the back. When it's dry again, take some of Young’s patent size, melt it in a small pot with a little water, and apply it with a sponge. Spread it out evenly with a soft sponge, making sure it’s perfectly clean so no stains are left behind. After you’re done with the size, set it aside for later use. This size shouldn’t be used at its full strength, and when you warm it up again, add more water to account for evaporation. Once the size coat has dried, apply two coats of glaire. The first must be dry before you apply the second, and be very careful not to pass the sponge over the same spot twice, or you’ll remove the previous layer. It’s now ready for finishing. Cut the gold to the right size; rub a little lard all over the back using some cotton wool. This needs to be done with great care. Only a little should be applied on light or green calf, as these colors stain very easily. Lift the gold with a cotton pad; lay it down carefully on the back; breathe on it, and press it down again. If there are any spots where the gold is damaged, fix them. Next, take a two-line fillet; heat it so it hisses when placed in the cooling pan or saucer with the wet rag, and run it the entire length of the back along the line made before paste-washing. Do this on both sides, and wipe the gold with a gold rag up to the line on the outside. Take a two-line pallet and work it on each side of the bands. Do the morocco lettering piece last, as it requires less heat. Now, work on the center piece of each panel. Press the tools in firmly but quickly. Next, use the corner tools; work them from the center or sides, using the right-hand corners as a guide and estimating the distance by the left ones. The press should be turned when needed to bring the left side to the right hand while working the corners. Now you can work the required pallets to finish the book |140| head and tail. Normally, these are worked when the two-line pallet is imprinted.

Calf requires very quick working. The tools should not be held over the various places too long, or the heat will destroy the adherent properties of the albumen. With morocco time does not signify so much, as the heat used is not so great.

Calf needs to be worked on quickly. The tools shouldn't stay in one spot for too long, or the heat will ruin the sticking properties of the albumen. With morocco, time isn't as critical since the heat used isn't as high.

Mitred back must be prepared the same way as for “run-up back,” and the mitreing is to be done as explained in working morocco. As before stated, this is superior work and requires more skill; takes longer, but looks much better: each panel should be an exact facsimile of the rest. If the tools do not occupy precisely similar places in each panel, the result will be very unsatisfactory, and an evidence of a want of skill. When the backs are finished, rub the gold off with the gold-rag, and clear off any residue with the india-rubber. Be very careful that every particle of the surplus gold be cleaned off, or the delicate lines of the ornaments will be obscure and ragged in appearance.

Mitred back needs to be prepared just like the “run-up back,” and the mitring process should be done as described in working with morocco. As mentioned earlier, this is a higher-quality task that requires more skill; it takes longer, but looks much better: each panel should be an exact replica of the others. If the tools aren't positioned exactly the same in each panel, the outcome will be very unsatisfactory and reflect a lack of skill. Once the backs are finished, wipe off the gold with a gold rag, and remove any residue with an eraser. Be very careful to clean off every tiny bit of excess gold, or the fine lines of the decorations will look blurred and uneven.

The book is now ready for lettering. Set the type up in the case, and work it carefully in a perfectly straight line over the back. The whole of the back is now to be polished with the polishing iron, which must be perfectly clean and bright before it is used. Prepare a board from an old calf binding, by rubbing some fine emery or charcoal and lard over the leather side of it. By rubbing the iron over this prepared surface it will acquire a bright polish. It must be used over the back by holding it lightly, and giving it an oblong circular motion. Go over every portion of the back with very even pressure, so that no part may be made more glossy than another. The polishing iron should be used rather warmer than the tools. If the iron be too hot the glaire will turn white; if too cold the polish will be dull. The grease upon the leather will be quite sufficient to make |141| the polisher glide easily over the surface, but the operation must be rapidly and evenly done. All light and green calf require less heat than any other kinds. These will turn black if the iron be in the least degree too hot.

The book is now ready for lettering. Set the type up in the case and carefully work it in a perfectly straight line across the back. The entire back should now be polished with the polishing iron, which needs to be clean and shiny before use. Prepare a board from an old calf binding by rubbing some fine emery or charcoal and lard onto the leather side. Rubbing the iron over this prepared surface will give it a bright polish. Use it on the back by holding it lightly and moving it in an elongated circular motion. Go over every part of the back with even pressure, so no area becomes glossier than another. The polishing iron should be a bit warmer than the tools. If the iron is too hot, the glaire will turn white; if it's too cold, the polish will be dull. The grease on the leather will be enough to let the polisher glide easily over the surface, but the process must be done quickly and evenly. All light and green calf require less heat than other types. These will turn black if the iron is even slightly too hot.

It is in finishing the sides that the workman can show his good taste and skill. The sides should be always in keeping with the back; or, more strictly speaking, the back should be in keeping with the sides. Before the sides can be finished, the inside of the boards must occupy our attention. With a “run-up” back, the edge of the leather round the end papers is to be worked either in blind or have a roll round it in gold. In any case it should be paste-washed. If for blind, the roll is to be heated and worked round it; if for gold, it must be glaired twice. The gold, cut into strips, is to be taken up on the roll and worked, and the overplus taken off with the gold-rag as before directed. Extra work, such as mitred work, should have some lines, or other neat design impressed. Paste-wash the leather, and when dry glaire twice. When again dry lay on the gold all round, and work the roll or other fillets, or such other tool that may be in keeping with the exterior work. When the gold has been wiped off, the leather should be polished with the polishing iron.

It’s in finishing the sides that the craftsman can showcase their taste and skill. The sides should always match the back; or, to be more precise, the back should match the sides. Before finishing the sides, we need to pay attention to the inside of the boards. With a “run-up” back, the edge of the leather around the end papers should be worked either in blind or have a gold roll around it. In any case, it should be paste-washed. If using blind, the roll should be heated and worked around it; if using gold, it must be glaired twice. The gold, cut into strips, should be picked up on the roll and applied, with any excess removed using the gold-rag as directed. Additional work, like mitred designs, should feature some lines or other neat designs impressed. Paste-wash the leather and, when dry, glaire it twice. Once it’s dry again, apply the gold all around and use the roll or other fillets, or any other tool that suits the exterior work. After the gold has been wiped off, the leather should be polished with a polishing iron.

The outside must now be finished. Are the sides to be polished, or left plain? If they are not to be polished, paste-wash the whole of the side up to the edge of the back carefully, then glaire only that portion which is to be gilt. Generally a two-line fillet only is used round the edge, so that the width of the fillet or roll must determine the width to be glaired. When glaired twice and dry, take up the gold on the fillet or roll and work it evenly and straightly round the edge. The corners where the lines meet are next to be stopped by working a small rosette or small star on them. Clean off any gold that may be on the side, and |142| work a small dotted or pin-head roll at the edge of the glaire. This will cover and conceal the edge.

The outside needs to be finished now. Should the sides be polished or left as they are? If they’re not going to be polished, carefully paste-wash the entire side up to the edge of the back, then apply glaire only to the part that will be gilded. Usually, a two-line fillet is used around the edge, so the width of the fillet or roll will determine how wide the glaired area should be. After glairing it twice and letting it dry, apply the gold to the fillet or roll and make sure it’s even and straight around the edge. For the corners where the lines meet, add a small rosette or star to finish them off. Clean off any excess gold on the side, and create a small dotted or pin-head roll at the edge of the glaire. This will cover and hide the edge.

Extra calf books generally have the sides polished. Paste-wash the sides all over, and when dry size them. Hold the book, if small, in the left hand, if large, lay it on the press and work the sponge over the side in a circular direction, so that the size may be laid on as evenly as possible. Be very careful that it does not froth; should it do so, squeeze the sponge out as dry as possible, and fill it anew with fresh size. Some workmen work the sponge up and down the book, but if this be not done very evenly it produces streaks. The finisher will find he can lay a more even coating on by using the sponge in a circular direction. Allow this to dry by leaving the book with boards extended. When perfectly dry glaire once. This will be found sufficient, as the size gives body to the glaire. When sizeing and glairing, be assured that the book be laid down with the boards extended on a level surface; if the book be not level, the size or glaire will run down to the lowest portion of the surface, and become unequally distributed. The gold is now to be laid on the respective places, either broad or narrow, according to the nature of the finishing or width of the rolls. As a general rule, the sides of the better class of calf books have nothing more than a three-line round the edge and mitred in the corners. This is, however, quite a matter of taste. Some have a border of fancy rolls, but never any elaborate pattern as in morocco work. To finish the sides, place the book in the finishing press with the boards extended, so that they may rest on the press. This will afford greater facility for working the fillets, rolls, and tools necessary to complete the design on each side. The finishing press being a small one, can be easily turned round as each edge of the border is finished.

Extra calf books usually have polished sides. Apply paste-wash to the sides all over, and once dry, size them. If the book is small, hold it in your left hand; if it’s large, lay it on the press and work the sponge over the side in a circular motion to ensure the size is applied as evenly as possible. Be careful not to create froth; if it does happen, squeeze the sponge out as dry as possible and fill it again with fresh size. Some workers move the sponge up and down the book, but if this isn’t done evenly, it can create streaks. The finisher will find that using the sponge in a circular motion allows for a more even coating. Let this dry by leaving the book with the boards extended. Once perfectly dry, apply glaire once. This will be sufficient since the size gives body to the glaire. When sizing and glaireing, make sure the book is laid down with the boards extended on a level surface; if the book isn’t level, the size or glaire will run to the lowest part of the surface and be distributed unevenly. The gold should now be applied in the respective areas, either broad or narrow, depending on the finishing style or width of the rolls. Generally, the sides of higher quality calf books only have a three-line border around the edge with mitred corners. However, this is mostly a matter of personal preference. Some have a border of fancy rolls, but never any elaborate designs like those found in morocco work. To finish the sides, place the book in the finishing press with the boards extended so they can rest on the press. This will make it easier to work with the fillets, rolls, and tools needed to complete the design on each side. Since the finishing press is small, it can be easily rotated as each edge of the border is finished.

To polish the sides, place the book on its side on some |143| soft surface, such as a board covered with baize, and kept for the purpose. Use the large and heavy polishing iron, hot and clean. Rub or work the iron quickly and firmly over the sides, first from the groove towards the foredge, and then in a contrary direction, from the tail to the head, by turning the volume. The oil or grease applied to the cover previous to laying on the gold will be sufficient to allow the polisher to glide easily over the surface. Polishing has also the effect of smoothing down the burr formed on the leather by the gilding tools, and bringing the impressions slightly to the surface. The iron must be held very evenly, so that the centre of the iron may be the working portion. If held sideways the edge of the iron will indent the leather. The heat must be sufficient to give a polish. It must be remembered that if the iron is too hot it will cause the glaire to turn white. The temperature must be well tested before it be applied to the cover. A practised finisher can generally tell the proper heat on holding the iron at some little distance from his face, by the heat radiated from the iron. Calf books should be pressed, whether polished or not.

To polish the sides, lay the book on its side on a soft surface, like a board covered with baize that’s set aside for this purpose. Use a large, heavy polishing iron that’s hot and clean. Move the iron quickly and firmly over the sides, first from the groove toward the foredge, and then in the opposite direction, from the tail to the head, by turning the book. The oil or grease applied to the cover before adding the gold will be enough to let the polisher glide smoothly over the surface. Polishing also helps smooth out the rough spots created on the leather by the gilding tools and brings the impressions slightly to the surface. You should hold the iron evenly so that the center is the part doing the work. If held at an angle, the edge of the iron can indent the leather. The heat needs to be just right to create a polish; if the iron is too hot, it will make the glaire turn white. Make sure to test the temperature before applying it to the cover. An experienced finisher can usually gauge the right heat by holding the iron a little distance from their face and feeling the heat radiating from it. Calfskin books should be pressed, whether polished or not.

Pressing.—Plates of japanned tin or polished horn are proper for this purpose. Put pressing tins between the book and the mill-boards: the tins must be up to the joint. Now place one of the japanned plates on the side level with the groove; turn book and japanned plate over carefully together, so that neither shifts; place another of the polished plates on the top of the book, thus placing the book between two polished surfaces. Put the book into the standing press, and screw down tightly. Leave in for some hours. When pressed sufficiently, take the book out, and if the sides be polished, varnish them.

Pressing.—Use plates of coated tin or polished horn for this task. Place pressing tins between the book and the mill-boards: the tins should reach the joint. Now, set one of the coated plates on the side aligned with the groove; carefully flip both the book and the coated plate over together, ensuring nothing shifts; place another polished plate on top of the book, placing the book between two polished surfaces. Put the book in the standing press and tighten the screws. Leave it in for several hours. When it has been pressed enough, remove the book, and if the sides are polished, apply varnish.

Make a little pad of cotton wool, saturate the lower portion with varnish; rub it on a piece of waste paper to equalize the varnish, then work the pad over the side as |144| quickly as possible in a circular direction. Renew the wool with varnish for the other side. Enough must be taken on the pad to varnish the whole side, or the delay caused by renewing the varnish on the cotton will cause a streaked surface. When the varnish is perfectly dry—a few minutes will suffice—the book must be again pressed. To do this, rub the gold-rag, which is greased, over the sides, this will prevent the sides from sticking to the polished plates. Place the book between the plates as before, leaving out the pressing tins, and place in the standing press. Only little pressure must now be given; if the press be screwed down too tightly the plates will stick to the book. The varnish must be of good quality, and perfectly dry, or the result will be the same. Half an hour in the press will be found quite long enough. Should the plates stick, there is no other remedy than washing off the varnish with spirits of wine, and the glaire and size with warm water, and carefully re-preparing the surface as before. This is, however, an accident that cannot happen if due care and judgment be exercised.

Make a small cotton pad, soak the bottom part in varnish; wipe it on some scrap paper to even out the varnish, then quickly work the pad over the side in a circular motion. Reapply varnish to the pad for the other side. You need to use enough varnish on the pad to cover the entire side, or the time spent reloading the cotton will lead to streaks. Once the varnish is completely dry—a few minutes will do—the book should be pressed again. To do this, wipe the greased gold rag over the sides to prevent them from sticking to the polished plates. Place the book between the plates as before, leaving out the pressing tins, and put it in the standing press. Only a little pressure is needed now; if the press is tightened too much, the plates will stick to the book. The varnish should be high quality and completely dry, or you'll end up with the same issue. Half an hour in the press is usually more than enough. If the plates stick, the only solution is to wash off the varnish with alcohol, and clean the glaire and size with warm water, then carefully prepare the surface again as before. However, this accident should not occur if proper care and judgment are taken.

Graining.—Graining is now used very much on calf books. It may be properly considered as a blind ornament. It is done by means of wooden, or, better still, copper plates cut out in various patterns, so as to form small squares, scales of fish, or an imitation of morocco. Place the volume between two of these plates, level to the groove of the back, in the standing press; screw down tightly. The pressure should be equal over the whole surface. Nothing looks worse than a bold impression in one place and a slight one in another, so that it is rather important that it be evenly pressed; a second application of the plates is impracticable. Graining has the advantage of hiding any finger-marks that may accidentally be on the calf, and also partly conceals any imperfections in the leather. |145|

Graining.—Graining is commonly used on calfskin books today. It can be seen as a decorative touch. This is done using wooden or, preferably, copper plates that are cut into various patterns to create small squares, scales of fish, or a design that resembles morocco. Place the book between two of these plates, aligned with the groove of the spine, in the standing press; tighten the screws. The pressure should be evenly distributed across the entire surface. Nothing looks worse than having a strong impression in one area and a faint one in another, so it's crucial that it is pressed uniformly; a second application of the plates is not practical. Graining helps to hide any fingerprints that may accidentally be on the calfskin, and it also somewhat covers any flaws in the leather. |145|

The state of the weather must in a great measure guide the finisher as to the proper number of volumes he ought to prepare at one time. The leather should always be a little moist, or, in other words, rather fresh. In winter double the number of books may be prepared, and the gold laid on, than the dryness of a summer’s day will permit. If books are laid on over night the tools must be used very hot in working them the next morning, or the gold will not adhere. During summer, flies will eat the glaire from various places while the book is lying or standing out to dry, so that constant vigilance must be kept to avoid these pests.

The weather greatly influences how many volumes a finisher should prepare at once. The leather should always be slightly damp, or, in other words, somewhat fresh. In winter, you can prepare double the number of books and apply gold compared to what you can do on a dry summer day. If books are left out overnight, the tools need to be very hot when working on them the next morning, or else the gold won't stick. During summer, flies can eat the glaire from different spots while the book is drying, so it's important to stay vigilant to keep these pests away.

Russia is prepared in the same way as calf, but is usually worked with more blind tools than gold, and the sides are not as a rule polished, so that the size and glaire are dispensed with, except on those parts where it is to be finished in gold; those portions need be only paste-washed and glaired once, without any size.

Russia is prepared like calfskin, but it's typically worked with more opaque tools than gold, and the edges aren't usually polished. As a result, the size and gloss are skipped, except in areas that will be finished in gold; those parts only need to be washed with paste and glazed once, without any size.

Finishing with Dry Preparation.—The dry preparation is used for silk, velvet, paper, or any other material that would be stained by the employment of the wet process. There are a number of receipts in the trade and in use.

Finishing with Dry Preparation.—The dry preparation is used for silk, velvet, paper, or any other material that could be damaged by the wet process. There are several methods available in the industry and currently in use.

Take the white of eggs, and dry by spreading it somewhat thickly over glass plates, taking care to preserve it from dust. When dry it will chip off readily, if the glass has been previously very slightly oiled or greased. It must not be exposed to more heat than 40° Reaum., or the quality of the albumen will be destroyed. The dried mass is to be well powdered in a porcelain mortar.

Take the egg whites and spread them fairly thickly on glass plates, making sure to keep them safe from dust. Once dry, they will easily come off if the glass has been very slightly oiled or greased beforehand. Do not expose it to more heat than 40° Reaum., or the quality of the albumen will be ruined. The dried mixture should be finely ground in a porcelain mortar.

Or, take equal portions of gum mastic, gum sandrac, gum arabic, and powder them well in a mortar. This powder, if good work be desired, must be ground into an impalpable powder. When powdered put it into a box or bottle, and tie three or four thicknesses of fine muslin over the mouth. By tapping the inverted box, or shaking |146| it over the lines or letters, the dust will fall through in a fine shower. The powder should fall only on the part to be gilt. Cut the gold into strips, take it up upon the tool, and work rather hot. The overplus of the powder can be brushed away when the finishing is completed. Finishing powder is now sold commercially.

Or, take equal amounts of gum mastic, gum sandrac, gum arabic, and grind them well in a mortar. If you want good results, the powder must be ground into a very fine consistency. Once it's powdered, place it in a box or bottle and cover the opening with three or four layers of fine muslin. By tapping the upside-down box or shaking it over the lines or letters, the dust will sprinkle down lightly. The powder should only land on the area to be gilded. Cut the gold into strips, pick it up with your tool, and work while it's still warm. You can brush away any excess powder when you’re done. Finishing powder is now available for purchase.

Velvet is very seldom finished beyond having the title put on, and this should be worked in blind first and with moderately large letters, or the pile will hide them.

Velvet is rarely finished beyond just adding the title, and this should be stitched in blind first with moderately large letters, or the pile will cover them up.

Silk is finished more easily, and can, if care be taken, have rather elaborate work put upon it. In such a case, the lines or tools, which must be blinded-in first, may be glaired. For this purpose the glaire must be put in a saucer or plate in the free air for a day or two, so that a certain amount of water or moisture of the glaire may be evaporated; but it must not be too stiff so as to prevent the brush going freely over the stuff. Great care, however, must be taken, or the glaire will spread and cause a stain. A thin coat of paste-water will give silk a body and keep the glaire from spreading to a certain extent, but I think the best medium for silk is the dry one, and it is always ready for instant use. In using glaire the gold is laid on the silk, but on no account must any oil or lard be rubbed on it for the temporary holding of the gold. Rub the parts intended for the gold with the finger (passed through the hair), or with a clean rag lightly oiled, and when the tools are re-impressed a clean piece of flannel should be used to wipe off the superfluous gold.

Silk is easier to finish and can, with careful handling, have quite detailed work added to it. In this case, the lines or tools that need to be applied first may be glazed. For this, the glaze should be placed in a dish or plate exposed to the air for a day or two, allowing some of the moisture to evaporate; however, it shouldn't become too thick to stop the brush from moving freely across the surface. Great care must be taken, though, or the glaze will spread and create a stain. A light coat of paste-water will add some body to the silk and limit the glaze from spreading to a degree, but I believe the best medium for silk is the dry one, as it’s always ready to use immediately. When applying glaze, the gold is placed onto the silk, but you must never rub any oil or lard on it for temporarily holding the gold. Instead, lightly rub the areas intended for gold with your finger (which has gone through the hair) or a clean rag that is slightly oiled, and when the tools are pressed again, a clean piece of flannel should be used to wipe off any excess gold.

Blocking has been used lately on silk with some success in Germany. The blocking plate is taken out of the press, and the gold is laid on it, and then replaced in the press. The finishing powder is freely distributed over the silk side, which is laid on the bed of the press. On pulling the lever over, the block descends and imprints the design in gold on the silk. This process may be applied to velvet, |147| but velvet never takes the sharpness of the design on account of the pile, so that as a rule it is left in its natural state.

Blocking has recently been used on silk with some success in Germany. The blocking plate is removed from the press, gold is placed on it, and then it’s put back in the press. The finishing powder is generously sprinkled over the silk side, which is placed on the bed of the press. When the lever is pulled, the block lowers and imprints the design in gold onto the silk. This method can also be used on velvet, |147| but velvet doesn't capture the details of the design due to its pile, so it's usually left in its natural state.

Vellum.—The Dutch, as a nation, appear to have been the first to bind books in vellum. It was then a simple kind of casing, with hollow backs. A later improvement of theirs was that of sewing the book on double raised cords, and making the book with a tight back, similar to the way in which our flexible books are now done, showing the raised bands. The ornamentation was entirely in blind, both on the back and sides, and the tools used were of a very solid character.

Vellum.—The Dutch seem to have been the first nation to bind books in vellum. At that time, it was a straightforward type of cover, with hollow backs. A subsequent enhancement they made was sewing the book onto double raised cords, creating a tight back similar to how our flexible books are made today, with the raised bands visible. The decoration was all in blind on both the back and sides, and the tools used were quite robust.

This art of binding in vellum seems to be entirely lost at the present day; its imperishable nature is indeed its only recommendation. It has little beauty; is exceedingly harsh; and little variety can be produced even in the finishing.

This art of binding in vellum seems to be completely lost today; its durability is really its only advantage. It has little beauty, is very stiff, and not much variety can be achieved even in the finishing.

There are two or three kinds of vellum prepared from calf skins at the present day, thanks to the progress of invention. First, we have the prepared or artist’s vellum, with a very white artificial surface; then the Oxford vellum, the surface of which is left in its natural state; the Roman vellum, which has a darker appearance. Parchment is an inferior animal membrane prepared from sheepskins after the manner of vellum, and this is very successfully imitated by vegetable parchment, made by immersing unsized paper for a few seconds in a bath of diluted oil of vitriol. This preparation resembles the animal parchment so closely that it is not easy to distinguish the difference. It is used very extensively in France for wrappering the better class of literature, instead of issuing them in cloth as is the custom here.

There are two or three types of vellum made from calfskin today, thanks to advancements in technology. First, there’s prepared or artist’s vellum, which has a very white artificial surface; then we have Oxford vellum, which retains its natural surface; and Roman vellum, which appears darker. Parchment is a lower-quality animal membrane made from sheepskin, similar to vellum, and this is very effectively mimicked by vegetable parchment, created by soaking unsized paper for a few seconds in a diluted sulfuric acid bath. This preparation looks so much like animal parchment that it’s hard to tell them apart. It's widely used in France for wrapping the better-quality literature, instead of publishing them in cloth like is common here.

The method of finishing vellum is altogether different to leather. On account of its very hard and compact nature, it requires no other ground or preparation than glaire for gold work. |148|

The way of finishing vellum is completely different from leather. Because it is very hard and dense, it doesn't need any other base or prep besides glaire for gold work. |148|

The cover should be very carefully washed with a soft sponge and clean water, to clean off any dirt or finger-marks, and to make the book look as fresh as possible. This washing must be very carefully done by going over the surface as few times as possible. This caution applies particularly to the prepared or artist vellum, as each washing will take off a certain amount of the surface, so that the more it is damped and rubbed the more the surface will be disturbed and the beauty destroyed. It requires some experience to distinguish the flesh and leather surfaces of prepared vellum, but this experience must be acquired, because it is absolutely necessary that the leather side should be outward when the book is covered, for two reasons: the flesh side is more fibrous, and adheres better to the boards than the leather side, and the leather side is less liable to have its surface disturbed in the process of washing.

The cover should be washed carefully with a soft sponge and clean water to remove any dirt or fingerprints and to keep the book looking as fresh as possible. This washing should be done with great care, going over the surface as few times as necessary. This caution is especially important for prepared or artist vellum, as each wash will remove some of the surface, causing more dampening and rubbing to disturb the surface and ruin its beauty. It takes some experience to tell the flesh and leather surfaces of prepared vellum apart, but this knowledge is crucial because the leather side must face outward when the book is covered for two reasons: the flesh side is more fibrous and adheres better to the boards than the leather side, and the leather side is less likely to have its surface disturbed during washing.

The parts that are to be gilt must be glaired, but as the glaire will show its presence, or, more strictly speaking, leave rather a dirty mark, the tools should first be worked in blind, and the glaire laid on carefully up to their outer edge. When dry, lay the gold on and work the tool in. Let the tools be only moderately warm; if too hot they will go through to the mill-board, leaving their mark as if they had been cut out with a knife.

The areas that need to be gilded should be prepared with a coating. However, since this coating can leave a noticeable mark, it's best to work the tools without applying any first, and carefully apply the coating right up to the outer edge. Once it's dry, apply the gold and press the tool into it. Keep the tools moderately warm; if they get too hot, they'll go through to the board, leaving a mark as if they were cut out with a knife.

As a rule no very heavy tooling is ever put on vellum, the beauty lies in keeping the vellum as clean as possible. The tooling being, comparatively speaking, on the surface, owing to the thinness of the skin, requires a very competent and clean workman to produce anything like good work on vellum.

As a general rule, no heavy tooling is applied to vellum, as the beauty comes from keeping the vellum as pristine as possible. The tooling is, relatively speaking, on the surface, and due to the thinness of the skin, it requires a skilled and meticulous craftsman to create anything close to quality work on vellum.

Vellum is of so greasy a nature that, if a title-piece of leather has to be put on, it will be found that there is a great difficulty in making it adhere properly unless some special precaution be taken. The best plan is to scrape |149| the surface where the leather is intended to be placed with the edge of a knife. This will produce a rough and fibrous ground on which to place the pasted leather. This leather, when dry, must be prepared with paste-water and glaire, in the same manner as with other books.

Vellum is so greasy that if you need to attach a leather title piece, you'll find it very difficult to get it to stick properly without some special care. The best approach is to scrape the surface where the leather will go with the edge of a knife. This will create a rough and fibrous texture for the pasted leather to adhere to. This leather, once dry, should be treated with paste-water and egg white, just like with other books.

In the foregoing instructions for finishing a book, the most that can be looked for towards teaching either the apprentice or the unskilled workman is to give him an idea how it is accomplished by practised hands. Pure taste, a correct eye, and a steady hand, are not given to all in common. The most minute instructions, detail by detail, cannot make a workman if Nature has denied these gifts. I have known men whose skill in working a design could not be excelled, but who could not be trusted to gild a back without instructions. Others, whose ideas of design were not contemptible, could not tool two panels of a back in perfect uniformity. Some also have so little idea of harmony of colour, that without strict supervision they would give every volume the coat of a harlequin. In a word, a first-rate bookbinder is nascitur non fit, and although the hints and instructions I have penned may not be sufficient to make a workman, I trust they will be found of some value to the skilled as well as to the less practised craftsman.

In the instructions above on finishing a book, all we can really hope to do for either the apprentice or the untrained worker is to give them an idea of how it’s done by experienced hands. Not everyone naturally has good taste, a keen eye, and a steady hand. No amount of detailed instructions can make a skilled worker if they lack these natural abilities. I've seen people whose skills in executing designs were unmatched, but who couldn’t be trusted to gild the back of a book without guidance. Others, who had decent design ideas, couldn’t tool two back panels with perfect uniformity. Some have such a poor sense of color harmony that without close supervision, they would end up making every volume look like a patchwork quilt. In short, a top-notch bookbinder is nascitur non fit, and although the tips and instructions I’ve written may not be enough to make a skilled worker, I hope they’ll still be useful to both experienced and less experienced craftsmen.

Blocking.—The growing demand for books that were at once cheap and pretty, became so strong, that mechanical appliances were invented to facilitate their ornamentation; and thus we have the introduction of the present blocking press.

Blocking.—The increasing demand for books that were both affordable and attractive became so intense that machines were created to help with their decoration; and this led to the development of the modern blocking press.

I will not follow too closely the various improvements introduced at different periods, but roughly describe the blocking press, without which cheap bookbinding cannot be done at the present day. There can be no doubt that this press owes its extensive use to the introduction of publishers’ cloth work.

I won't go into detail about the different improvements made over time, but I'll give a general description of the blocking press, which is essential for affordable bookbinding today. There's no doubt that this press became widely used because of the rise of publishers' cloth work.

Formerly, when the covers of books were blocked, a |150| small lying or other press was used. The block, previously heated, was placed on the book, and the screw or screws turned to get a sufficient pressure. It often happened that the pressure was either too much or too little: the block either by the one accident sank into the leather too deeply, or by the other the gold failed to adhere, and it required a good workman to work a block properly.

Previously, when book covers were stamped, a |150| small lying or other press was used. The heated block was placed on the book, and the screw or screws were turned to apply sufficient pressure. It often happened that the pressure was either too high or too low: the block either sank too deeply into the leather or the gold didn't stick, and it took a skilled worker to operate a block effectively.

The first press to be noticed is a Balancier, having a moveable bed, a heating box, heated by means of red-hot irons, two side pillars to guide the box in a true line, and attached to it a screw connected at the top with a bar or arm, having at each extremity an iron ball. The block, having been fixed to a plate at the bottom of the heated box, the side of the book was laid down on the bed, and by swinging the arm round the block descended upon the book. The arm was then swung back, and the next book put into place. It will be seen that this incurred a great loss of time.

The first press to catch attention is a Balancier, featuring a movable bed and a heating box heated by red-hot irons. It has two side pillars to keep the box aligned, and it’s connected to a screw at the top with a bar or arm, which has an iron ball at each end. Once the block is secured to a plate at the bottom of the heated box, the side of the book is laid down on the bed, and by swinging the arm around, the block presses down on the book. The arm is then swung back, and the next book is placed in position. This method clearly wastes a lot of time.

The next improvement consisted in having a press that only moved a quarter circle, with almost instantaneous action; and another improvement connected with the bed was, that by means of screws and gauges, when the block was once set, a boy or an inexperienced hand might with ease finish off hundreds of copies, all with equal pressure. By referring to the woodcut opposite, the press and its action will be seen and understood. The box may be heated with gas, and kept at a constant and regulated temperature the whole time of working. It can be adjusted to any amount of pressure, as it is regulated by the bed underneath.

The next improvement was a press that only moved a quarter circle and acted almost instantly. Another enhancement related to the bed was that with the help of screws and gauges, once the block was set, a young worker or someone inexperienced could easily produce hundreds of copies, all with the same level of pressure. You can see and understand the press and its operation by looking at the woodcut opposite. The box can be heated using gas and maintained at a constant and regulated temperature throughout the work process. It can be adjusted to any pressure level, as it is controlled by the bed below.

The next step in progress was the introduction of printing in different colours upon the cloth, and intermixing them with gold. Messrs. Hopkinson and Cope’s machines may be mentioned. They are made to be driven by steam, and will print and emboss from 500 to 600 covers per |151| hour, and are heated by steam or gas. The inking apparatus is placed at the back of the press, so that while the workman is placing another cover, the ink roller, by automatic action, inks the block ready for the next impression. The inking or printing of the covers is done without heat, so, to avoid loss of time, an arrangement is made that the heating box can be cooled immediately by a stream of water passed through it.

The next step in progress was the introduction of printing in different colors on the cloth, mixing them with gold. The machines from Messrs. Hopkinson and Cope can be mentioned. They are designed to be powered by steam and can print and emboss between 500 and 600 covers per |151| hour, using either steam or gas for heating. The inking mechanism is located at the back of the press, so while the worker is positioning another cover, the ink roller automatically inks the block in preparation for the next print. The inking or printing of the covers is done without heat, so to save time, there's a setup that allows the heating box to be cooled immediately with a stream of water flowing through it.

Messrs. Kampe and Co. have just brought out a block­ing ma­chine, which they claim to be su­per­ior to any in the trade. It will block at the rate of 700 to 800 covers per hour. The pres­sure is ob­tained by one of the most pow­er­ful of mech­an­i­cal ap­pli­ances, and it can be ad­just­ed to block eith­er pa­per or lea­ther.

Messrs. Kampe and Co. have just released a blocking machine, which they claim is better than any other in the market. It blocks at a speed of 700 to 800 covers per hour. The pressure is generated by one of the most powerful mechanical devices, and it can be adjusted to block either paper or leather.

The tools re­quired for block­ing are called blocks or stamps. These may be com­posed of very small pieces, or may be of one block cut to the size of the book. In any case, the block has to be fastened to the move­able plate at the bot­tom of the heat­ing box. To block the sides of a book, take a stout piece of paper and glue it upon a move­able plate.11 Then take the book, and having set the blocks upon the side in exact position, place the side or board upon which are placed the blocks upon the bed of the blocking press, leaving the volume hanging down in front of the press. The bed is now to be fixed, so that the centre of the board is exactly under and in the centre of the heating box. When quite true, the sides and back gauges are fixed by screws. Pull the lever so that a slight pressure upon the plate be given: release |152| the press, and take out the book and examine if all be correct. Some of the blocks may require a small piece of paper as a pad, so as to increase the pressure, others to be shifted a little. Now glue the back of the stamps and replace them in their respective places. Place the whole under the top plate in the press, heat the box, and pull the lever over; and let the book remain for some little time to set the glue. Take out the book, examine if perfectly square and correct, but replace it with a soft mill-board under the stamps, and pull down the press. The lever must remain over, and the blocks be under pressure until the glue is hardened.

The tools needed for blocking are called blocks or stamps. These can be made up of very small pieces or be a single block cut to the size of the book. In either case, the block must be attached to the movable plate at the bottom of the heating box. To block the sides of a book, take a sturdy piece of paper and glue it to a movable plate. Then take the book, and after positioning the blocks precisely on the side, place the side or board holding the blocks onto the bed of the blocking press, keeping the volume hanging down in front of the press. The bed must be adjusted so that the center of the board is right underneath and in the center of the heating box. Once it's aligned, secure the sides and back gauges with screws. Pull the lever to apply slight pressure on the plate, then release the press and take out the book to check if everything is correct. Some blocks may need a small piece of paper as a pad to increase pressure; others may need to be adjusted slightly. Now glue the back of the stamps and put them back in their spots. Place everything under the top plate in the press, heat the box, and pull the lever down; let the book sit for a while to let the glue set. Take out the book, check that it’s perfectly square and correct, then put it back with a soft mill-board under the stamps, and press down the press. The lever should stay down, and the blocks should remain under pressure until the glue hardens.

[11] The moveable plate is also called the platen.

Another method is to glue upon the plate a piece of thick paper and mark upon it the exact size of the book to be blocked. Strike upon the plate from the size the centre, and from that any other lines that may assist in placing the blocks. Arrange the blocks upon the plate so as to form the design; when correct, paste the blocks on their backs and replace them on the plate. When the paste adheres a little, turn the plate over and put it into the press. Apply heat to the box; pull the lever over, and when the paste is set, regulate the bed and gauges.

Another method is to stick a piece of thick paper onto the plate and mark the exact size of the book that needs to be blocked. From the size, find the center of the plate and draw any additional lines that might help in positioning the blocks. Arrange the blocks on the plate to create the design; once it's correct, glue the blocks on their backs and put them back on the plate. When the glue is somewhat tacky, flip the plate over and place it in the press. Apply heat to the box; pull the lever down, and when the glue has set, adjust the bed and gauges.

When the press is properly heated, throw back the lever; take out the mill-board from under the stamp, and regulate the degree of pressure required by the side-screw under or over the bed. Place upon the bed the side to be stamped, hold it firmly against the guides with the left hand, and with the right draw the lever quickly to the front. This straightens the toggels and forces down the heating box, causing a sharp impression of the stamp upon the leather or other material. Throw or let the lever go back sharply, and take out the book. If the block be of such a design that it must not be inverted, the whole of the covers must be blocked on one side first, and the block turned round for the other side, or the design will be upside down. |153|

When the press is hot enough, pull back the lever; remove the mill-board from under the stamp, and adjust the pressure using the side-screw below the bed. Place the side you want to stamp on the bed, hold it firmly against the guides with your left hand, and quickly pull the lever forward with your right hand. This straightens the toggles and pushes down the heating box, making a sharp impression of the stamp on the leather or other material. Release the lever quickly and take out the book. If the block has a design that shouldn't be upside down, you need to stamp all the covers on one side first, then turn the block around for the other side, or the design will end up upside down. |153|

Work for blocking in gold does not require so much body or preparation as if it were gilt by hand. Morocco can be worked by merely washing the whole surface with a little urine or weak ammonia, but it is safer to use a coat of glaire and water mixed in proportion of one of the former to three of the latter. The heat should not be great, and slowly worked.

Work for blocking in gold doesn't need as much effort or preparation as hand-gilding. You can treat Morocco leather simply by washing the entire surface with a bit of urine or diluted ammonia, but it's safer to apply a mixture of egg white and water, using one part egg white to three parts water. The heat shouldn't be too high and should be applied gradually.

Calf should have a coat of milk and water or thin paste-water as a ground, and when dry another of glaire. Both should be laid on as evenly as possible; but if only portions are to be gilt, such as a centre-piece, and the rest dead, the centre-piece or other design should be pencilled in with great care. The design should be first slightly blocked in blind as a guide for the glairing. The edge of the glaire generally leaves a black or dark stain. The heat required for calf is greater than for morocco, and the working must be done more quickly.

Calf should have a layer of milk and water or a thin paste-water as a base, and when dry, another layer of egg white. Both should be applied as evenly as possible; however, if only certain areas are to be gilded, like a centerpiece, while the rest remains plain, the centerpiece or other design should be carefully drawn in. The design should first be lightly outlined without any color as a guide for gilding. The edge of the egg white usually leaves a black or dark stain. The heat needed for calf is higher than for morocco, and the work must be done more swiftly.

Cloth requires no preparation whatever, the glue beneath and the coloured matter on the cloth gives quite enough adhesiveness when the hot plate comes down for the gold to adhere.

Cloth needs no preparation at all; the glue underneath and the color on the cloth provide enough stickiness for the gold to stick when the hot plate is applied.

A great deal of taste may be displayed in the formation of patterns in this branch, but as publishers find that books that are tawdrily gilt are better liked by the public, they are, of course, very well satisfied if their books are well covered with gold. It would be well if those who have the principal charge of this work would strive, by the cultivation of elegant design, to correct the vitiated taste of the public, and seek by a study of classic ornamentation to please the eye and satisfy the judgment rather than to attract the vulgar by glitter and gaudy decoration.

A lot of style can be shown in creating designs in this area, but since publishers see that flashy, over-the-top books are more popular with the public, they’re naturally happy if their books are covered in gold. It would be great if those in charge of this work would try to improve the poor taste of the public by focusing on sophisticated design and studying classic decorations to please the eye and meet quality standards instead of just drawing in the masses with shiny, flashy designs.

However, of late years a great advancement has been made with publishers’ block work; the samples given in the trade paper (“The Bookbinder” now “Bookmaker”) will prove this.

However, in recent years there has been a significant improvement in publishers' block work; the examples provided in the trade paper (“The Bookbinder” now “Bookmaker”) will demonstrate this.

GENERAL INFORMATION.

CHAPTER XXIV. Washing and cleaning.

The binder is often called upon to clean books; to many he is a sort of Aladdin, who makes old books into new; the consequence is that he often has placed in his hands a lot of dirty, miserable-looking books, and is expected to turn them into first-class copies. To renovate such books requires time and experience, and unfortunately very little is known among binders as a body about cleaning. Outside the trade, I am sorry to say, even less is known, for if a book be received from a binder bleached, it seems to satisfy the owner, and to be all that is desired. By such treatment of bleaching a quantity of lime is generally left in the paper, the goodness is destroyed, and naturally the paper must suffer in a short time. To test such treatment one has only to apply the tongue to the paper, it will at once absorb any moisture, as blotting paper does, and often the lime can be distinctly tasted.

The binder is often called upon to clean books; to many, he is like Aladdin, turning old books into new ones. As a result, he frequently ends up with a bunch of dirty, miserable-looking books and is expected to transform them into top-notch copies. Renovating such books requires time and experience, but unfortunately, most binders lack knowledge about cleaning techniques. Outside the trade, even less is known. If a book comes back from the binder looking bleached, the owner often feels satisfied, thinking it’s all they wanted. However, this bleaching process usually leaves a lot of lime in the paper, ruins its quality, and, as a result, the paper will deteriorate quickly. To test this treatment, just lick the paper; it will absorb moisture like blotting paper, and often you can distinctly taste the lime.

But books are often washed and given out to the binder to rebind in this state. In such a case it remains with the binder not to associate himself with the book; for if he rebinds such a book the stigma will attach itself to him when the period of rotting, falling to pieces, and other misfortunes has arrived.

But books are often cleaned and sent to the binder to be rebound in this condition. In this case, it’s up to the binder not to associate himself with the book; because if he rebounds such a book, the shame will stick to him when the time comes for it to rot, fall apart, and face other misfortunes.

It is the practice of many who profess to wash books or prints to use chlorine at every washing; this is not necessary; often a simple bath of hot water, with perhaps the |158| addition of a little alum, is all that is required. An important thing is to know the different kinds of stains when looking through the book; there may be many in one book, each from a different cause. In such a case it will be best to go for the majority, and to use the bath that will move them. Often the one bath is sufficient, but should there be any stains that are not touched, these leaves must be treated again.

It’s common for many who claim to clean books or prints to use chlorine every time they wash; this isn’t necessary. Often, a simple soak in hot water, maybe with a bit of alum, is all you need. It’s important to identify the different types of stains when examining the book; there might be several in one book, each caused by something different. In that case, it’s best to focus on the majority and use a bath that will remove them. Usually, one bath is enough, but if there are any stains that remain, those pages will need to be treated again.

When there are stains of different character in the one book, such as oil stains on a few leaves, and, say, coffee stains in other parts, the oil must be first removed; the one bath will not touch both stains.

When there are different kinds of stains in one book, like oil stains on some pages and coffee stains in other areas, you need to remove the oil first; one cleaning method won't work for both stains.

Often when the bath is used wrongly it will fix the stain in the paper, and not remove it, the chemical used acting as a mordant.

Often when the bath is used incorrectly, it will set the stain in the paper instead of removing it, with the chemical acting as a mordant.

It is impossible for me to describe the various stains, the intelligence of the workman must be brought to bear on the subject; and I advise a small memo. book be used to jot down the difficulties that may occur from time to time, and so to act as a guide for future work; to the use of such a book I am enabled to lay before my readers the methods of working with the various receipts collected in France and Germany, and used by me in my business.

It’s impossible for me to describe all the different stains; the skill of the worker needs to come into play here. I recommend using a small notebook to note down any challenges that come up from time to time, which will serve as a guide for future projects. With such a book, I can share with my readers the methods of working with the various recipes I’ve gathered from France and Germany and that I use in my business.

To wash a book it is absolutely necessary to pull it to pieces. Should there be much glue on the back, and difficulty arise in the pulling, the book may be treated as given in Chapter II.: or sections of six or eight sheets may be left together; the hot water and soaking to which the book will be subjected in the washing will dissolve the glue or paste that may be on the back, and the sheets will readily part whilst in the solution. Washing must be conducted with great care; the handling of the wet sheets will demand the most delicate touch, for one can reasonably understand that paper left in water for twelve or more hours is likely to be very tender. In nearly every case when a book has been washed it will be found necessary to size it: the size |159| gives back the body or goodness that the hot water and chemical has extracted. Often the virtue is extracted by damp, through the book being left in some damp situation, or by imperfect sizing the paper has first received; in such cases, although the book may not require washing, sizing will be of benefit.

To wash a book, you definitely need to take it apart. If there's a lot of glue on the spine and it's hard to pull apart, you can handle it as described in Chapter II; or you can leave sections of six or eight sheets together. The hot water and soaking that the book will go through in the wash will dissolve the glue or paste on the spine, and the sheets will easily separate while submerged. Washing has to be done very carefully; handling the wet sheets requires a delicate touch since it's understandable that paper left in water for twelve or more hours will be quite fragile. In most cases, once a book is washed, it's necessary to size it: the sizing restores the body and quality that the hot water and chemicals have removed. Often, the quality is lost due to dampness, from the book being left in a moist environment, or from improper sizing the paper initially received; in these situations, even if the book doesn't need washing, sizing will still be helpful.

Requisites.—The necessary articles required for washing, etc., are dishes. Those of porcelain are perhaps the best; they may be bought at any photographic material dealers. If much work is done, it is advantageous to have a set or sets of two or three sizes. In using the various dishes, ample room should be given to allow the hands to enter the water and pick up the sheets or leaves without any danger of tearing. Should the pans be of such a size as to be too heavy to move when full of water, they may be emptied by means of a syphon, the short end of the syphon placed, in preference, at one of the corners of the dish, so as not to touch the sheets. The dishes may also be made of wood, lined with zinc or lead: for very large work these must be used, the porcelain are not made above a certain size.

Requisites.—The necessary items needed for washing, etc., are dishes. Porcelain ones are probably the best; you can buy them from any photography supply store. If you're doing a lot of work, it's useful to have a set or sets in two or three sizes. When using the different dishes, make sure there's enough room for your hands to reach the water and pick up the sheets or leaves without risking tearing. If the pans are too heavy to move when filled with water, you can empty them using a siphon, with the shorter end of the siphon placed at one of the corners of the dish to avoid touching the sheets. Dishes can also be made of wood, lined with zinc or lead; for very large jobs, these are necessary because porcelain dishes don’t come in larger sizes.

A kettle for boiling water in.

A kettle for boiling water.

A gas-stove, or substitute, for heating purposes.

A gas stove, or an alternative, for heating purposes.

A peel, made of wood, to hang the sheets on the lines. The sheets are placed on the peel, from which they are transferred to the lines.

A peel, made of wood, to hang the sheets on the lines. The sheets are placed on the peel, from which they are transferred to the lines.

Chloride of lime for solution of chloride of lime.—Make a saturated solution of chloride of lime by mixing intimately the lime with water in a large jar. When clear the solution may be used. To every gallon of hot water take from this stock solution two or three ounces.

Chloride of lime for solution of chloride of lime.—Create a saturated solution of chloride of lime by thoroughly mixing the lime with water in a large jar. Once the solution is clear, it can be used. For every gallon of hot water, add two or three ounces of this stock solution.

NOTE.Chlorine bleaches all vegetable matter.

NOTE.Chlorine removes all plant material.

Hydrochloric acid, also known as muriatic acid or spirits of salts (poison).

Hydrochloric acid, also called muriatic acid or spirits of salts (toxic).

Oxalic acid (poison).

Oxalic acid (toxic).

Powdered alum. |160|

Alum powder. |160|

A hair sieve. This is not absolutely necessary, as a fine piece of linen will answer as well.

A hair sieve. This isn't strictly necessary, as a fine piece of linen works just as well.

Size:—

Size

  • (1.) 1 quart of water.

    1 quart water.

  • 1 ⁄ 2 ounce of powdered alum.

    ½ ounce of powdered alum.

  • 1 ounce of isinglass.

    1 oz of isinglass.

  • 1 scruple of soap.

    1 bar of soap.

Simmer the whole for about one hour, then pass through a fine hair sieve or piece of linen. Use this whilst warm.

Simmer everything for about an hour, then strain through a fine mesh sieve or a piece of cloth. Use this while it's warm.

  • (2.) 1 gallon of water.

    1 gallon of water.

  • 1 ⁄ 2 lb. of best glue.

    1/2 lb. of best glue.

  • 2 ounces of powdered alum.

    2 oz of powdered alum.

Simmer and use as above.

Simmer and use as mentioned.

  • (3). 1 quart of water.

    1 quart of water.

  • 21 ⁄ 2 ounces of isinglass.

    2.5 ounces of isinglass.

  • 2 drachms of alum.

    2 drams of alum.

Simmer the whole for about one hour, strain as above.

Simmer the whole thing for about an hour, then strain it as mentioned above.

It must be remembered that a size too strong in glue or isinglass is liable to make the paper too brittle; again, some papers require a stronger size than others.

It should be noted that using too much glue or isinglass can make the paper too fragile; furthermore, some papers need a stronger sizing than others.

(4). A size that may be used cold, and is recommended in France, to keep at hand and to use when only a single leaf requires sizing, such as when a name has been erased from a title-page, is as follows:—Boil about a quart of water in a saucepan. Whilst boiling, add about two oz. of shellac and 1 ⁄ 2 oz. of borax; the borax will dissolve the shellac, which will be held in suspension; the whole must then be passed through a fine hair sieve, or piece of linen, to rid it of all pieces or impurities. This will keep a very long time, and may be used over and over again.

(4). A size that can be used cold, and is recommended in France to keep on hand for situations where only a single leaf needs sizing—like when a name has been erased from a title page—is as follows: Boil about a quart of water in a saucepan. While boiling, add about two oz. of shellac and ½ oz. of borax; the borax will dissolve the shellac, keeping it suspended. Then, strain the mixture through a fine hair sieve or a piece of linen to remove any bits or impurities. This can be stored for a long time and used repeatedly.

Great care must be exercised that not too much shellac is used, or the paper will be rendered transparent. |161|

Great care must be taken not to use too much shellac, or the paper will become transparent. |161|

MANIPULATION.

Dust.—The careful application of india-rubber or bread will generally take away all dust. In using india-rubber, hold the sheet or leaf down by the left hand, and rub gently away from it. If the rubber is used in a to and fro motion, there is great danger of the sheet doubling back and breaking. The bread may be used in a circular motion; and if a book be cleaned from dust by this means without pulling to pieces, all crumbs must be brushed away from the back very carefully before closing the book.

Dust.—The careful use of rubber erasers or bread will usually remove all dust. When using a rubber eraser, hold the page down with your left hand and gently rub away from it. If you move the eraser back and forth, there's a big risk of the page bending and tearing. You can use the bread in a circular motion; and if you clean a book of dust this way without damaging it, make sure to brush off all crumbs from the back very carefully before closing the book.

Water stains.—If the stains be from water, the application of boiling water and alum will take them out. This stain is the one most usually found in books, it may be distinguished from other stains by leaving a mark having a sharp edge.

Water stains.—If the stains are from water, using boiling water and alum will remove them. This type of stain is the most common in books, and it can be identified by leaving a mark with a sharp edge.

To take such a stain away, pull the book to pieces, strew on the bottom of the pan a handful of powdered alum, on this pour a quantity of boiling water. Immerse each section leaf by leaf in the liquid, and allow to remain for some hours. It may be found rather difficult to get the sheets to go under the water; and as one cannot press them under by hand, on account of the heat, make a substitute by wrapping strips of linen on the end of a piece of wood; keep this handy, it will be found very useful; being round at the end, and soft, it does not tear or go through the paper, as will anything sharp.

To remove such a stain, take the book apart, sprinkle a handful of powdered alum in the bottom of a pan, and then pour boiling water over it. Dip each section in the liquid, leaf by leaf, and let it soak for a few hours. It might be challenging to keep the sheets submerged, and since you can't press them down by hand due to the heat, create a tool by wrapping strips of linen around the end of a stick. Keep this handy, as it will be very useful; the rounded and soft end won't tear or damage the paper like anything sharp would.

The alum water will, after a time, become very discoloured; this is only the stain and other dirt extracted from the paper; throw this away by tipping the dish, or by the use of the syphon; add fresh water, either warm or cold, but preferably warm, to dissolve any excess of alum that may have soaked into the paper, and to further clear it. After a time the whole book may be taken out, placed between pressing boards, and excess of water pressed away by the laying |162| press. The sections are then carefully opened, and hung upon lines or cords stretched across the workshop to dry. When dry, should the paper require it, pass the whole book, section by section, or leaf by leaf, through a size, press, and again hang up to dry. When dry, it will be ready for re-binding. It may happen that only a single leaf is stained; do not cut this out as is usually done, but wet a piece of fine string, which lay on the leaf as far in the back as possible; close the book and allow to remain a few minutes; the leaf may then be readily drawn out, the moisture of the string having made the paper soft where it was placed. It may then be cleaned, and when dry and pressed, replaced.

The alum water will eventually become quite discolored; this is just the stain and other dirt removed from the paper. Dispose of this by tipping the dish or using a siphon; add fresh water, either warm or cold, but ideally warm, to dissolve any excess alum that may have soaked into the paper and to further clarify it. After some time, you can take the entire book out, place it between pressing boards, and press out the excess water using the laying press. Then, carefully open the sections and hang them on lines or cords stretched across the workshop to dry. Once dry, if the paper needs it, run the whole book—either section by section or leaf by leaf—through a size press, and then hang it up to dry again. When dry, it will be ready for re-binding. If only a single leaf is stained, do not cut it out as is commonly done; instead, wet a piece of fine string and lay it on the leaf as far back as possible. Close the book and let it sit for a few minutes; then, the leaf can be easily pulled out since the moisture from the string has softened the paper where it was placed. It can then be cleaned, and when dry and pressed, it can be replaced.

Damp stains may be treated as for water stains, but, as a rule, a book damaged by damp has little or no chance of being made good again. A book so damaged can only be strengthened by re-sizing or some artificial means. To re-size leaves that cannot be plunged into the solution, the sizing may be done with a soft brush. Place the leaf on a piece of glass or marble, and use the brush to the leaf as one would do in pasting; when sized, lift the leaf up very gently and lay it out on paper to dry; when dry, the reverse side is treated in like manner; or a thin paper of a transparent character may be pasted over the pages, either on one or both sides.

Damp stains can be treated like water stains, but typically, a book that has been damaged by dampness has little or no chance of being fully restored. A book in this condition can only be reinforced through re-sizing or some other artificial method. To re-size pages that can't be immersed in the solution, you can use a soft brush. Place the page on a piece of glass or marble, and use the brush on the page as if you were pasting it; once sized, gently lift the page and lay it on paper to dry. After it's dry, treat the other side in the same way; alternatively, you can paste a thin layer of transparent paper over the pages, either on one or both sides.

Mud.—Luckily a book stained with mud is not of frequent occurrence. Mud seems to be a combination of all that is objectionable, generally it is a mixture of iron and grease. Wash the leaf well in cold water, then in a weak solution of muriatic acid, after which, plunge in a weak solution of chloride of lime. Rinse well, dry, and size. Sometimes it will be necessary to wash the leaf with soap water. Make a soap solution, and gently go over the whole sheet with a soft brush, a shaving brush for instance; this may be done by laying the leaf on a slab of glass: use great care with |163| the brush, or the surface of the paper will be abraised; after which, rinse well with water.

Mud.—Fortunately, a book stained with mud doesn’t happen often. Mud is basically a mix of everything undesirable, typically a blend of iron and grease. First, wash the page thoroughly in cold water, then in a diluted solution of hydrochloric acid, and after that, immerse it in a weak solution of bleach. Rinse it well, dry it, and size it. Sometimes, you may need to wash the page with soapy water. Create a soapy solution and gently go over the entire sheet with a soft brush, like a shaving brush. You can lay the sheet on a glass slab for this; be very careful with the brush, or you might scratch the paper's surface. After that, rinse it thoroughly with water.

Very often such stains, if fresh, will disappear if a fine jet of water be allowed to play on the parts dirtied, the water being ejected through a fine rose jet.

Very often, if these stains are fresh, they will disappear if a fine spray of water is directed at the soiled areas, with the water coming out through a fine rose nozzle.

Fox-marks.—Books so stained may generally be cleaned by immersing the leaves into a weak solution of hydrochloric acid; one must not make the bath too strong, 1 ⁄ 2 ounce of the acid to 1 pint of water, using the bath hot, will be found about right. Should the marks not give to this treatment, plunge the book, sheet by sheet, into a weak bath of chlorine water. The book may be left in for some hours, taken out and replaced in the hydrochloric bath; after a half hour it may be rinsed with cold water, hung up to dry, and sized.

Fox marks.—Books that are stained like this can usually be cleaned by soaking the pages in a weak solution of hydrochloric acid; just be careful not to make the solution too strong, 1 ⁄ 2 ounce of acid to 1 pint of water, using the solution hot, tends to be about right. If the marks don’t come out with this method, dip the book, sheet by sheet, into a weak solution of chlorine water. The book can be left in for several hours, taken out, and then put back into the hydrochloric solution; after a half hour, it can be rinsed with cold water, hung up to dry, and sized.

Finger-marks, commonly called “thumb-marks.”—These are the most difficult to erase, the dirt being generally of a greasy nature, and forced into the fibres of the paper. Make a jelly of white or curd soap, apply to the stain, and leave it on for some time, then wash away gently by means of a soft brush while the leaf is in cold water; this will, as a rule, take all, or nearly all, away. A slight rinsing in very weak acid water, again with cold water, and when dry size.

Fingerprints, often referred to as “thumbprints.”—These are the hardest to remove, as the dirt is usually greasy and embedded in the paper fibers. Make a jelly out of white or curd soap, apply it to the stain, and let it sit for a while. Then, gently wash it away with a soft brush while the page is in cold water; this will usually remove all or nearly all of it. A light rinsing in very weak acidic water, followed by more cold water, and then size when dry.

Blood stains.—The leaves stained must be plunged into cold water; when thoroughly soaked, the stains may be washed with a soft brush charged with soap, then well rinsed with water again. Dry.

Blood stains.—The stained leaves should be soaked in cold water; once fully soaked, you can wash the stains with a soft brush dipped in soap, and then rinse them well with water again. Dry.

If hot water be used, the heat renders the albumen of the blood insoluble, and the stain will be difficult to erase.

If hot water is used, the heat makes the protein in the blood insoluble, and the stain will be hard to remove.

Ink stains (writing).—Some inks are more difficult to erase than others. As a rule ink gives way if the writing be treated with a solution of oxalic acid, and afterwards to a weak solution of chloride of lime. It is perhaps better to immerse the whole leaf in the solution, as the lime is likely to bleach and leave a mark; the leaf should in any |164| case be plunged in warm water afterwards, to wash away the lime and acid, and, after drying, it should be sized.

Ink stains (writing).—Some inks are harder to remove than others. Generally, ink can be treated with a solution of oxalic acid, followed by a weak solution of bleach to help lift it. It’s often better to immerse the entire page in the solution, as the bleach can stain and leave a mark; after treatment, the page should be soaked in warm water to wash out the bleach and acid, and then, once dried, it should be sized.

Ink stains (marking ink, silver) may be removed by a solution of tincture of iodine; nitrate of silver, the basis of the ink, is changed into iodide of silver, this is then treated with a solution of cyanide of potassium. It may perhaps be necessary to repeat this two or three times; when quite dissolved out, it must be well washed. As the cyanide is a deadly poison, one may substitute hyposulphite of sodium.

Ink stains (marking ink, silver) can be removed using a solution of tincture of iodine; nitrate of silver, which is the main component of the ink, gets converted into iodide of silver, and this is then treated with a solution of potassium cyanide. You might need to repeat this process two or three times; once it's fully dissolved, it should be thoroughly washed. Since cyanide is extremely poisonous, you can use sodium hyposulphite as a safer alternative.

Fat stains.—(1.) Place a piece of blotting-paper on each side of the stain, apply a hot polishing iron very carefully to the paper; this will, in most cases, melt the fat, which will be absorbed by the blotting-paper.

Fat stains.—(1.) Put a piece of blotting paper on each side of the stain, and carefully use a hot iron on the paper; this will usually melt the fat, which will then be absorbed by the blotting paper.

(2.) Scrape pipe clay, or French chalk, which place on the stain, then use the hot iron. The iron must not be used too hot, or the paper will be scorched; a piece of paper should always be placed between the iron and the leaf stained. The powder may be afterwards brushed away.

(2.) Scrape pipe clay or French chalk, place it on the stain, and then use a hot iron. The iron shouldn’t be too hot, or it will scorch the paper; always place a piece of paper between the iron and the stained leaf. The powder can be brushed away afterwards.

(3.) May be removed by washing the leaf with ether, or benzoline, placing a pad of blotting-paper under and over the leaf, dabbing the benzoline or ether on the spot with a piece of cotton wool. This process must not be conducted near a flame, both are highly inflammable.

(3.) You can remove it by washing the leaf with ether or benzoline. Place a pad of blotting paper under and over the leaf, then dab the benzoline or ether on the spot with a piece of cotton wool. Make sure to do this away from any flames, as both substances are highly flammable.

(4.) A mixture of 1 part nitric acid, 10 parts water, is useful in many instances for oil stains. When erased, plunge the whole sheet or leaf into water, changing the water several times. Dry and size.

(4.) A mix of 1 part nitric acid and 10 parts water is helpful in many cases for oil stains. After removing the stain, submerge the entire sheet or leaf in water, changing the water several times. Then, dry and size.

Ink.—When the writing-paper has been made from inferior rags bleached with excess of chlorine the best ink becomes discoloured.

Ink.—When the writing paper is made from low-quality rags bleached with too much chlorine, even the best ink can get discolored.

Reviving old writings.—(1.) Brush the paper over carefully with a solution of sulpho-cyanide of potassium (1 in 20). Then, while still damp, hold over a dish containing hot muriatic acid; the writing will develop deep red. |165|

Reviving old writings.—(1.) Gently brush the paper with a solution of potassium thiocyanate (1 in 20). Then, while it’s still wet, hold it over a dish with hot hydrochloric acid; the writing will turn deep red. |165|

(2.) Wash the writing with a very weak solution of hydrochloric acid, then carefully apply infusion of galls.

(2.) Wash the writing with a very diluted solution of hydrochloric acid, then gently apply a tincture of galls.

(3.) For letters that have been in sea water, wash with warm water to remove the salt, then soak in weak solution of gallic acid, about 3 grains to the ounce. If this does not make the writing legible enough, wash thoroughly in clean water, and soak in a solution of protosulphate of iron, 10 grains to the ounce.

(3.) For letters that have been in seawater, wash with warm water to get rid of the salt, then soak in a weak solution of gallic acid, about 3 grains per ounce. If this doesn’t make the writing clear enough, wash thoroughly in clean water, and soak in a solution of protosulphate of iron, 10 grains per ounce.

To restore writing effaced by chlorine.—(1.) Expose the writing to the vapour of sulphuret of ammonia, or dip it into a solution of the sulphuret.

To restore writing erased by chlorine.—(1.) Expose the writing to the vapor of ammonium sulfide, or dip it into a solution of the sulfide.

  • (2). Ferro-cyanide of potassium, 5 parts.

    Potassium ferrocyanide, 5 parts.

  • Water, 85 parts.

    Water, 85 units.

Dissolve and immerse the paper in the fluid, then slightly acidulate the solution with sulphuric acid.

Dissolve and soak the paper in the liquid, then lightly add sulfuric acid to the solution.

Guitaud discovered that sulphuret of ammonia and prussiate of potash revives writing effaced by oxymuriatic acid.

Guitaud found that ammonium sulfide and potassium ferrocyanide can bring back writing that has been erased by chlorine gas.

To restore MSS. faded by time.—A moderately concentrated solution of tannin washed over the paper. The MS. to be carefully dried.

To restore manuscripts faded by time.—A moderately concentrated solution of tannin is applied to the paper. The manuscript should be carefully dried.

To preserve drawings or manuscripts.—Mix with every 100 parts of collodion 2 parts of sterine. Place the paper in question on a perfectly level and even surface, such as a marble table or large slab of glass. Give the paper a thin coat of this collodion, and in about twenty minutes it will be protected by a transparent, brilliant, and imperishable envelope.

To preserve drawings or manuscripts.—Mix 100 parts of collodion with 2 parts of sterine. Place the paper on a completely flat surface, like a marble table or a large pane of glass. Apply a thin layer of this collodion to the paper, and in about twenty minutes, it will be covered by a transparent, shiny, and durable envelope.

To fix drawings or pencil marks.—Pass the paper through a bath of thin size, made either from gelatine or isinglass; or a bath of skim milk.

To clean up drawings or pencil marks.—Dip the paper in a bath of thin size made from either gelatin or isinglass; or in a bath of skim milk.

To render paper waterproof.—Take of borax 100 parts, water 2,250 parts; boil, and while stirring, gradually add powdered shellac 300 parts. When the whole is dissolved, strain through muslin. This will keep a long time and may be bottled. |166|

To make paper waterproof.—Take 100 parts of borax and 2,250 parts of water; boil, and while stirring, slowly add 300 parts of powdered shellac. Once everything is dissolved, strain it through muslin. This will last a long time and can be stored in a bottle. |166|

To render paper incombustible.—Pass the paper through a strong solution of alum, and hang up to dry.

To make paper fireproof.—Soak the paper in a strong solution of alum, then hang it up to dry.

The following, taken from the “English Mechanic,” June 19th, 1874, is, I think, of great use to the professional restorer of old books, and will give the binder an idea of what has to be done sometimes:—

The following, taken from the “English Mechanic,” June 19th, 1874, is, I think, very useful for the professional restorer of old books and will give the binder an idea of what needs to be done sometimes:—

“DECIPHERING BURNT DOCUMENTS.”

“M. Rathelot, an officer of the Paris Law Courts, has succeeded in an ingenious manner in transcribing a number of the registers which were burnt during the Commune. These registers had remained so long in the fire that each of them seemed to have become a homogeneous block, more like a slab of charcoal than anything else; and when an attempt was made to detach a leaf it fell away into powder.

“M. Rathelot, an officer of the Paris Law Courts, has cleverly managed to transcribe several of the records that were destroyed in the fire during the Commune. These records had been in the fire for so long that each one had turned into a solid mass, looking more like a chunk of charcoal than anything else; and when someone tried to peel apart a page, it crumbled into dust.

“He first cut off the back of the book; he then steeped the book in water, and afterwards exposed it, all wet as it was, to the heat at the mouth of a warming pipe (calorifère). The water as it evaporated raised the leaves one by one, and they could be separated, but with extraordinary precaution. Each sheet was then deciphered and transcribed. The appearance of the pages was very curious—the writing appeared of a dull black, while the paper was of a lustrous black, something like velvet decorations on a black satin ground, so that the entries were not difficult to decipher.”

“He first removed the back of the book; then he soaked the book in water, and afterward, while it was still wet, he placed it near the heat of a warming pipe (calorifère). As the water evaporated, the pages gradually separated one by one, but only with great care. Each sheet was then read and copied. The appearance of the pages was quite interesting—the writing appeared in a dull black, while the paper had a glossy black finish, resembling velvet decorations on a black satin background, making the entries relatively easy to read.”

Insects.—A library has generally three kinds of enemies to be guarded against, viz.: insects, dampness, and rats or mice.12

Insects.—A library usually has three types of threats to guard against: insects, moisture, and rats or mice.12

[12] Blades, in his “Enemies of Books,” includes bookbinders.

Everyone is supposed to know how to guard against dampness and rats or mice. Several means are known how to keep insects at a distance. The first consists in the |167| proper choice of woods for the book-case: these are cedar, cypress, mahogany, sandal, or very dry and sound oak. All these are compact or of very strong aroma, and are such as insects do not like to pierce. Another source of danger is the use of chemicals in the binding of books.

Everyone should know how to protect against dampness and rats or mice. There are several ways to keep insects away. The first is choosing the right types of wood for the bookcase: these include cedar, cypress, mahogany, sandalwood, or very dry and solid oak. All these woods are dense or have a strong scent, which insects tend to avoid. Another risk comes from using chemicals in bookbinding.

The insects that make ravages in books multiply very rapidly, and very few libraries are free from them. The microscopic eggs that are left by the female give birth to a small grub, which pierces the leather boards and book for its nourishment, and to get to the air. These are familiarly called bookworms, but by the scientific world they are known as hypothenemus eruditus which eats the leather, and anobium striatum which bores through the paper. The larvæ of the dermestes also attack wood as well as books.

The insects that cause damage to books multiply very quickly, and very few libraries are free from them. The tiny eggs left by the female hatch into small grubs that burrow through the leather covers and the book itself to find food and access the air. These pests are commonly called bookworms, but in scientific terms, they are referred to as hypothenemus eruditus for those that eat leather, and anobium striatum for those that bore through paper. The larvae of dermestes also attack wood in addition to books.

An instance of how these insects were once managed:—M. Fabbroni, Director of the Museum of Florence, who possessed a magnificent library, found, after a year’s absence, in the wood and furniture, great havoc made by insects, and his books spoilt by the larvæ, so much so that it gave a fair promise of the total destruction of the whole, unless he could find a method to exterminate the pests. He first painted the holes over with wax, but shortly after he found new worms which killed every particle of wood they touched. He plunged the ordinary wood in arsenic and oil, and other portions he anointed once every month with olive oil, in which he had boiled arsenic, until the colour and odour announced that the solution was perfect. The number then diminished. But a similar method could not be employed for books. M. Fabbroni resolved to anoint the back and sides with aquafortis; in an instant the dermestes abandoned their habitation, and wandered to the wood; the oil having evaporized they commenced to develop again, and again began their attacks on the newly bound books. He saw amongst the many spoilt books one |168| remaining intact, and on inquiry found that turpentine had been used in the paste. He then ordered that for the future all paste should be mixed with some such poison. This precaution had the beneficial result.

An example of how these insects were once dealt with: M. Fabbroni, the Director of the Museum of Florence, who owned a stunning library, discovered after being away for a year that the wood and furniture were heavily damaged by insects, and many of his books were ruined by larvae. It looked like everything would be completely destroyed unless he could find a way to get rid of the pests. He first tried sealing the holes with wax, but soon after, he found new worms that destroyed every piece of wood they came into contact with. He soaked regular wood in arsenic and oil and treated other parts with olive oil that had arsenic boiled into it, applying this mixture every month until it was fully infused. The number of pests then decreased. However, he couldn’t use the same approach for books. M. Fabbroni decided to treat the spine and sides of the books with aquafortis; instantly, the dermestes bugs left their home and moved to the wood. Once the oil evaporated, they started to breed again and renewed their attacks on the newly bound books. Among the many damaged books, he noticed one that remained unharmed, and upon investigation, he found that turpentine had been used in the paste. He then instructed that all future paste should be mixed with some type of poison. This precaution had the beneficial effect.

It is not only in Europe that these worms make such ravages in libraries. In the warmer climes they appear to be even more dangerous. And it is a fact that certain libraries are almost a mass of dust, by the books (and valuable ones) falling to pieces. Nearly all authors on this subject agree that the paste which is used is the first cause, or a great help, to all the waste committed by these dangerous bibliophobes. Then something must be put into the paste which will resist all these insects and keep them at a distance. The most suitable for this is a mineral salt, such as alum or vitriol; vegetable salts, such as potash, dissolve readily in a moist air and make marks or spots in the books. From experience, it is most desirable to banish everything that may encourage worms, and as it is very rare that persons who occupy themselves with books are not in want of paste, for some repairs or other, either to the bindings or to the books, subjoined is a method of preserving the paste and keeping it moist and free from insects.

It’s not just in Europe that these worms wreak havoc in libraries. In warmer climates, they seem to be even more harmful. It's a fact that some libraries are practically just piles of dust, with books (including valuable ones) falling apart. Almost all authors on this topic agree that the glue used is the main cause, or at least a major contributor, to all the damage done by these dangerous bibliophobes. So, something needs to be added to the glue that will fend off these insects and keep them away. The best options are mineral salts, like alum or vitriol; vegetable salts, like potash, dissolve easily in humid air and leave marks or stains on the books. From experience, it's best to get rid of anything that might attract worms. Since people who deal with books often need glue for repairs—whether for bindings or the books themselves—here's a method to preserve the glue, keeping it moist and free from insects.

Alum, as employed by binders, is not an absolute preservative, although it contributes greatly to the preservation of the leather. Resin as used by shoemakers is preferable, and in effect works in the same way; but oil of turpentine has a greater effect. Anything of strong odour, like aniseed, bergamot, mixed perfectly but in small quantities, preserves the paste during an unlimited time.

Alum, as used in binders, isn't a complete preservative, but it helps a lot in preserving leather. Resin, used by shoemakers, is better and works similarly; however, turpentine oil has a stronger effect. Anything with a strong scent, like aniseed or bergamot, when mixed perfectly but in small amounts, can preserve the paste for a long time.

Or, make the paste with flour, throw in a small quantity of ground sugar and a portion of corrosive sublimate. The sugar makes it pliant and prevents the formation of crust on the top. The sublimate prevents insects and fermentation. This salt does not prevent moisture, but as two or |169| three drops of oil are sufficient to prevent it, all causes of destruction are thus guarded against. This paste exposed to the air hardens without decomposition. If it is kept in an air-tight pot or jar, it will be always ready, without any other preparation.

Or, make the paste with flour, add a small amount of ground sugar and some corrosive sublimate. The sugar makes it flexible and stops a crust from forming on top. The sublimate keeps insects and fermentation away. This salt doesn’t stop moisture, but since just two or three drops of oil are enough to do that, all potential damage is therefore prevented. This paste hardens when exposed to air without breaking down. If it’s stored in an airtight container, it will always be ready to use without any further preparation.

Books placed in a library should be thoroughly dusted two or three times a year, not only to keep them in all their freshness, but also to prevent any development of insects and to examine for signs of dampness. The interior of a book also asks that care, which unfortunately is neglected very often. After having taken a book from the shelves it should not be opened before ascertaining if the top edge be dusty. If it is a book that has had the edge cut, the dust should be removed with a soft duster, or simply blown off. If it is a book which has uncut edges it should be brushed with rather a hard brush. By this method in opening the volume one need not be afraid that the dirt will enter between the leaves and soil them.

Books in a library should be dusted thoroughly two or three times a year, not just to keep them looking fresh, but also to prevent insect problems and check for any signs of dampness. The inside of a book needs care too, which is often overlooked. Before opening a book taken from the shelves, you should check if the top edge is dusty. If it’s a book with a cut edge, the dust should be removed with a soft duster or simply blown off. If it has uncut edges, it should be brushed with a stiffer brush. This way, when you open the book, you won’t have to worry about dirt getting in between the pages and soiling them.

Glue.—The best glue may be known by its paleness, but French glue is now manufactured of inferior quality, made pale by the use of acid, but which on boiling turns almost black. Good glue immersed in water for a day will not dissolve, but swell, while inferior will partly or wholly do so, according to quality.

Glue.—The best glue is usually identified by its light color, but French glue is now made with lower quality materials, made pale through the use of acid, which turns almost black when boiled. Good glue will swell when immersed in water for a day but won’t dissolve, while inferior glue will either partially or completely dissolve, depending on its quality.

In preparing glue, a few cakes should be broken into pieces and placed in water for twelve hours, then boiled and turned out into a pan to get cold; when cold, pieces may be cut out and placed in the glue-pot as wanted. This naturally refers to when large quantities are used, but small portions may be boiled in the glue-pot after soaking in water.

In making glue, break a few cakes into pieces and soak them in water for twelve hours, then boil them and pour them into a pan to cool down; once cool, you can cut out pieces and put them in the glue pot as needed. This primarily applies when you’re using large amounts, but smaller portions can be boiled in the glue pot after soaking in water.

Glue loses a great deal of its strength by frequent re-melting. It should always be used as hot as possible.

Glue loses a lot of its strength when it's melted and cooled repeatedly. It should always be used as hot as possible.

Rice glue or paste.—By mixing rice flour intimately with |170| cold water, and then gently boiling it, a beautifully white and strong paste is made. It dries almost transparent, and is a most useful paste for fine or delicate work.

Rice glue or paste.—By thoroughly mixing rice flour with |170| cold water, and then gently boiling the mixture, you create a beautifully white and sturdy paste. It dries to almost clear, making it an excellent option for fine or delicate work.

Paste.—For ordinary purposes paste consists simply of flour made into a thin cream with water and boiled. It then forms a stiffish mass, which may be diluted with water so as to bring it to any required condition. It is sometimes of advantage to add a little common glue to the paste. Where paste is kept for a long time, various ingredients may be added to prevent souring and moulding. A few cloves form perhaps the best preservative for small quantities; on the larger scale carbolic acid may be used; salicylic acid is also a good preservative, a few grains added to the freshly prepared paste will entirely prevent souring and moulding.

Paste.—For everyday use, paste is basically flour mixed with water to create a thin cream, which is then boiled. It turns into a somewhat stiff mass that can be thinned with water to achieve the desired consistency. Sometimes, adding a bit of regular glue can be beneficial for the paste. If the paste needs to be stored for a long time, various substances can be added to stop it from going sour or growing mold. A few cloves are probably the best preservative for small amounts; for larger batches, carbolic acid can be used. Salicylic acid is also effective; adding a few grains to the freshly made paste will completely prevent souring and molding.

Paste is now made on a commercial scale by various Paste Cos., who send it out to all parts. The paste is exceedingly good, and keeps a long time.

Paste is now produced commercially by various Paste Companies, which distribute it widely. The paste is very high quality and has a long shelf life.

Photographs.—A few words respecting the treatment of photographs may not be out of place here.

Photographs.—A few words about how to handle photographs might be useful here.

To remove a photograph from an old or dirty mount, the surplus of the mount should be cut away; it should then be put into a plate of cold water and be allowed to float off. A little warm water will assist in its coming away more easily, but should it not do so, the photograph has probably been mounted with a solution of india-rubber, and in that case, by holding it near the fire, the rubber will soften, and the print may easily be peeled off.

To take a photo off an old or dirty mount, cut away the excess mount. Then, place it in a plate of cold water and let it float off. A bit of warm water can help it come off more easily, but if that doesn’t work, the photo was likely mounted with a rubber solution. In that case, hold it near the fire to soften the rubber, and the print should peel off easily.

Very hot water is likely to set up a reaction if the prints were not well washed by the photographer when first sent out.

Very hot water is likely to cause a reaction if the prints weren't properly washed by the photographer when they were first sent out.

In mounting photographs, white boards should, as a rule, be avoided, because the colour of the boards is more pure than the lights of the photograph, and deaden the effect. A toned or tinted board is more suitable. |171|

In framing photographs, you should generally avoid white boards because their color is purer than the highlights in the photo, which diminishes the overall impact. A toned or tinted board works better. |171|

They should be damped, and evenly trimmed and pasted all over with thin best glue or starch, and well rubbed down with a piece of clean paper over the print. If any of the glue or starch oozes out from the sides, it should be wiped off with a clean damp sponge. As photographs lose their gloss in mounting, they must be rolled afterwards in order to restore it. A special machine is used for this.

They should be dampened and evenly trimmed, then pasted all over with the best thin glue or starch, and thoroughly rubbed down with a piece of clean paper over the print. If any glue or starch seeps out from the edges, it should be wiped off with a clean damp sponge. Since photographs lose their shine during mounting, they must be rolled afterward to bring it back. A special machine is used for this.

But it may be wished to introduce the silver print without mounting on a board. To do so, and to keep the print straight, paste a very thin paper on the back, stretching the paper well; this will counteract the pulling power albumen has, and the print will, if this be done properly, remain perfectly straight and not curl up.

But you might want to display the silver print without mounting it on a board. To achieve this and keep the print straight, glue a very thin paper to the back, stretching the paper tightly; this will counteract the pulling effect of the albumen, and if done correctly, the print will stay perfectly flat and won’t curl up.

Albumen.—Desiccated egg-albumen is now well known in the market in the form of powder. Three teaspoonfuls of cold water added to every 1 ⁄ 2 teaspoonful of powder represents the normal consistency of egg-albumen.13

Albumen.—Dried egg white is now commonly available in powdered form. For every 1 ⁄ 2 teaspoon of powder, add three teaspoons of cold water to achieve the typical consistency of egg white.13

[13] See Chapter on Finishing—“Albumen.”

The manufacture of egg-albumen in the neighbourhood of Moscow is carried on in the houses of the country people. The albumen however is generally roughly prepared and of bad appearance, and often spoils. But egg-albumen is also produced on a manufacturing scale in the neighbourhood of Korotscha, the largest establishment there numbering sixty to seventy workwomen, using about eight million eggs yearly, other establishments using less in proportion.

The production of egg whites near Moscow happens in local homes. However, the egg whites are usually poorly prepared and don't look great, often going bad quickly. In contrast, egg whites are also produced on a larger scale near Korotscha, where the biggest facility employs around sixty to seventy women and uses about eight million eggs a year, while other facilities use a smaller amount proportionately.

Albumen is also largely manufactured from blood; 5 oxen or 20 sheep or 34 calves are said to yield the same quantity of dry albumen, viz., 2 lbs. In producing blood-albumen for commerce, the objects borne in mind are the attainment of a substance whose solution is free from colour, possesses coagulation, and which is cheap.

Albumen is mainly made from blood; 5 oxen or 20 sheep or 34 calves are said to produce the same amount of dry albumen, which is 2 lbs. When making blood-albumen for sale, the goals are to achieve a clear solution, ensure it can coagulate, and keep it affordable.

To prevent tools, machines, etc., from rusting.—Boiled linseed oil, if allowed to dry on polished tools, will keep them |172| from rusting; the oil forms a coat over them which excludes contact from air.

To stop tools, machines, etc., from rusting.—Boiled linseed oil, when allowed to dry on polished tools, will keep them |172| from rusting; the oil creates a layer over them that keeps air away.

Dissolve 1 ⁄ 2 oz. of camphor in 1 lb. of lard; take off the scum, and mix as much blacklead as will give the mixture an iron colour. All kinds of machinery, iron or steel, if rubbed over with this mixture, and left on for 24 hours, and then rubbed with a linen cloth, will keep clean for months.

Dissolve 1 ⁄ 2 oz. of camphor in 1 lb. of lard; skim off the scum, and mix in enough black lead to give the mixture an iron color. Any kind of machinery, whether iron or steel, if coated with this mixture and left on for 24 hours, then wiped with a linen cloth, will stay clean for months.

To clean silver mountings.—To restore the colour of tarnished silver clasps, etc., boil the goods, either silver or plated, in enough water to cover them. For every pint of water put into it 2 ounces of carbonate of potash and a 1 ⁄ 4 lb. of whiting. After boiling them for about a quarter of an hour, clean with a leather, brush, and whiting. They will then look as good as new.

To clean silver mountings.—To restore the shine of tarnished silver clasps and similar items, boil them—whether they are silver or plated—in enough water to fully cover them. For every pint of water, add 2 ounces of potassium carbonate and a 1 ⁄ 4 pound of whiting. After boiling for about 15 minutes, clean them with a leather cloth, brush, and whiting. They will then look as good as new.

To clean sponges.—Soak the sponge well in diluted muriatic acid for twelve hours. Wash well, then immerse in a solution of hyposulphate of soda to which a few drops of muriatic acid has been added a few moments before. When sufficiently bleached, wash well, and dry in a current of air.

To clean sponges.—Soak the sponge thoroughly in diluted muriatic acid for twelve hours. Rinse it well, then immerse it in a solution of hyposulphate of soda to which a few drops of muriatic acid have been added just before. Once it’s sufficiently bleached, rinse it well again, and let it dry in a stream of air.

GLOSSARY
OF THE
TECHNICAL TERMS AND TOOLS USED IN BOOKBINDING.

ALL-ALONG.—When a volume is sewed, and the thread passes from kettle-stitch to kettle-stitch, or from end to end in each sheet, it is said to be sewed “all-along.”

All along.—When a book is sewn, and the thread goes from kettle-stitch to kettle-stitch, or from one end to the other in each page, it's called being sewn “all-along.”

ARMING PRESS.—A species of blocking press used by hand; so called from the use of it to impress armorial bearings on the sides of books.

ALERT PRESS.—A type of blocking press that is operated by hand; named for its use in imprinting coat of arms on the covers of books.

ASTERISK.—A star used by printers at the bottom of the pages meant to supply the places of those cancelled (see also CANCEL).

A*—A star used by printers at the bottom of the pages to indicate the locations of those canceled (see also CANCEL).

BACKING BOARDS.—Used when backing and for forming the groove. They are made of very hard wood, and sometimes faced with iron; are thicker on the edge intended to form the groove than upon the edge that goes towards the foredge, so that the whole power of the lying press may be directed towards the back.

BACKING BOARDS.—Used for backing and creating the groove. They are made from very hard wood and sometimes have an iron face; they are thicker on the edge meant to form the groove than on the edge that faces the foredge, allowing the full force of the lying press to be directed towards the back.

BACKING HAMMER.—The hammer used for backing and rounding; it has a broad flat face similar to a shoemaker’s hammer.

BACKING Hammer.—The hammer used for backing and rounding; it features a wide flat face similar to that of a shoemaker’s hammer.

BACKING MACHINE.—A machine for backing cheap work.

BACKING DEVICE.—A machine for supporting low-cost projects.

BANDS.—The cord whereon the sheets of a volume are sewn. When a book is sewn “flexible” the bands appear upon the back. When the back is sewn so as to imbed the cord in the back, the appearance of raised bands is produced by gluing narrow strips of leather across the back before the volume is covered.

BANDS.—The cord used to sew the pages of a book together. When a book is sewn with a “flexible” method, the bands are visible on the spine. If the spine is sewn in a way that embeds the cord inside, the raised band look is created by gluing narrow strips of leather across the spine before the book is covered.

BAND DRIVER.—A blunt chisel used in forwarding, to correct any irregularities in the bands of flexible backs.

BAND Driver.—A flat chisel used in moving things along, to fix any unevenness in the bands of flexible backs.

BAND NIPPERS.—Flat pincers used for nipping up the band in covering.

BAND Nippers.—Flat pliers used for gripping the band in covering.

BEADING.—The small twist formed when twisting the silk or cotton in head-banding.

BEADING.—The slight twist created when twisting the silk or cotton in head-banding.

BEATING HAMMER.—The heavy short-handled hammer used in beating (generally about 10 lbs.).

BEATING Hammer.—The sturdy short-handled hammer used for pounding (typically weighs around 10 lbs.).

BEATING STONE.—The bed on which books are beaten.

BEATING STONE.—The surface used for beating books.

BEVELLED BOARDS.—Very heavy boards with bevelled edges; used for antique work.

BEVELED BOARDS.—Very heavy boards with beveled edges; used for vintage work.

BLEED.—When a book has been cut down into the print it is said to have been bled.

BLEED.—When a book has been trimmed down for printing, it's said to have been bled.

BLIND-TOOLED.—When a book has been impressed with tools |174| without being gilt, it is said to be “blind-tooled” or “antique.”

BLIND-TOOLED.—When a book has been stamped with tools without any gilding, it is referred to as “blind-tooled” or “antique.”

BLOCKING PRESS.—Another and more general term for the arming press; one of the chief implements used in cloth work. Used for finishing the side of a cover by a mechanical process.

Blocking PRESS.—Another, more general term for the arming press; one of the main tools used in fabric work. It’s used for finishing the edge of a cover through a mechanical process.

BLOCKS OR BLOCKING TOOLS.—An engraved stamp used for finishing by means of the blocking press.

BLOCS OR BLOCKING Tools.—A stamped tool used for finishing with the blocking press.

BOARDS.—Are of various kinds, each denoting the work it is intended for, such as pressing boards, backing, cutting, burnishing, gilding, etc.

BOARDS.—Come in different types, each designed for a specific purpose like pressing boards, backing, cutting, burnishing, gilding, and so on.

BODKIN.—A strong and short point of steel fixed in a wooden handle, for making the holes through the mill-boards. The slips upon the back of the book are laced through the holes for attaching the mill-board to the book.

BODKIN.—A strong, short steel point attached to a wooden handle, used for creating holes in the mill-boards. The slips on the back of the book are threaded through these holes to secure the mill-board to the book.

BOLE.—A red earthy mineral, resembling clay in character, used in the preparation for gilding edges.

BOLE.—A red earthy mineral, similar to clay in texture, used for preparing edges for gold leaf application.

BOLT.—The fold in the head and foredge of the sheets. The iron bar with a screw and nut which secures the knife to the plough.

BOLT.—The crease in the head and edge of the sheets. The metal rod with a screw and nut that holds the knife to the plow.

BOSSES.—Brass or other metal ornamentations fastened upon the boards of books; for ornament or preservation.

BOSSES.—Brass or other metal decorations attached to the covers of books; used for decoration or protection.

BROKEN OVER.—When plates are turned over or folded a short distance from the back edge, before they are placed in the volume, so as to facilitate their being turned easily or laid flat, they are said to be broken over. When a leaf has been turned down the paper is broken.

BROKEN DONE.—When plates are flipped or folded a bit from the back edge, before they are placed in the volume, to make it easier to turn them or lay them flat, they are called broken over. When a page has been turned down, the paper is broken.

BURNISH.—The gloss produced by the application of the burnisher to the edges.

BURNISH.—The shine created by using the burnisher on the edges.

BURNISHERS.—Pieces of agate or bloodstone affixed to convenient handles.

BURNISHERS.—Chunks of agate or bloodstone attached to easy-to-hold handles.

CANCELS.—Leaves containing errors which are to be cut out and replaced by corrected pages (see ASTERISK).

CANCELS.—Pages with mistakes that need to be removed and replaced with corrected versions (see Asterisk).

CAP.—The envelope of paper used to protect the edges while the volume is being covered and finished.

CAP.—The paper wrapping used to safeguard the edges while the book is being bound and finished.

CASE-WORK.—When the cover is made independent of the book, the book being afterwards fastened into it. Refers principally to cloth and bible work.

CASE-WORK.—When the cover is created separately from the book, with the book being attached to it later. This mainly pertains to cloth and Bible work.

CATCH-WORD.—A word used and seen in early printed books at the bottom of the page, which word is the first on the following page. To denote the first and last word in an encyclopædia or other book of reference.

CATCH-WORD.—A word that appears at the bottom of a page in early printed books, which is the first word on the next page. It also refers to the first and last word in an encyclopedia or other reference book.

CENTRE TOOLS.—Independent tools cut for the ornamentation of the centre of panels and sides.

Center Tools.—Independent tools designed for decorating the center of panels and sides.

CLASP.—The hook or catch used for fastening the boards together when the book is closed; used formerly on almost every book.

CLASP.—The hook or clip used to secure the boards together when the book is closed; it was commonly used on nearly every book in the past.

CLEARING-OUT.—Removing the waste-paper, and paring away any superfluous leather upon the inside, preparatory to pasting down the end-papers.

Decluttering.—Taking out the waste paper and trimming any extra leather on the inside before gluing down the end papers.

CLOTH.—Prepared calico, sometimes embossed with different patterns, used for cloth bindings.

CLOTH.—Ready-made calico, sometimes featuring various embossed patterns, used for fabric bindings.

COLLATING.—Examining the sheets by the signatures after the volume has been folded, |175| to ascertain if they be in correct sequence.

COLLATING.—Checking the sheets by their signatures after the volume has been folded, |175| to make sure they are in the right order.

COMBS.—Instruments with wire teeth used in marbling.

COMBS.—Tools with wire teeth used in marbling.

CORNERS.—The triangular tools used in finishing backs and sides. The leather or material covering the corners of half-bound books. The metal ornaments used usually in keeping with clasps.

CORNERS.—The triangular tools used to finish backs and sides. The leather or material that covers the corners of half-bound books. The metal accents typically used to match the clasps.

CROPPED.—When a book has been cut down too much it is said to be cropped.

CROPPED.—When a book has been trimmed down too much, it's referred to as cropped.

CUT DOWN.—When a plough-knife dips downward out of the level it is said to “cut down”; on the contrary, if the point is out of the level upwards it is said to “cut up.”

CUT DOWN.—When a plow blade dips downward from the level, it’s called “cutting down”; on the other hand, if the tip rises above the level, it’s referred to as “cutting up.”

CUT UP.—Same as the last explanation.

C.U.T. UP. —Same as the last explanation.

DIVINITY CALF.—A dark brown calf used generally for religious books, and worked in blind or antique.

DIVINITY Calf.—A dark brown calfskin typically used for religious books, often crafted with a blind or antique finish.

DENTELLE.—As the word expresses. A style resembling lace work, finished with very finely cut tools.

DENTELLE.—As the word suggests. A style that looks like lace, crafted with very finely cut tools.

DOUBLED.—When in working a tool a second time it is inadvertently not placed exactly in the previous impression, it is said to be “doubled.”

Doubled.—When using a tool a second time and it’s not exactly aligned with the previous impression, it is called “doubled.”

EDGE-ROLLED.—When the edges of the boards are rolled, either in blind or in gold.

E-DGE-ROLLED.—When the edges of the boards are rolled, either in blind or in gold.

END-PAPERS.—The papers placed at each end of the volume and pasted down upon the boards.

E-PAPERS.—The sheets located at both ends of the book and glued to the covers.

FILLET.—A cylindrical tool used in finishing, upon which a line or lines are engraved.

FILLET.—A cylindrical tool used for finishing, featuring one or more engraved lines.

FINISHING.—The department that receives the volumes after they are put in leather. The ornaments placed on the volume. The person who works at this branch is termed a finisher.

FINISHING.—The department that gets the books after they’ve been bound in leather. The decorations added to the book. The individual who works in this area is called a finisher.

FINISHING PRESS.—A small press, used for holding books when being finished.

FINISHING PRESS.—A small press used to hold books during the finishing process.

FINISHING STOVE.—A heating box or fire used for warming the various tools used in finishing.

FINISHING COOKTOP.—A heating box or fire used for warming the various tools used in finishing.

FLEXIBLE.—When a book is sewn on raised bands, and the thread is passed entirely round each band. It is the strongest sewing done at the present time. This term is often misused for limp work, because the boards are limp or flexible.

FLEXIBLE.—When a book is sewn on raised bands, and the thread wraps completely around each band. This is the strongest type of sewing currently used. This term is often incorrectly used to refer to limp work, due to the boards being limp or flexible.

FOLDER.—A flat piece of bone or ivory used in folding sheets, and in many other manipulations; called also a folding stick. A female engaged in folding sheets.

FOLDER.—A flat piece of bone or ivory used for folding sheets and for various other tasks; also known as a folding stick. A woman who is folding sheets.

FOLDING MACHINE.—A machine invented to fold sheets, generally used in newspaper offices.

Folding Machine.—A machine designed to fold sheets, commonly used in newspaper offices.

FOREDGE.—The front edge of a book.

FOREDGE.—The front edge of a book.

FORWARDING.—The branch that takes the books after they are sewed, and advances them until they are put into leather ready for the finisher. The one who works at this branch is called a forwarder.

FORWARDING.—The part of the process where books are taken after being sewn and prepared for leather covering before being finished. The person who works in this area is known as a forwarder.

FULL-BOUND.—When the sides and back of a volume are covered with leather it is said to be full-bound.

FULL-BOUND.—When the sides and back of a book are covered with leather, it is called full-bound.

GATHERING.—Collecting the various sheets from piles when folded, so that the |176| arrangement follows the sequence of the signature.

Gathering.—Gathering the different sheets from the stacks when they’re folded, so that the |176| layout follows the order of the signature.

GILT.—Applies to both the edges and to the ornaments in finishing.

GILT.—Refers to both the edges and the decorative elements in finishing.

GLAIRE.—The white of eggs beaten up.

GLAIRE.—The egg whites are whipped.

GOLD CUSHION.—A cushion for cutting the gold leaf on.

GOLD Pillow.—A cushion for cutting gold leaf on.

GOLD KNIFE.—The knife for cutting the gold; long and quite straight.

GOLD Knife.—The knife used for cutting gold; it's long and very straight.

GOUGE.—A tool used in finishing; it is a line forming the segment of a circle.

Gouge.—A tool used for finishing; it creates a curved line that is part of a circle.

GRAINING BOARDS.—Boards used for producing a grain on calf and russia books. Grain of various form is cut in wood, and by pressure the leather upon which the boards are laid receives the impression.

GRAINING BOARDS.—Boards used to create a grain pattern on calf and russia books. Grain in different shapes is carved into wood, and by applying pressure, the leather that the boards are placed on receives the impression.

GRAINING PLATES.—Metal plates same as above.

GRAINING PLATES.—Metal plates as above.

GUARDS.—Strips of paper inserted in the backs or books intended for the insertion of plates, to prevent the book being uneven when filled; also the strips upon which plates are mounted.

GUARDS.—Strips of paper placed in the backs of books designed for holding plates, to keep the book from being uneven when filled; also the strips on which plates are attached.

GUIDES.—The groove in which the plough moves upon the face of the cutting press.

G guides.—The channel where the plough operates on the surface of the cutting press.

GUILLOTINE.—A machine used for cutting paper.

GUILLOTINE.—A tool used for cutting paper.

GUINEA-EDGE.—A roll with a pattern similar to the edge of an old guinea.

Genuine edge.—A roll with a pattern like the edge of an old guinea.

HALF-BOUND.—When a volume is covered with leather upon the back and corners; and the sides with paper or cloth.

HALF-BOUND.—When a book has leather covering on the spine and corners, and the sides are made of paper or cloth.

HAND-LETTERS.—Letters fixed in handles; used singly for lettering.

Handwritten letters.—Letters attached to handles; used individually for lettering.

HEAD AND TAIL.—The top and bottom of a book.

HEAD AND TAIL.—The top and bottom of a book.

HEAD-BAND.—The silk or cotton ornament worked at the head and tail of a volume, as a finish and to make the back even with the boards.

Headband.—The decorative silk or cotton piece placed at the top and bottom of a book to finish it off and make the spine flush with the covers.

IMPERFECTIONS.—Sheets rejected on account of being in some respect imperfect, and for which others are required to make the work complete.

IMPERFECTIONS.—Sheets turned down for being imperfect in some way, and others are needed to complete the work.

IN BOARDS.—When a volume is cut after the mill-boards are attached, it is said to be cut in boards.

I BOARDS.—When a book is trimmed after the cover boards are attached, it is referred to as being cut in boards.

INSET.—The inner pages of a sheet, cut off in folding certain sizes; to be inset in the centre of the sheet.

INSET.—The inner pages of a sheet, trimmed when folding into specific sizes; meant to be placed in the center of the sheet.

JOINTS.—The projection formed in backing to admit the mill-boards. The leather or cloth placed from the projection on to the mill-board is called a joint.

Joints.—The part that sticks out to hold the mill-boards. The leather or cloth laid from the projection onto the mill-board is referred to as a joint.

KETTLE-STITCH.—The chain-stitch which the sewer makes at the head and tail of a book. A corruption of either chain-stitch, or catch-up stitch.

Kettle stitch.—The chain stitch that the sewer creates at the beginning and end of a book. It's a variation of either chain stitch or catch-up stitch.

KEYS.—Little metal instruments used to secure the bands to the sewing press.

KEYS.—Small metal tools used to attach the bands to the sewing press.

KNOCKING-DOWN IRON.—A piece of iron having a small leg in the centre by which it is secured in the lying press. When fastened there it is used to pound or beat with a hammer the slips into the boards after they are laced in, so that they do not show when the book is covered.

KNOCKING-DOWN Iron.—A piece of iron with a small leg in the center that secures it in the lying press. When attached, it is used to pound or hit the slips with a hammer after they are laced in, so that they don’t show when the book is covered.

LACED IN.—When the mill-boards are attached to the volume by means of the slips being passed through holes |177| made in the boards, they are said to be laced in or drawn in.

LACED In.—When the mill boards are attached to the book by threading the slips through holes |177| made in the boards, they are said to be laced in or drawn in.

LAW CALF.—Law books are usually bound in calf left wholly uncoloured, hence the term for white calf.

LAW CALF.—Law books are typically bound in plain calf leather, which is why it’s called white calf.

LETTERING BLOCK.—A piece of wood, the upper surface being slightly rounded, upon which side labels are lettered.

Letttering BLOCK.—A wooden board with a slightly rounded top surface used for inscribing side labels.

LETTERING BOX.—A wooden box in which hand-letters are kept (see HAND-LETTERS).

Letttering Box.—A wooden box where hand-letters are stored (see HAND-LETTERS).

LINING-PAPERS.—The coloured or marbled paper at each end of the volume. Called also end-papers.

Lining papers.—The colored or marbled paper at each end of the book. Also referred to as endpapers.

MARBLER.—One who marbles the edges of books and paper.

MARBLER.—A person who decorates the edges of books and paper with marble patterns.

MARBLING.—The art of floating various colours on a size, from which it is transferred to paper or book edges. To stain or vein leather like marble.

MARBLING.—The technique of creating patterns by floating different colors on a liquid surface, which are then transferred to paper or the edges of books. It’s also used to stain or vein leather to resemble marble.

MARKING-UP.—When the back of a book is being marked for flexible sewing.

Markup.—When the back of a book is being marked for flexible sewing.

MILL-BOARD.—The boards that are attached to the book. Various kinds are in use now; the most common is made of straw, the best of old naval cordage.

MILLBOARD.—The boards attached to the book. Different types are currently in use; the most common is made from straw, while the best is made from old naval rope.

MITRED.—When the lines in finishing meet each other at right angles without overrunning each other, they are said to be mitred. Joined at an angle of 45°.

MITRED.—When the finishing lines meet at right angles without overlapping, they are called mitred. They connect at a 45° angle.

MUTTON-THUMPING.—A term used in bygone days, indicating the common binding of school books in sheep-skin.

Mutton-thumping.—A term used in the past, referring to the usual practice of binding school books in sheepskin.

MUTTON-THUMPER.—An old term indicating a bad workman.

Mutton Thumper.—An outdated term referring to a poor craftsman.

OFF-SET.—The impression made by the print against the opposite page, when a book has been rolled or beaten before the ink be dried. (Also SET-OFF.)

OFF-SET.—The mark left by the print on the opposite page when a book has been rolled or pressed before the ink dries. (Also SET-OFF.)

OUT OF BOARDS.—When a volume is cut before the boards are affixed, it is done out of boards. Nearly the whole of common work is done out of boards.

OUT OF BOARDS.—When a book is trimmed before the covers are attached, it is done out of boards. Almost all standard work is done out of boards.

OUT OF TRUTH.—When a book is not cut square.

OUT OF TRUTH.—When a book isn't cut evenly.

OVERCASTING.—An operation in sewing, when the work consists of single leaves or plates. Over-sewing.

OVERCASTING.—A sewing technique used when the fabric consists of individual sections or pieces. Over-sewing.

PALLET.—The tools used for finishing across backs.

Pallet.—The tools used for finishing across backs.

PANEL.—The space between the bands.

Panel.—The space between the bands.

PAPERING-UP.—Covering the edges after they are gilt, to protect them while the volume is being covered and finished (see CAP).

Papering-up.—Covering the edges after they are gilded, to protect them while the book is being covered and finished (see CAP).

PARING.—Reducing the edges of the leather by forming a gradual slope.

PARING.—Smoothing the edges of the leather by creating a gradual slope.

PARING KNIFE.—The knife used for paring.

PARING KNIFE.—The knife for paring.

PASTE-WASH.—Paste diluted with water.

Paste wash—Paste diluted with water.

PEEL.—A wooden instrument used to hang up damp sheets for drying.

PEEL.—A wooden tool used to hang up wet sheets for drying.

PENCIL.—A small brush of camel’s hair used for glairing.

Pencil.—A small brush made from camel hair used for applying glair.

PIECED.—Any space that has another leather upon it, as a lettering piece.

PIECED.—Any area that has another layer of leather on it, like a lettering piece.

PLOUGH.—The instrument used for cutting the edges when the book is in the lying press.

PLOUGH.—The tool used for trimming the edges when the book is in the lying press.

PLOUGH KNIFE.—The knife attached to the plough. |178|

PLOUGH Knife.—The knife connected to the plow. |178|

POLISHER.—A steel instrument for giving a gloss to the leather after finishing.

PUBLISHER.—A steel tool used to add shine to leather after it's finished.

PRESS.—Of various kinds, viz.: lying, cutting, standing, blocking, finishing, etc.

PRESS.—Of different types, such as: lying, cutting, standing, blocking, finishing, etc.

PRESS PIN.—A bar of iron used as a lever for standing presses; a smaller kind for lying presses.

Press Password.—A piece of iron used as a lever for standing presses; a smaller version for lying presses.

PRESSING BLOCKS.—Blocks of wood used for filling up a standing press when there are not enough books.

Pushing BLOCKS.—Wooden blocks used to fill a standing press when there aren’t enough books.

PRESSING BOARDS.—Boards used for pressing books between.

Pushing BOARDS.—Boards used for pressing books together.

PROOF.—The rough edges of certain leaves left uncut by the plough, are “proof” that the book is not cut down (see also WITNESS).

PROOF.—The jagged edges of some leaves that weren't trimmed by the plow are “proof” that the book hasn't been fully cut down (see also WITNESS).

RASPED.—The sharp edge taken off mill-boards.

RASPED.—The sharp edge smoothed out on mill-boards.

REGISTER.—The ribbon placed in a volume for a marker. A list of signatures attached to the end of early-printed books for the use of the binder. In printing—when on looking through a leaf the print on the recto and verso is not exactly opposite, it is said to be out of register.

Register.—The ribbon used as a bookmark in a book. A list of signatures at the end of early-printed books for the binder’s reference. In printing—when checking a page, if the print on the front and back isn't perfectly aligned, it's referred to as out of register.

ROLLING MACHINE.—A machine introduced to save the labour of beating, the sheets being passed between two revolving cylinders.

RROLLING Machine.—A machine designed to reduce the effort of beating, as the sheets are fed through two rotating cylinders.

ROLLS.—Cylindrical ornamental tools used in finishing.

ROLLS.—Cylindrical decorative tools used in finishing.

RUNNER.—The front board used in cutting edges.

RUNNER.—The front board used for cutting edges.

RUN-UP.—When the back has a fillet ran from head to tail without being mitred at each band, it is said to be “run-up.”

RUN-UP.—When the back has a strip running from head to tail without being cut at each joint, it is referred to as “run-up.”

SAWING-IN.—When the back is sawn for the reception of the cord in sewing.

SAWING-IN.—When the back is cut to fit the cord in sewing.

SAWING MACHINE.—A machine for sawing the backs of books quickly.

Sewing Machine.—A machine for quickly cutting the backs of books.

SETTING THE HEAD-BAND.—Adjusting the leather in covering so as to form a kind of cap to the head-band.

SETTING THE Headband.—Fixing the leather covering to create a sort of cap for the head-band.

SEWER.—The person who sews the sheets together on the sewing press—generally a female.

Sewer.—The person who stitches the sheets together on the sewing machine—usually a woman.

SEWING MACHINE.—A recent invention for the sewing of books with wire and thread.

Sewing Machine.—A new invention for sewing books using wire and thread.

SHAVING TUB.—The paper cut from the edges of a volume are called shavings. The receptacle into which they fall while the forwarder is cutting is termed the shaving tub.

SHAVING BATHTUB.—The bits of paper cut from the edges of a book are called shavings. The container into which they fall while the cutter is working is called the shaving tub.

SHEARS.—Large scissors used for cutting up mill-boards.

SHE HEARS.—Big scissors used for cutting millboards.

SHEEP.—An old term for all common work covered in sheep-skin.

SHEEP.—An outdated term for all common work that is done using sheepskin.

SIGNATURE.—The letter or figure under the footline of the first page of each sheet, to indicate the order of arrangement in the volume.

SIGNATURE.—The letter or number at the bottom of the first page of each sheet, used to show the order of arrangement in the volume.

SIZE.—A preparation used in finishing and gilding, formerly made with vellum, but can now be bought ready for use. When used on paper a thin solution of glue.

SIZE.—A material used in finishing and gilding, originally made with vellum, but now available ready to use. When applied to paper, it’s a thin solution of glue.

SLIPS.—The pieces of twine that project beyond the back of the volume after it is sewn.

SLIPS.—The strands of twine that extend beyond the back of the book after it has been stitched together.

SQUARES.—The portions of the boards that project beyond the edges after the book is cut.

SQUARES.—The parts of the boards that stick out beyond the edges after the book is trimmed.

STABBING.—The term used formerly for piercing the boards with a bodkin for the slips to pass through; more generally |179| known now as “holeing.” The operation of piercing pamphlets for the purpose of stitching.

STABBING.—The term that used to refer to puncturing the boards with a bodkin for the slips to go through; now more commonly known as “holeing.” This is the process of piercing pamphlets for the purpose of stitching.

STABBING MACHINE.—A small machine used for making the holes through the backs of pamphlets.

STABBING Machine.—A compact device used to create holes in the backs of pamphlets.

STANDING PRESS.—A fixed heavy press with a perpendicular screw over the centre.

STANDING PRESS.—A heavy, stationary press with a straight screw positioned vertically above the center.

START.—When any of the leaves are not properly secured in the back, and they project beyond the others, they are said to have started. When the back has been broken by forcing the leaves they start.

Start.—When any of the leaves aren’t properly secured in the back and stick out more than the others, they are considered to have started. When the back gets broken from forcing the leaves, they start.

STIFFENER.—A thin mill-board used for various purposes.

STIFFENER.—A thin piece of cardboard used for various purposes.

STITCHING.—The operation of passing the thread through a pamphlet for the purpose of securing the sheets together.

STITCHING.—The process of threading through a pamphlet to hold the sheets together.

STRAIGHT-EDGE.—A small board having one edge perfectly straight.

Straight-edge.—A small board with one side completely straight.

STOPS.—Small circular tools, adapted to “stop” a fillet when it intersects at right angles; used to save the time mitringmitreing would occupy.

STOPS.—Small circular tools, designed to “stop” a fillet when it intersects at right angles; used to save the time that mitering would take.

TENON SAW.—A small saw used by bookbinders for sawing the books for sewing. More strictly speaking a carpenter’s tool.

TENON SAW.—A small saw used by bookbinders to cut books for sewing. More accurately, it's a carpenter’s tool.

TITLE.—The space between the bands upon which the lettering is placed. The leaf in the beginning of a book describing the subject.

TITLE.—The area between the bands where the text is located. The page at the start of a book that outlines the topic.

TOOLS.—Applied particularly to the hand stamps and tools used in finishing.

Tools.—Specifically refers to the hand stamps and tools used in finishing.

TRIMMING.—Shaving the rough edge of the leaves of a book that is not to be cut.

Trimming.—Cutting the uneven edge of the leaves of a book that shouldn't be trimmed.

TRINDLE.—A thin strip of wood or iron.

TRINDLE.—A narrow piece of wood or metal.

TURNING-UP.—The process of cutting the foredge in such a manner as to throw the round out of the back until the edge is cut. All books that are cut in boards have a pair of trindles thrust between the boards and across the back to assist the operation.

TURNING-UP.—The process of trimming the foredge in a way that makes the back round until the edge is cut. All books that have hard covers have a pair of supports placed between the covers and across the back to help with the process.

TYING-UP.—The tying of a volume after the cover has been drawn on, so as to make the leather adhere better to the sides of the bands; also for setting the head-band.

Tying up.—The process of securing a book after the cover has been applied, to improve the adhesion of the leather to the sides of the bands; also used for positioning the head-band.

TYPE.—Metal letters used in printing and lettering.

TYPING.—Metal letters used for printing and making signs.

TYPE-HOLDER.—An instrument for holding the type when used for lettering.

TYPE-HOLDER.—A tool for holding the type when used for lettering.

VARNISH.—Used as a protection to the glaire when polished on the covers of books.

Varnish.—Used to protect the glaze when polished on book covers.

WHIPPING.—Another term for overcasting, but when longer stitches are made.

WIPPING.—Another term for overcasting, but with longer stitches.

WITNESS.—When a volume is cut so as to show that it has not been so cut down, but that some of the leaves have still rough edges. These uncut leaves are called “Witness” (see PROOF).

WITNESS.—When a book is trimmed in a way that shows it hasn’t been completely trimmed down, leaving some of the pages with rough edges. These untrimmed pages are known as “Witness” (see PROOF).

WRINKLE.—The uneven surface in a volume, caused by not being properly pressed or by dampness, also caused by improper backing.

WINKLE.—The bumpy or uneven texture in a book caused by inadequate pressing or moisture, also resulting from improper backing.

INDEX.

Acids, effect of, on leather, 133.

Acids and their effects on leather, 133.

Advantage, comparative, of paste and glue, 93.

Advantage, comparative, of paste and glue, 93.

—— of flexible binding, 28.

—— of flexible binding, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— of graining calf, 144.

—— of grain-fed calf, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— of vinegar over paste water when finishing, 127.

—— of vinegar over paste water when finishing, 127.

Albumen, 171.

Albumen, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Antique finishing, 122.

Vintage finish, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— tools, method of working, 122.

—— tools, work method, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Arming press, 117.

Press armament, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Artificial heat, 46.

Artificial heat, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Artists’ vellum, 147.

Artists' parchment, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Athenæum letter on trimming, 43.

Athenæum letter on pruning, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Azuré tools, 113.

Azuré tools, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Back, calf, polishing a, 140.

Back, calf, polishing a, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— finishing a (cut), 130.

finishing a cut, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— full gilt, 129.

full gold, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— mitred, 129–139.

mitred, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— run up, 129–140.

run up, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Backs, flat, 48.

Backs, flat, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— suitable for calf work (cut), 138.

—— suitable for calf work (cut), 138.

Backing, 48.

Backing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— (cut), 49.

(cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— boards (cut), 48, 50.

boards (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

—— flexible work, 50.

flexible remote work, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— hammer (cut), 49.

—— hammer (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— machines, 50.

machines, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Band nippers (cut), 93.

Band cutters, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bands, putting on, 88.

Bands, performing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bar roll, 133.

Bar roll, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bath, effect upon stains of wrong, 158.

Bath, effect upon stains of wrong, 158.

Beating, 9.

Beating, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— hammer (cut), 9.

—— hammer (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— gold books, 10.

gold books, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Beating stone, 9.

Beating stone, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bibles, etc., edges of, 122.

Bibles, etc., edges of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— end papers for, 33.

—— end papers for, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— finishing of, 122.

finishing of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bindings, monastic, 111.

Bindings, monastery, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Blind finishing, 122.

Blind finishing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— —— beauty of, 125.

—— —— beauty of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— —— colour of, 122.

—— —— color of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Blocking, 149.

Blocking, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— calf, 153.

calf, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— cloth, 153.

cloth, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— in gold, 153.

—— in gold, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— morocco, 153.

Morocco, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— old method of, 116.

—— old method of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— press, 150.

—— press, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— sides, 151.

—— sides, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— silk, 146.

—— silk, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— velvet, 146.

velvet, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Blocks, 151.

Blocks, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Blood stains, removing, 163.

Removing blood stains, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Board, backing, 48.

Board, support, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— cutting, 54.

cutting, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— trimming, 41.

—— trimming, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Boards, cutting in, 64.

Boards, slicing in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— cutting out of, 64.

—— cutting out of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— made, 55.

—— made, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— for photographs, 170.

—— for photos, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bolt knife (cut), 61.

Bolt cutter, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Books, enemies of, 166.

Books, foes of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Book-worms, 167.

Book lovers, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— to keep away, 168.

stay away, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Brass type, 129.

Brass font, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bread, cleaning with, 161.

Cleaning with bread, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Bronze end paper, 34.

Bronze endpaper, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Brush, finger, 68.

Brush, finger, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— sprinkling, 68.

sprinkling, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Burnishers, 79.

Burnishers, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— edge (cuts), 81.

edge (cuts), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Burnishing edges, 81.

Burnishing edges, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— marbled paper, 73.

marbled paper, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Burnt documents, deciphering, 166.

Burnt documents, decoding, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Burr on knife, 79.

Burr on knife, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Calf, back polishing, 137.

Calf, back buffing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— blocking, 153.

blocking, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— Cambridge, 104.

Cambridge, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— colouring, 100.

coloring, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— colouring, preparing for, 102.

coloring, getting ready for, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— colouring, black, 101.

coloring, black, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— colouring, brown, 102.

brown, coloring, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— colouring, yellow, 102.

coloring, yellow, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— covering in, 94.

covering in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— dabbing, 106.

dabbing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— effect of glue on, 89.

effect of glue on, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— extra, 142.

extra, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— finishing, 135.

finishing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— graining, 144.

—— graining, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— graining, advantage of, 144.

graining, benefit of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— green and light, 139–141.

green and light, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— handling, 94.

handling, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— lettering, 140.

lettering, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— marbling, 105.

marbling, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— marbling, preparing for, 104.

marbling, prepping for, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— neat, 137.

cool, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— pasting down, 99.

—— pasting down, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— sides, finishing, 141.

—— sides, completing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— sides, polishing, 142.

—— sides, polishing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— work, backs suitable for (cut), 138.

—— work, backs suitable for (cut), 138.

—— sprinkling, 103.

sprinkling, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— sprinkling, emblematic, 103.

—— sprinkling, symbolic, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— sprinkling, preparing for, 103.

—— sprinkling, getting ready for, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Cambridge calf, 104.

Cambridge calf, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Capping up edges, 82.

Capping edges, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Cat’s paw, 106.

Cat's paw, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Charcoal fire for finishing, 121.

Charcoal fire for finishing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Chemical colouring of leather, 133.

Leather dyeing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Chloride of lime solution, 159.

Lime chloride solution, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Chlorine, restoring writing effaced by, 165.

Chlorine, bringing back writing that has been erased by, 165.

Cleaning, 157.

Cleaning, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— off stick, 58–59.

off stick, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— removing single leaf for, 162.

Removing one leaf for, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Cleaning silver mountings, 172.

Cleaning silver mounts, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— sponges, 172.

sponges, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— with india-rubber, 161.

—— with rubber, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— with bread, 161.

—— with bread, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Cloth blocking, 153.

Cloth blocking, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— covering with, 95.

covering with, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— joints, 38.

joints, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— smooth, 95.

smooth, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Cobb paper, 33.

Cobb paper, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Collating, 13.

Collating, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Colour of blind work, 122.

Color of blind work, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Colours for books, suggested, 96.

Book color suggestions, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— for marbling, 69.

—— for marbling, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— for sprinkling, 68.

—— for sprinkling, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Coloured edges, fancy, 69.

Colored edges, stylish, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— paste paper, 35.

Paste paper, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— plates, 17.

—— plates, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Colouring calf, 100.

Coloring calf, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— calf preparing for, 102.

calf training for, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— calf, black, 101.

calf, black, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— calf, brown, 102.

calf, brown, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— yellow, 102.

yellow, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Colouring edges, 67.

Coloring edges, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— of leather, chemical, 133.

—— of leather, synthetic, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— plain, for edges, 69.

—— plain, for edges, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Comb marble, 72.

Comb pebble, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Cord, sizes of, 22.

Cord sizes, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Cords, lay, 23.

Cords, lay down, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Cotton wool, 120.

Cotton balls, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Covers, cutting leather, 90.

Covers, cutting leather, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Covering, 90.

Covering, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— half bound work, 96.

half-bound book, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— preparing for, 87.

getting ready for, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— with calf, 94.

—— with baby, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— with cloth, 95.

—— with fabric, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— with morocco, 90.

—— with Morocco, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— with parchment, 94.

with parchment, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— with roan, 95.

—— with roan, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— with russia, 94.

—— with Russia, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— with satin, 95.

—— with satin, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— with silk, 95.

—— with silk, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— with vellum, 94.

—— with parchment, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— with velvet, 95.

—— with velvet, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Cut against, 54.

Cut across, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— true, to tell if boards are, 56.

—— true, to tell if boards are, 56.

—— to tell if book is, 64.

—— to tell if book is, 64.

Cushion, gold, 78.

Cushion, gold, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Cutting, 59.

Cutting, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— in boards, 64.

—— on boards, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— out of boards, 64.

Out of boards, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— board, 54.

board, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— foredge, 62.

foredge, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— gold leaf, 80.

gold leaf, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— head, 61.

—— head, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— leather covers, 90.

—— leather cases, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— machines (cuts), 65, 66.

—— machines (cuts), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

—— mill-board, 52.

millboard, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— press and plough (cut), 60.

press and plow (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— tail, 62.

—— tail, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Dabbing calf, 106.

Dabbing calf, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Damp stains, 162.

Damp spots, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— repairing books damaged by, 162.

repairing books damaged by __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Deciphering burnt documents, 166.

Decoding charred documents, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Dentelle border, 132.

Lace border, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Derome tools (cuts), 115.

Derome tools (cutting), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Dibdin, Dr, 95.

Dibdin, Dr, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Disadvantage of backing machines, 51.

Disadvantage of supporting machines, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— flat backs, 48.

flat backs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— lettering pieces, 136.

lettering designs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— wire sewing, 30.

wire sewing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Dishes for washing, 159.

Dishes to wash, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Documents, deciphering burnt, 166.

Documents, deciphering burnt, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Doublé, 132.

Doublé, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Down, pasting, 97.

Down, pasting, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Dragon, gum, 70.

Dragon, gum, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Drawing in, 57.

Drawing in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Drawings, fixing, 165.

Drawings, repairs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— preserving, 165.

preserving, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Dry preparation, 145.

Dry prep, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— making, 145.

doing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Drying, artificial heat in, 46.

Drying with artificial heat, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Duplicate sheets, 19.

Duplicate sheets, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Dust, removing, 161.

Dusting, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Dutch marble paper, 34.

Dutch marble paper, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Edge burnishers (cuts), 81.

Edge burnishers (cuts), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Edges of bibles and religious books, 122.

Edges of bibles and religious books, 122.

—— of boards, finishing, 132.

—— of boards, finishing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— burnishing, 81.

burnishing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— capping up, 82.

Wrapping up, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— coloured, fancy, 69.

colorful, fancy, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— coloured, plain, 69.

colored, solid, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— colouring, 67.

coloring, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— gilding, 80.

gold plating, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— gilt, 78.

gold, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— gilt, dull, 81.

—— gold, dull, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— gilt, painted, 82.

gilded, painted, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— gilt, on red, 82.

gold, on red, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— gilt, in the round, 81.

gilt, round __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— gilt, solid, 81.

gilded, solid, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— gilt, tooled, 82.

gold-leafed, embossed, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— marbled, 69.

marbled, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— marbled, paper, transferring to, 74–75.

marbled paper transferring to __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— marbling, 73.

marbling, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— marbled, on gilt, 78.

marbled, on gold, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— marbled, under gilt, 78.

marbled, under gold leaf, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— sprinkled, 67.

—— sprinkled, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— sprinkled marble, 67.

sprinkled marble, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— transferring marbled paper to, 74–75.

transferring marbled paper to, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— uncut, 41.

uncut, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Effaced by chlorine, restoring writing, 165.

Worn away by chlorine, restoring writing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— by oxymuriatic acid, restoring writing, 165.

—— by oxymuriatic acid, restoring writing, 165.

Emblematic sprinkling, 103.

Emblematic sprinkling, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— tooling, 117.

— tools, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

End papers, 33.

Endpapers, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— papers, bronze, 34.

—— papers, bronze, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— papers, cobb, 33.

—— papers, cobb, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— papers, coloured paste, 35.

—— paper, colored glue, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— papers, making, 35.

—— documents, creating, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— papers, marbled, 33.

—— marbled papers, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— papers, printed and fancy, 34.

—— printed and decorative papers, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— papers, putting on, 38.

—— papers, putting on, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— papers, surface, 33.

papers, surface, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— papers, for bibles, etc., 33.

—— papers, for bibles, etc., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— papers, for school and public library books, 41.

—— papers, for school and public library books, 41.

Ends, sewing (cut), 40.

Ends, sewing (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Enemies of books, 166.

Enemies of books, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Extra, calf, 142.

Extra, calf, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Faded MSS., restoring, 165.

Faded manuscripts, restoring, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— writing, restoring, 165.

—— writing, restoring, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Fat stains, removing, 164.

Removing fat stains, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Fillet (cut), 118.

Fillet (slice), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Filling up, 137.

Filling up, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— up, saw cuts, 89.

—— up, saw cuts, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Finger brush, 68.

Finger brush, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Finger-marks, 163.

Fingerprints, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— removing, 163.

removing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Finishing, 111.

Finishing up, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— ancient, 117.

ancient, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— a back (cut), 130.

a back (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— a back, calf, 135.

—— a back, calf, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— a back, full gilt, 137.

—— a fully gilded back, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— a back, run up, 139.

—— a back, run up, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— blind, antique or monastic, 122.

—— blind, vintage or monastic, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— blind, tools for, 122.

—— blind, tools for, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— calf sides, 141.

calf sides, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— charcoal fire for, 121.

charcoal grill for, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— edges of boards, 132.

—— edges of boards, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— extra calf sides, 142.

extra calf sides, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— flexible work, 124.

remote work, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— gold, 125.

—— gold, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— gold, tools for, 122.

—— gold, tools for, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— half morocco book, 127.

half leather book, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— inside of a book, 132–141.

inside a book, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— medium, 126.

medium, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— medium, importance of proper, 126.

—— medium, significance of proper, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— morocco sides, 131.

Morocco sides, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— morocco imitation, 133.

Moroccan imitation, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— paper, 144.

—— document, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— press (cuts), 121–122.

—— press (cuts), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— religious books, 122.

—— religious texts, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— roan, 133.

roan, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— russia, 145.

russia, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— sides calf, 135.

—— calf sides, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— sides calf extra, 142.

—— sides cut extra, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— sides morocco, 131.

—— sides Morocco, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— sides, morocco imitation, 133.

—— sides, Moroccan imitation, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— silk, 146.

—— silk, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— stove (cuts), 120.

—— stove (slices), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— taste in, 117.

taste in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— tools, 118–122.

tools, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— tools, heat for, 128.

—— tools, heat for, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— vellum, 147.

vellum, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— velvet, 146.

velvet, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— with dry preparation, 145.

—— with dry prep, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Fixing drawings, 165.

Fixing illustrations, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Flat backs, 48.

Flat backs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Flexible binding, advantages of, 28.

Advantages of flexible binding, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— how to tell, 29.

how to tell, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— not to show, 29, 89.

not to show, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Flexible work, backing, 50.

Remote work, support, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— work, cleaning off, 59.

—— work, cleaning up, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— work, covering, preparing for, 89.

—— work, covering, preparing for, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— work, finishing, 124.

—— work, completing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— work, gluing up, 45.

—— work, glue-up, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— work, marking up, 20.

—— work, annotating, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— work, mock, 90.

work, tease, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— work, sewing, 23.

—— work, sewing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— work, sewing (cut), 27.

—— work, sewing (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Folding, 3.

Folding, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— stick, 4.

—— stick, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— machine (cut), 7.

machine (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— maps, 15.

maps, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Folio, 4.

Folio, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Foredge, cutting, 62.

Foredge, cutting, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Forwarding, 33.

Sending, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Fox-marks, 163.

Fox marks, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— marks, removing, 163.

—— marks, removing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

French, dab, 106.

French, dab, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— method of pressing, 19.

pressing method, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— method of trimming, 42.

trimming method, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— paring knife (cut), 90.

paring knife (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— paring knife, method of using (cut), 91.

—— paring knife, how to use (cut), 91.

Full gilt back, finishing, 137.

Full gilt back, finish, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Gall, ox, for marbling, 71.

Gall, ox, for marbling, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Gascon, 115.

Gascon, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— tools (cuts), 114.

—— tools (cuts), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Gathering, 8.

Gathering, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— machine, 8.

—— machine, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

German, method of gluing up, 45.

German, gluing method, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— paring knife (cut), 91.

paring knife (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— paring knife, method of using (cut), 91.

—— paring knife, method of using (cut), 91.

Giggering, 124.

Giggering, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Gilding edges, 80.

Gilded edges, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Gilt back, full, 129.

Gilt back, full, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— edges, 78.

—— edges, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— edges, dull, 81.

—— edges, dull, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— edges, painted, 82.

—— edges, painted, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— edges, solid, 81.

—— edges, solid, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— edges, tooled, 82.

—— edges, crafted, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— in the round, 81.

— in the round, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— marbling on, 78.

marbling on, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— marbling under, 78.

marbling underneath, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— on red, 82.

—— on red, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— top, 41.

—— top, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Glaire, 119.

Glaire, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— how to make, 119.

how to make, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— water, 79.

—— water, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Glue, 169.

Glue, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— comparative advantages of paste and, 93.

—— comparative advantages of paste and, 93.

—— effect on calf of, 89.

—— effect on calf of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— rice, 169.

—— rice, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— to tell good, 169.

—— to tell good, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Gluing up, 45.

Gluing together, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— up flexible work, 45.

Boost flexible work, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— up, German method of, 45.

—— up, German approach to, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Gold, blocking in, 153.

Gold, blocking in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— cushion, 78.

—— cushion, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— finishing, 125.

finishing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— finishing, tools for, 128.

finishing tools for __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— knife, 79.

knife, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— leaf, 79–119.

leaf, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— leaf, cutting, 80.

leaf, cutting, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Grain, treatment of straight, 92.

Grain, straight treatment, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— treatment of leather with no, 92.

—— treatment of leather with no, 92.

Graining calf, 144.

Grain-fed calf, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— advantage of, 144.

take advantage of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Graining up, 92.

Grain up, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Grolier tools (cuts), 113.

Grolier tools (cuts), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Groove, 7.

Vibe, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Guarding plates, etc., 15.

Guarding plates, etc., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Guards, object of, 16.

Guards, object of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Gum Tragacanth (Gum Dragon), 70.

Gum Tragacanth (Gum Dragon), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Half binding, 96.

Half binding, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— binding, covering, 96.

—— binding, covering, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— binding, lining for, 53.

—— binding, lining for, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— binding, pasting down, 100.

—— binding, gluing down, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Hammer, beating (cut), 9.

Hammer, striking (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Hand finishing, 116.

Hand finishing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— letters, 118.

—— letters, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Handling calf, 94.

Handling calf, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Head band, setting, 93.

Headband, setting, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— bands, stuck on, 80.

—— bands, stuck on, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— banding, 83.

— grouping, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— banding (cut), 84.

banding (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— banding on old books, 84.

banding on vintage books, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— of book cutting, 61.

—— of book cutting, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Heat, artificial, 46.

Artificial heat, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— for finishing tools, 128.

—— for finishing tools, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— for polishing tools, 140.

—— for polishing tools, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Henry III., bindings of, 114.

Henry III, bindings of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Holes in back, filling up, 89.

Holes in the back, filling up, 89.

Hollow backs, 87.

Hollow backs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Imitation morocco, finishing, 133.

Imitation leather, finishing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Importance of proper finishing medium, 126.

Importance of using the right finishing medium, 126.

Incombustible, to render paper, 166.

Fireproofing paper, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

India rubber, 119.

India rubber, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— rubber, how to use, 161.

—— rubber, how to use it, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Ink stains, removing, 163.

Ink stains, removal, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— stains, marking, 164.

stains, marking, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Inlaid work, 133.

Inlaid design, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Inlaying, 134.

Inlaying, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— Viennese method of, 135.

Viennese method of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Insects, 166.

Insects, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— poison for, 168.

poison for, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Inside of book, finishing, 132–141.

Inside the book, finishing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Interleaving, 18.

Interleaving, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Iron, knocking-down (cut), 6.

Iron, cutting (knockdown), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— polishing (cut), 119.

polishing (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Joint, 7.

Joint, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Joints, cloth, 38–99.

Joints, fabric, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— morocco, 98.

morocco, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Kettle stitch, 25–28.

Kettle stitch, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Keys (sewing), 23.

Sewing keys, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Knife, bolt (cut), 61.

Knife, bolt (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— burr on, 79.

burr on, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— gold, 79.

gold, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— paring, French (cut), 90.

paring, French (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— paring, method of holding, (cut), 91.

—— paring, method of holding, (cut), 91.

—— paring, German (cut), 91.

cut, German, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— paring, German, method of holding (cut), 92.

—— paring, German, method of holding (cut), 92.

—— sliding (cut), 60.

sliding (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— trimming, 42.

— trimming, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Knocking down iron (cut), 6.

Demolishing iron (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Lard, 124.

Lard, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Lay cords, 23.

Lay cables, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Lead type, 129.

Lead type, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Leaf, gold, 79.

Leaf, gold, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— gold, cutting, 80.

gold, cutting, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— gold, thickness of, 80.

—— gold, thickness of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— removing single, 162.

removing single, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Leather covers, cutting, 90.

Leather covers, cutting, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— kinds of, 90.

types of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— non-porous, 126.

non-porous, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— porous, 126.

porous, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Leaves, re-sizing, 162.

Leaves, resizing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Lettering, 117.

Lettering, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— calf, 140.

calf, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— pieces, 136.

—— pieces, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— pieces, disadvantages of, 136.

—— downsides of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— pieces, for vellum books, 148.

—— pieces, for leather books, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— pieces, substitute for, 136.

—— parts, replace with, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Letters, hand, 129.

Letters, handwritten, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Lining boards, 55.

Lining boards, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— boards, half binding, 55.

—— boards, half binding, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— boards, whole binding, 55.

boards, complete binding, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— paper for, 88.

paper for, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— up, 87.

—— up, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Machine, backing, 50.

Machine, support, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— cutting (cuts), 65, 66.

cutting (cuts), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

—— folding (cut), 7.

—— folding (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— gathering, 8.

—— gathering, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— mill-board cutting (cuts), 54.

millboard cutting (cuts), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— mill-board cutting, steam, (cut), 54.

millboard cutting, steam, (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— rolling (cut), 11.

—— rolling (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— rounding, (cut), 47.

—— rounding, (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— sawing in (cut), 22.

sawing in (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— sewing (cut), 31.

sewing (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— sewing, 32.

sewing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— sewing wire, 32.

— sewing wire, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Machines, to prevent, rusting, 171.

Machines to prevent rust, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Making end papers, 35.

Making endpapers, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Maps, mounting (cut), 14.

Maps, mounting (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— throwing out, 13.

getting rid of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Marble comb, 72.

Marble comb, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— edges, sprinkled, 67.

—— edges, sprinkled, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— nonpareil, 72.

unmatched, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— shell, 72.

—— shell, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— Spanish, 72.

Spanish, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— spot, 72.

—— location, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— tree, 105.

—— tree, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Marbled edges, 69.

Marbled edges, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— paper, 33.

—— document, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— paper, burnishing, 73.

paper, polishing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— paper, old Dutch, 34.

—— paper, vintage Dutch, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— paper, transferring to edges, 74–75.

—— paper, moving to the edges, 74–75.

Marblers, mechanical (cuts), 75.

Mechanical marblers, cuts, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Marbling, 34–71.

Marbling, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— ancient instructions for, 76.

ancient instructions for, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— calf, 105.

calf, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— colours for, 69.

colors for, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— edges, 73.

—— edges, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— edges, on gilt, 78.

—— edges, on gold, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— edges, under gilt, 78.

—— edges, under gold, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— ox gall for, 71.

ox bile for, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— paper, 73.

—— document, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— preparing for, 104.

—— getting ready for, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— requisites for, 69.

requirements for, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— set, 77.

set, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— size for, 70.

size for, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— trough (cut), 70.

—— trough (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Margins, 3–43.

Margins, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Marking ink stains, removing, 164.

Ink stain removal, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— up, 20.

—— up, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mechanical marblers (cuts), 75.

Mechanical marblers (cuts), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Medium for finishing, 126.

Finishing medium, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— importance of proper, 126.

importance of proper, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mill-board, cutting, 52.

Millboard, cutting, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— cutting machine (cut), 53.

cutting machine (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— cutting machine, steam, (cut), 54.

—— cutting machine, steam, (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— shears, 52.

—— shears, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mill-boards, 51.

Mill boards, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— made, 55.

—— made, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— name of, 51.

name of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— sizes of, 52.

sizes of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— price of, 51.

cost of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Missing sheets, 19.

Missing sheets, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mitre piece (cut), 131.

Miter cut, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mitred back, 129.

Mitred back, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mock flexible binding, 90.

Mock flexible binding, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Monastic, bindings, 111.

Monastic bindings, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— finishing, 122.

finishing up, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— tools (cuts), 112.

—— tools (cuts), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Morocco, blocking, 153.

Morocco, blocking, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— imitation, finishing, 133.

— imitation, completion, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— joints, 98.

—— joints, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— pasting down, 97.

pasting down, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— sides, finishing, 141.

—— sides, completing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mosaic work, 133.

Mosaic art, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mounting, maps, 15.

Mounts, maps, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— photographs, 171.

—— photos, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mountings, cleaning silver, 172.

Mountings, cleaning silver, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

MSS., preserving, 165.

MSS., preserving, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— restoring faded, 165.

restoring faded, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mull, 89.

Mull over, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Mud stains, 162.

Mud stains, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— removing, 162.

removing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Neat, calf, 137.

Neat, calf, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Nippers, band (cut), 93.

Nippers, band (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Nitric acid, effect upon leather, 133.

Nitric acid's impact on leather, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Nonpareil marble, 72.

Nonpareil marble, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Non-porous leathers, 126.

Non-porous leathers, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Object of guards, 16.

Guard duty, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— of trimming, 42.

—— of trimming, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Old books, beating, 10.

Old books, thumping, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— head-banding in, 84.

head-banding in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— sewing, 25.

sewing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Old writing, reviving, 164.

Old writing, revival, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Opening books, care in, 169.

Opening books, handle with care, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Overcasting, 18.

Overcasting, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Oversewing, 18.

Overlocking, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Ox gall for marbling, 71.

Ox gall for marbling, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Oxford vellum, 147.

Oxford parchment, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Oxymuriatic acid, restoring writing effaced by, 165.

Oxymuriatic acid can bring back writing that has been faded by, 165.

Painting covers, 133.

Painting covers, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Pallet (cut), 118.

Pallet (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— using the, 123.

using the, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Paper, bronze end, 34.

Paper, bronze tip, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— burnishing marbled, 73.

burnishing marbled, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— Cobb, 33.

Cobb, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— finishing, 145.

finishing up, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— for lining up, 88.

—— for queueing up, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— incombustible, to render, 166.

—— fireproof, to make, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— marbled, 33.

marbled, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— marbled, old Dutch, 34.

marbled, vintage Dutch, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— marbling, 73.

marbling, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— paste, 35.

—— paste, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— printed and fancy end, 34.

printed and fancy end, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— surface, 33.

—— surface, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— waterproof, to render, 165.

waterproof, to make, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Papers, end, 33.

Documents, conclusion, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— end, making, 35.

—— end, creating, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Parchment, 147.

Parchment, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— covering with, 94.

—— covering with, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— vegetable, 147.

vegetable, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Paring, 91.

Paring, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— knife, French (cut), 90.

knife, French (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— knife, French, method of using (cut), 91.

—— knife, French, method of using (cut), 91.

—— knife, German (cut), 91.

knife, German (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— knife, German, method of using, 92.

—— knife, German, method of using, 92.

Paste, 170.

Paste, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— and glue, comparative advantages, 93.

—— and glue, comparative advantages, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— for white morocco, 94.

—— for white Morocco, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— for paper, 35.

—— for paper, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— rice, 169.

—— rice, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— to prevent, moulding and souring, 170.

—— to prevent, molding and spoiling, 170.

—— water, effect upon leather, 127.

—— water, impact on leather, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Pasting, 36.

Pasting, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— calf, 99.

calf, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— down, 97.

—— down, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— down half bindings, 100.

—— down half bindings, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— Russia, 99.

Russia, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— single sheets, 17.

single sheets, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— up, 36.

—— up, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Peel, 159.

Peel, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Photographs, boards for, 170.

Photos, boards for, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— mounting, 171.

—— mounting, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— removing, 170.

removing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Pieces, lettering, 136.

Pieces, lettering, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— lettering, disadvantages of, 136.

lettering, drawbacks of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— lettering, substitute for, 136.

—— lettering, replacement for, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Plates, 14.

Plates, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— coloured, 17.

colored, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— guarding, 15.

guarding, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Plough, round, 42.

Plow, round, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Polishing calf back, 140.

Polishing calf's back, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— calf sides, 142.

calf sides, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— heat for, 140.

—— heat for, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Polishing iron (cut), 119.

Polishing iron (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Porous leathers, 126.

Porous leathers, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Preparation, dry, 145.

Preparation, dry, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Preparing for covering, 87.

Preparing for coverage, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— for covering flexible work, 89.

—— for covering remote work, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— for covering flexible work, not to show, 89.

—— for covering flexible work, not to show, 89.

—— for covering mock flexible work, 90.

—— for covering mock flexible work, 90.

Preserving drawings, MSS., etc., 165.

Preserving art, manuscripts, etc., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Press, arming, 117.

Press, equipping, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— blocking, 150.

blocking, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— cutting (cut), 60.

cutting, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— finishing (cut), 121–122.

finishing cut, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— lying, 7, 37.

—— lying, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

—— sewing (cut), 24.

sewing (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— standing, 18.

—— standing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— standing, American (cut), 19.

—— standing, American (style), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Pressing, 58, 143.

Pressing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

—— Parisian, mode of, 19.

Parisian style, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— various sized books, 58.

various-sized books, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Proof, 57.

Proof, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Public library books, 41.

Public library books, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Pulling, 5.

Pulling, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Putting on bands, 88.

Wearing bands, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— on end papers, 38.

—— on endpapers, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Refolding, 5.

Refolding, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Register, 3.

Sign up, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Religious books, edges, 122.

Religious books, edges, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— books, end papers, 33.

—— books, endpapers, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— books, finishing, 122.

books, finishing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Removing blood stains, 163.

Removing blood stains, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— damp stains, 162.

damp stains, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— dust, 161.

—— dust, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— fat stains, 164.

fat stains, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— finger-marks, 163.

fingerprints, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— fox-marks, 163.

fox-marks, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— ink stains, 163.

—— ink stains, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— marking ink stains, 164.

marking ink stains, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— mud stains, 161.

mud stains, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— single leaf for cleaning, 162.

single cleaning leaf, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— photographs, 171.

—— photos, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— water stains, 161.

watermarks, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— writing, 163.

writing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Repairing books damaged by damp, 162.

Repairing books that have been damaged by moisture, 162.

Re-sizing leaves, 162.

Re-sizing leaves, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Restoring faded MSS., 165.

Restoring faded manuscripts, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— writing effaced by chlorine, 165.

—— writing washed out by chlorine, 165.

—— writing effaced by oxymuriatic acid, 165.

—— writing erased by oxymuriatic acid, 165.

—— writing effaced by sea water, 165.

writing washed away by seawater, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— writing faded by time, 165.

writing faded over time, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Reviving old writing, 164.

Reviving old writing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Rice glue or paste, 169.

Rice glue or paste, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Roan, covering with, 95.

Roan, covering with, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— finishing, 133.

finishing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Roll, bar, 133.

Roll, bar, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Rolling, 10.

Rolling, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Rolling machine (cut), 11.

Rolling cutter, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Round plough, 42.

Round plow, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Rounding, 46.

Rounding, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— machine, 47.

—— machine, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Roman vellum, 147.

Roman vellum, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Runner, 54.

Runner, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Run up back, 129, 139.

Run back up, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Russia, finishing, 145.

Russia, completing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— imitation, 96.

—— imitation, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— pasting down, 99.

—— pasting down, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— treatment of, 94.

—— treatment of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Rusting, to prevent, tools, etc., 171.

Prevent rust on tools, etc., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Satin, covering with, 95.

Satin, covering with, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Saw cuts, depth of, 22.

Saw cuts, depth, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— cuts, filling up, 89.

cuts, filling up, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— marks (cut), 21.

—— marks (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— tennon, 21.

tenon, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Sawing in, 21.

Sawing in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— in machine (cut), 22.

—— in machine (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

School books, end papers for, 41.

Textbooks, endpapers for, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Scrapers, 79.

Scrapers, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Set, marbling, 77.

Set, marbling, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Set off, 12.

Go, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Setting head band, 93.

Headband setting, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Sewing, 23.

Sewing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— disadvantage of wire, 30.

disadvantage of wire, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— ends, mode of (cut), 40.

—— ends, cut mode, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— flexible (cut), 27.

flexible (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— flexible work, 23.

remote work, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— keys, 23.

—— keys, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— machine, 32.

—— machine, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— machine (cut), 31.

—— machine (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— old books, 25.

old books, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— ordinary (cuts), 26.

regular (cuts), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— press (cut), 24.

—— press (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— thread, 27.

—— thread, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— wire, 30.

—— wire, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— machine, 32.

—— machine, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Shears, mill-board, 52.

Shears, millboard, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Sheets, 3.

Sheets, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— duplicate, 19.

duplicate, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— missing, 19.

—— missing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Shell marble, 72.

Shell marble, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Sides, blocking, 151.

Sides, blocking, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— calf, finishing, 141.

calf, completing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— calf, extra finishing, 142.

calf, extra finish, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— calf, polishing, 142.

calf, polishing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— morocco, finishing, 131.

morocco, wrapping up, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— siding, 142.

—— siding, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— tooling, 125.

—— tools, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Sieve, sprinkling, 68.

Sift, sprinkle, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Signatures, 4.

Signatures, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Silk blocking, 146.

Silk blocking, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— covering with, 95.

—— covering with, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— finishing, 146.

finishing up, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Silver mountings, to clean, 172.

Silver mountings, for cleaning, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Single sheets, pasting, 17.

Single sheets, gluing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Size, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

—— for marbling, 70.

—— for marbling, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Sizes of books, 4–5.

Book sizes, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— of cord, 22.

—— of cord, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— of mill-boards, 52.

—— of mill boards, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Sizing, 74–159.

Sizing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Siding sides, 142.

Siding with sides, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Sliding knife (cut), 60.

Sliding knife (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Smooth cloth, covering with, 95.

Smooth fabric, covering with, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Spanish marble, 72.

Spanish marble, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Sponges, 119.

Sponges, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— cleaning, 172.

cleaning, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Spot marble, 72.

Spot marble, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Sprinkled edges, 67.

Sprinkled edges, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— marble edges, 67.

marble edges, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Sprinkling brush, 68.

Brush for sprinkles, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— calf, 103.

calf, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— calf, fancy, 103.

calf, stylish, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— calf, preparing for, 103.

calf, getting ready for, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— colours, 68.

—— colors, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— sieve, 68.

sieve, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Stains, blood, removing, 163.

Stains, blood, cleanup, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— damp, 162.

damp, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— effect of wrong bath upon, 158.

—— effect of wrong bath on, 158.

—— fat, removing, 164.

—— fat, removing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— ink, removing, 164.

ink, removing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— mud, removing, 162.

—— mud, cleaning, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— removing, 158.

removing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— removing, different, 158.

removing, different, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— water, how to tell, 161.

—— water, how to identify, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— water, removing, 161.

—— water, eliminate, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Stamps, 151.

Stickers, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Standing press, 18.

Overhead press, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— press, American (cut), 19.

press, American (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Steel-faced backing boards, 50.

Steel backing boards, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Stick, folding, 4.

Stick, foldable, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— cleaning off, 58, 59.

Cleaning up, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__

Stone, beating, 9.

Stone, hitting, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Stove, finishing (cut), 120.

Stove, finishing cut, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Straight grain leather treatment, 92.

Straight grain leather care, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Stuck on head bands, 86.

Stuck on headbands, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Substitute for lettering pieces, 136.

Substitute for lettering pieces, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Surface paper, 33.

Surface paper, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Swelling, 27.

Swelling, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Tail, cutting, 62.

Tail, trimming, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Taste in finishing, 117.

Finishing taste, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Tennon saw, 21.

Tennon saw, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Thread, sewing, 27.

Thread, sewing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Throw up backs, 89.

Throw up backs, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Throwing out maps (cut), 16.

Discarding maps (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Thumb marks, removing, 163.

Thumbprints, removal, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Time, restoring writing faded by, 165.

Time, restoring faded writing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Title, 128.

Title, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Tools, Derome, 115.

Tools, Derome, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— finishing, 118.

finishing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— for antique finishing, 122.

—— for vintage finishing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— for gold finishing, 122.

for gold finishing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— Grolier, 113.

Grolier, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— Le Gascon, 114.

Le Gascon, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— monastic, 112.

monk-related, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— to prevent, rusting, 171.

to prevent rust, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— Venetian (cuts), 113.

Venetian blinds, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Tooled gilt edges, 82.

Gilded edges, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Tooling, emblematic, 117.

Tooling, symbolic, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— sides, 125.

—— sides, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Top, gilt, 41.

Top, gold, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Tree marble, 105.

Tree marble, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Trimming, 41.

Trimming, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— board, 41.

—— board, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

——French method of, 42.

French method of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— knife, 42.

knife, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— letter on, 43.

—— letter on, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— machine, 44.

machine, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— machine (cut), 42.

—— machine (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— object of, 42.

object of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Trindles, 62.

Trindles, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Trough, marbling (cut), 70.

Trough, marbling (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— two sheets on, 29.

—— two sheets on, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Type, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— brass, 129.

—— brass, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— holder (cut), 118.

—— holder (cut), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— lead, 129.

—— lead, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Uncut edges, 41.

Rough edges, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Unsized paper, to tell, 80.

Unsized paper, to communicate, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Varnish, 120.

Varnish, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Varnishing, 143.

Varnishing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— object of, 120.

object of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Vegetable parchment, 147.

Vegetable parchment, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Vellum artists, 147.

Vellum artists, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— binding, lettering pieces, 149.

binding, lettering elements, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— binding, old, 94.

—— binding, vintage, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— covering with, 94.

—— covering with, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— finishing, 147.

finishing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— Oxford, 147.

Oxford, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— Roman, 147.

Roman, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Velvet, blocking, 146.

Velvet, blocking, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— covering with, 95.

—— covering with, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— finishing, 146.

finishing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Venetian tools (cuts), 113.

Venetian tools (cuts), __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Viennese method of inlaying, 135.

Viennese inlay technique, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Vinegar, advantage of, 127.

Vinegar, its benefits, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Washing, 158.

Washing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— dishes for, 159.

dishes for, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— requisites for, 159.

requirements for, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Water, glaire, 79.

Water, slime, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— stains, how to tell, 161.

—— stains, how to identify, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— stains, removing, 161.

stain removal, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Waterproof, rendering paper, 165.

Waterproof rendering paper, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

White morocco, paste for, 92.

White Moroccan paste for, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Whole binding, lining boards for, 55.

Whole binding, lining boards for, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Wire sewing, 30.

Wire sewing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— sewing, disadvantage of, 30.

-- sewing, downsides of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— sewing, machine, 32.

sewing machine, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Writing effaced by chlorine, restoring, 165.

Chlorine-erased writing, restoring, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— effaced by oxymuriatic acid, restoring, 165.

—— erased by oxymuriatic acid, restoring, 165.

—— faded by sea water, reviving, 165.

—— faded by seawater, reviving, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— faded by time, reviving, 165.

—— faded by time, reviving, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— removing, 164.

removing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

—— reviving old, 164.

reviving old, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Wrong bath, effect upon stains of, 158.

Wrong bath, effect on stains of, 158.

CHISWICK PRESS:—C. WHITTINGHAM AND CO., Took to court, Chancery Lane.
TRANSCRIBER’S NOTE

Original printed spelling and grammar are retained, with a few exceptions noted below. Many illustrations have been moved from their original locations to nearby places between paragraphs. Original printed page numbers look like this: “|81|”.

Original printed spelling and grammar are kept, with a few exceptions noted below. Many illustrations have been relocated from their original spots to nearby areas between paragraphs. Original printed page numbers appear like this: “|81|”.

link to __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__

Page 21. In “by sewing a small book on fine bands”, changed “fine” to “five”.

Page 21. In “by sewing a small book on five bands”, changed “fine” to “five”.

Page 46. Changed “spontanenusly” to “spontaneously”.

Page __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Changed “spontaneously” to “spontaneously”.

Page 107. Changed “bason” to “basin”.

Page __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Changed “bason” to “basin”.

Page 121. A new paragraph break was inserted between “become dangerous” and “A finishing press is”.

Page 121. A new paragraph break was added between “become dangerous” and “A finishing press is”.

Page 164. Changed “subsitute” to “substitute”.

Page __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Changed “substitute” to “replace”.

Page 179, Glossary, Entry “Stops”. Changed “mitring” to “mitreing”.

Page 179, Glossary, Entry “Stops”. Changed “mitring” to “mitreing”.

Page 182, Index, Entry “Covering”. In “preparing f r, 87”, changed “f r” to “for”.

Page 182, Index, Entry “Covering”. In “preparing for, 87”, changed “for” to “for”.


Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!